Pioneer AS-LX70 Operating Instructions
Operating Instructions | SX- L X 7 0W SSP-L X70ST AS- L X70 HTP-LX HTP-LX70_En.book 1 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fir e or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_B_En W ARNING To prevent a fir e hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC to 35 úC ( 41 úF to 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference. HTP-LX70_En.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En CAUTION The î ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En W ARNING To prevent injur y , the receiver subwoofer must be securely attached to the floor in accordance with this operating instructions. HTP-LX70_En.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
4 En Contents Contents WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 01 Speaker Setup Guide Safety precautions when setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Home theater sound setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Standard surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Front surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Preparing the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Using the supplied speaker bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 When not using the supplied speaker bases . . . . . . 7 Connect the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Additional notes on speaker placement . . . . . . . . . . . 7 02 Connecting up Receiver subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Back of display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 03 Controls and displays Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Operating the receiver subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Operating the built-in FM/AM tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Operating Pioneer plasma televisions and TVs . . . . 17 Operating a Pioneer Blu-ray Disc player . . . . . . . . . 18 Operating a Pioneer DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Operating a Pioneer HDD/DVD Recorder . . . . . . . . 20 Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . 21 Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Operating the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Using the LCD touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 04 Getting started Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 05 Listening to your system Effective Sound (for optimum sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Center image setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using Advanced Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Genre Sync Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Using the Sound Retriever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Listening with MCACC Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using Midnight, Loudness and Quiet listening modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adjusting the bass and treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adjusting sound delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 06 Listening to the radio Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Improving poor FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Improving poor AM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Changing the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Memorizing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Changing the frequency step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 07 Surround sound settings Using the Sound Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Channel level setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Speaker distance setting1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Dynamic Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Dual mono setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . 32 LFE Attenuate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone . . . . 32 08 Other connections Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Connecting for digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Connecting an analog audio component . . . . . . . . 33 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Listening to an external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 About control out connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 HDMI mode setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 HTP-LX70_En.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En Contents 09 HDMI Control Making the HDMI Control connections . . . . . . . . . . 37 Setting the HDMI options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Setting the HDMI Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Setting the Auto Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Audio input settings from plasma televisions (TV Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Synchronized amp mode operations . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 10 Additional information Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Setting the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . 40 TV Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Displayed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 WhatâÂÂs in the box Please confirm that the following items are all supplied. Accessory box (AS-LX70): ⢠Remote control (page 15) ⢠AA/LR6 alkaline batteries x4 (page 21) ⢠Power cords x3 (page 12) ⢠Display unit (page 13) ⢠AM loop antenna (page 11) ⢠FM wire antenna (page 11) ⢠Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) (page 23) ⢠HDMI cable ⢠Control cable (page 35) ⢠Display cable (page 11) ⢠Optical digital cable (page 12) ⢠iPod cable (page 34) ⢠This operating instructions Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX70W) box: ⢠Cleaning cloth Speakers (SSP-LX70ST) box: ⢠Speakers (front/center x2, surround x2) ( page 6, 11) ⢠Speaker cables x6 (page 11) ⢠Speaker bases x4 (page 6) ⢠Non-skid pads x16 ( page 6, 7) ⢠Screws x4 (page 7) HTP-LX70_En.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Speaker Setup Guide 01 6 En Chapter 1 Speaker Setup Guide Safety precautions when setting up When assembling the speakers, lay them down flat on their side to avoid accidents or injury. Make sure to use a stable surface when assembling, setting up, and placing the speakers. Home theater sound setup Depending on the size and characteristics of your room, you can place your speakers in one of two ways using this system. Standard surround setup This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound. Front surround setup This setup is ideal when rear surround speaker placement isnâÂÂt possible or you want to avoid running long speaker cables in your listening area. Use this setup together with the Front Stage Surround Advance modes in page 26. Preparing the speakers This unit comes with speaker bases that can be used to adjust the speakers to the design of the room in which they are placed. Using the supplied speaker bases 1 Attach the non-skid pads to the speaker bases, as shown below. Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base of each speaker base. Surround (L) Surround (R) Front/center (L) Front/center (R) Listening position Listening position Receiver subwoofer Surround (L) Surround (R) Front/center (L) Front/center (R) Listening position Listening position Receiver subwoofer Each speaker base Non-skid pads x 16 HTP-LX70_En.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Speaker Setup Guide 01 7 En 2 Attach the speaker bases. Place the speaker atop a supplied speaker base, and fix the base in place by using one of the supplied screws. ⢠The supplied speaker bases come in two different shapes. You can determine the correct base for a speaker by checking if the screwâÂÂs location lines up correctly when the speaker is placed atop the base. (There are specific bases for the front/center (L) and surround speaker (R), and for the front/center (R) and surround speaker (L), with two of each type included.) When not using the supplied speaker bases ⢠Attach the non-skid pads to the base of each of the front/center and surround speakers (as shown). Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base of each speaker. Connect the speaker system Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly. After connecting everything, place the speakers as shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound. After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup (page 23) to complete your surround sound setup. Additional notes on speaker placement ⢠Install the main front left and right speakers at an equal distance from the TV. ⢠When using the Standard surround setup, install the surround speakers slightly above ear level for optimum effect. ⢠When using the Front surround setup, separate the left and right speakers by about 1.5 m for optimum effect. Precautions: ⢠Do not place the speaker on an unstable surface, as doing so may cause the speaker to fall and cause damage or bodily injury. ⢠All speakers supplied with this system are magnetically shielded. However, depending on the installation location, color distortion may occur if a speaker is installed extremely close to the screen of a television set. If this happens, turn the power switch of the television set OFF, and turn it ON after 15 min to 30 min. If the problem persists, place the speaker system away from the television set. ⢠For safety, make sure that there is no exposed bare speaker wire outside of the speaker terminals. ⢠Do not connect the supplied speakers with any other amplifier. This may result in malfunction or fire. ⢠Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system. ⢠The speaker system grill cannot be removed. Do not try to forcibly remove it since doing so may damage the grille. ⢠When cleaning the cabinet, use the provided cleaning cloth. Do not allow alcohol, thinner, benzene, or insecticides to come into contact with the surface, since finish discoloration may occur. Also, when using chemically impregnated cleaning cloths, follow their precautions carefully. Speaker Screw Sp eaker base Front/center and surround speakers Non-skid pads x 16 HTP-LX70_En.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 8 En Chapter 2 Connecting up Receiver subwoofer Side panel ⢠There is a cover over the connectors on the side panel. A. When making connections, lift the two hooks and remove the cover. B. Once connections are finished, line up the three positions and place the cover back in its original position. 1 CONTROL OUT jacks (x2) Connect other Pioneer components with the supplied control cable . 2 DIGITAL OPTICAL IN jacks (x2) To listen to optical digital audio, change the input to Digital 1 or Digital 2 . When the digital output jacks of your TV are connected to these jacks, set â TV Input â (see page 39). 3 AM LOOP antenna terminal 4 FM antenna socket 5 ANALOG AUDIO IN jacks Handle sound from an external component by using stereo audio code. To listen to analog audio, change the input to Analog . When the analog output jacks of your TV are connected to these jacks, set â TV Input â (see page 39). 6 SPEAKERS terminals Match the colors of the speaker cords to their respective connectors. 7 AC IN â Power inlet FRONT R R L RL LR L AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 ⦠FRONT CENTER SURROUND SUBWOOFER OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 OUT 1 OUT 2 SPEAKERS ( 8 ⦠) ANALOG AUDIO IN ANTENNA DIGIT AL CONTROL 1 2 5 6 7 4 3 AC IN A B HTP-LX70_En.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 9 En Rear panel 8 HDMI OUT connector Connect to a television that has an HDMI terminal. 9 HDMI IN connectors (x3) Use high-quality audio/video connection with compatible HDMI devices. To select this input, choose HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 . 10 SYSTEM connector Connect to the display unit. Back of display unit 1 SYSTEM connector Connect to the receiver subwoofer. 2 F.AUDIO input To listen to audio from an external component, connect with a stereo mini-plug cable. Once connected, the input automatically changes to Front Audio In . 3 iPod input terminal Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio source. When you connect an iPod, the input automatically changes to iPod . 4 MCACC SETUP MIC jack Use to connect the supplied microphone for the Auto MCACC setup (see page 23). HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 89 10 F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM 1 2 3 4 HTP-LX70_En.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 10 En Basic connections Important ⢠When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket. WARNING ⢠Pioneer bears no responsibility for accidents resulting from faulty assembly or installation, insufficient mounting strength of walls, mounting fixtures (or other building fixtures), misuse or natural disasters. HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 2 SYSTEM F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT INPUT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM 1 FL CL FR CR SR SL Listening position Listening position AM loop antenna FM antenna Rear panel Display unit Receiver subwoofer Display cable Front/center speaker (R) Front/center speaker (L) Surround speaker (R) Surround speaker (L) Side panel FRONT R R L RL LR L AM LOOP FRONT CENTER SURROUND SUB ANALOG AUDIO IN ANTENNA 3 4 HTP-LX70_En.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 11 En 1 Connect the display unit to the receiver subwoofer. Plug the display cable into the connector on the rear of the display unit, then plug the other end of the display cable into SYSTEM connector on the receiver subwoofer. Caution ⢠Do not attempt to attach the display unit to the wall. 2 Assemble the AM loop antenna. a. Bend the stand in the direction indicated by the arrow. b. Clip the loop onto the stand. c. If you want to fix to a wall or other surface, perform step b after first securing the stand with screws. It is recommended that you determine the reception strength before securing the stand with the screws. 3 Connect the AM and FM antennas 1 . a. Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM antenna terminal 2 . For each terminal, press down on the tab to open; insert the wire, then release to secure. b. Push the FM antenna 3 plug onto the center pin of the FM antenna socket. 4 Connect each speaker. ⢠Each speaker cable has a color-coded connector at one end and two wires at the other end. ⢠Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire. ⢠Connect the wires to the speaker. Each speaker in the illustration can be identified by means of the color- coded indicator provided on the rear-surface model label. Match the color-coded wire with the color indicator on the model label, then insert the color- coded wire into the red ( ) side and the other wire into the black ( â ) side. ⢠Connect the other end to the color-coded speaker terminals on the side of the receiver subwoofer. Make sure to insert completely. Be careful when inserting the speaker plug, as it must be inserted in the proper direction when being plugged into one of the terminals. Please make sure to connect correctly. Note 1⢠Keep antenna cables away from other cables, the display unit and receiver subwoofer. ⢠If reception with the supplied antenna is poor, see Improving poor FM reception and Improving poor AM sound on page 28 or Connecting external antennas on page 35. ⢠Do not attach any antenna other than the provided loop antenna, or an external antenna as described on page 35. 2⢠DonâÂÂt let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances. ⢠If radio reception is poor, you may be able improve it by re-inserting each antenna wire into the opposite terminal. ⢠For best reception, do not untwist the AM loop antenna wires or wrap them around the loop antenna. 3 To ensure optimum reception, make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit. a b c 1 2 3 Color-coded wire (Connect to speaker) Co lor-coded connector (Connect to receiver subwoof er) Black (âÂÂ) Red ( ) Color-coded wire HTP-LX70_En.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 12 En Caution ⢠These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage . To prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts. ⢠Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system. ⢠Do not connect the supplied speakers to any amplifier other than the one supplied with this system. Connection to any other amplifier may result in malfunction or fire. ⢠After connecting the plugs, pull lightly on the cables to make sure that the ends of the cables are securely connected to the terminals. Poor connections can create noise and interruptions in the sound. ⢠If the cablesâ wires happen to be pushed out of the terminals, allowing the wires to come into contact with each other, it places an excessive additional load on the amp. This may cause the amp to stop functioning, and may even damage the amp. 5 If you have a DVD player or other source 1 component you want to connect, connect it now before connecting the power cord in the next step. See page 33 for how to connect a digital source component. 6 Connect the receiver subwoofer to your TV. ⢠Connect the HDMI OUT jack on receiver subwoofer to an HDMI input on your TV. 7 Connect an audio cable from your TV to the receiver subwoofer. ⢠To listen to TV audio on this unit, you must connect the TVâÂÂs audio output to an audio input jack on this unit. You can connect by either a digital (optical) or analog audio cable. For digital audio, connect to DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 on the receiver subwoofer. To use the HDMI Control function when you are connected to a supported Pioneer plasma television, you must connect via HDMI. ⢠You must first set â TV Input â to switch the audio from a plasma television with the HDMI Control function or to switch the input source of this unit to TV audio and operate your TV with the supplied remote control. For more information, see Operating Pioneer plasma televisions and TVs on page 17 and Audio input settings from plasma televisions (TV Input) on page 39. 8 Connect the power cord. 2 ⢠Connect each power cord to the AC inlet on the receiver subwoofer. Connect each power cord to a wall socket in the following order. 1. Receiver subwoofer 2. TV ⢠Run the cords that are connected to the side panel of the receiver subwoofer over the back side of the unit, and replace the cover on the side panel. HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 R L AM LOOP OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 ANALOG AUDIO IN ANTENNA DIGIT AL TV 7 6 From Audio output or From digital audio output (optical) To HDMI input Receiver subwoof er Rear panel Side panel Note 1 Make sure to connect a TV or monitor (for video sources) to take advantage of this systemâÂÂs home theater potential. Please refer to the instruction manual supplied with your TV or monitor for connection details. 2⢠Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system. ⢠Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system. ⢠After connecting this unit to an AC outlet, a 15-second initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during initialization. The HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during initialization, and you can turn this unit on once it has stopped blinking. HTP-LX70_En.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 13 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Display unit 1 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the receiver subwoofer on/into standby. 2 INPUT SELECTOR (page 33) Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio inputs ( HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 , Digital 1 , Digital 2 , Analog , iPod or Front Audio In ). 3 VOL /â buttons Use to adjust the volume. 4 POWER ON indicator (Blue) 5 Front panel display See page 14 for details. 6 IR remote sensor (page 22) 7 HDMI indicator (Red) Lights when this receiver subwoofer is connected to HDMI (HDCP) compatible component. Also lights during initialization, after you plug this unit into an AC outlet. T op buttons 1 2 3 4 7 5 6 HTP-LX70_En.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 14 En Display 1 DIRECT Lights when Direct Sound is selected (i.e. Effective Sound is off)(page 24). 2 Listening mode indicators STEREO Lights when the Stereo mode is selected or when a stereo source is being played back in the Auto listening mode (page 26). F.S.SURR. Lights when one of the Front Stage Surround Advance listening modes is selected (page 26). ADV.SURR. Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening modes is selected (page 25). 3 2 PRO LOGIC II Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding (page 25). 4 Sound processing indicators Lights when any of the Loudness, Midnight, Quiet or tone controls feature is selected (page 27) 5 S.RTRV Lights when Sound Retriever is active (page 26). 6 HDMI THROUGH Lights when HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode . 7 MCACC Lights when MCACC Effect is switched on (page 27). Blinks during Auto MCACC Setup (page 23). 8 Digital format indicators 2 DIGITAL Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source (page 24). DTS Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 24). DTS 96/24 Lights during playback of a DTS 96/24 decoding (page 24). DSD î PCM Lights during DSD (Direct Stream Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs. PCM Lights during playback of PCM signals. 9 Character display 10 Tuner indicators Lights when a broadcast is being received. Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode. Lights when FM mono reception is selected. 11 Lights when sleep timer is active (page 40). 2 DIGIT AL DTS 96/24 DIRECT STEREO F .S.SURR. LO UDNESS MIDNIGHT DNR DIAL OG HDMI THROUGH QUIET TONE S.RTRV MCACC ADV .SURR. 2 PRO L OGIC DSD PCM 2 1 4 6 5 89 10 11 3 7 HTP-LX70_En.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 15 En Remote control ⢠For more information on using the remote control, see Operating the remote control on page 22. Operating the receiver subwoofer This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver subwoofer. Note that the controls change when you have chosen the input function for separate connected devices. 1 î RECEIVER Switches the receiver subwoofer to On/Standby. 2 î TV Switches the TV to On/Standby. TV CTRL Switches the remote control to the TV operating mode (no effect on the current input source of this unit). 3 î SOURCE Switches the power for the selected component to On/ Standby (page 22). 4 Input select buttons Change the input for this unit. You will also need to press one of these buttons when operating another connected component via this remote control. HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 Switch input from HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 . TV Switches to the input selected at TV Input setup (page 39). FM/AM (page 28) Switches between FM and AM bands. LINE (page 34) Press repeatedly to select one of the receiver subwooferâÂÂs audio inputs ( Digital 1 , Digital 2 , Analog , iPod or Front Audio In ). 5 LCD touch screen Displays the buttons used to control external components such as a receiver subwoofer, plasma television, DVD player, Blu-ray disc player, and HDD/DVD recorder. The current operating mode is displayed at the top of the remote controlâÂÂs screen. Although the LCD touch screen disappears if you do not perform any operations for a while, it appears when the screen is touched or a button on the remote control is pressed. 6 Other component button Use to operate an HDD/DVD recorder or other connected component. 7 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Use to control receiver functions. 8 SETUP Use to access the menu system for surround sound setup, tuner settings and so on (page 28, 30 , 38 , 40 ). 9 RETURN Use to cancel settings. 10 RCV Use to switch to the receiver subwoofer operating mode when this unit is in the other operating modes. Press again to return to the previous operating mode. 11 VOL /â Use to adjust the volume of the receiver subwoofer. RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 123 CTRL TV LINE FM/AM TV TOP MENU DISC NAVIGATOR HOME MENU MENU PAGE RETURN RECEIVER RCV VOL M UT E SETUP î î î 1 5 8 10 11 7 4 2 3 9 12 6 6 HTP-LX70_En.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 16 En 12 MUTE Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound). LCD touch screen 13 SURR Use to select a Surround mode (page 24). ADV.SURR Use to change the audio setting to PioneerâÂÂs original Advanced Surround mode (page 25). F.S.SURR Use to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode (page 26). 14 GENRE Use to listen to audio in Genre Sync mode (page 26). (This button is displayed only when the RECEIVER screen is shown during HDD/DVD recorder operation.) 15 SOUND RTRV Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed audio sources (page 26). 16 DIRECT Use to switch on/off the Effective Sound mode (page 24). 17 MCACC Starts the Auto MCACC setup (page 23). 18 TEST TONE Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup) (page 32). 19 SOUND Press to access the sound menu, from which you can adjust bass and treble, etc. 20 SLEEP Press to set the sleep timer (page 40). 21 EXIT Cancel settings and exit the RECEIVER screen. Operating the built-in FM/AM tuner 1 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Use to control FM/AM tuner functions. 2 SETUP Use to access the menu system or tuner settings. 3 RETURN Use to cancel settings. LCD touch screen 4 Number buttons Use to directly choose a preset radio station. CLEAR Press to clear an entry and start again. 5 TUNE /â Use to find radio frequencies. 6 ST /â Use to select a station preset. RECEIVER SURR GENRE SLEEP EXIT MC ACC SOUND DIRECT ADV . SURR TEST TONE SOUND RTRV F .S. SURR 16 19 21 18 15 13 14 17 20 TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN 2 3 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP 1 FM/AM - TUNE - ST CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 4 5 6 HTP-LX70_En.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 17 En Operating Pioneer plasma televisions and TVs First, refer to Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 40 for information about setting up your TVâÂÂs presets. Note that certain buttons may not work with some TVs. 1 î TV Switches the TV to On/Standby. TV CTRL Switches the remote control to the TV operating mode (no effect on the current input source of this unit). 2 î SOURCE Switches the power for the TV to On/Standby. 3 PAGE </> Switches pages on the LCD touch screen. 4 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Use to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option. 5 HOME MENU Display the HOME MENU screen. 6 RETURN Restores the previous menu screen. 7 Color (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) buttons Selects a page. LCD touch screen 8 Number buttons Selects a channel. 9 CH RTN Returns to the previously selected channel. 10 CH ENTER Executes a channel number. 11 P /â Selects the channel. 12 INPUT Selects an input source of the TV. 13 MUTE Mutes the sound. 14 TV VOL /â Sets the volume. SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 5 7 2 6 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP CTRL TV î RECEIVER î PAGE 4 1 3 PDP MUTE INPUT 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 P - TV V O L - 12 10 9 14 11 13 TV 12 3 8 Shown when not set to a Pioneer plasma television. CH ENTER CH RTN HTP-LX70_En.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 18 En Operating a Pioneer Blu-ray Disc player 1 î SOURCE Switches the power for a Blu-ray disc player to On/Standby. 2 PAGE </> Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when multiple pages are present. 3 TOP MENU / DISC NAVIGATOR Press to display the top menu of a BD-ROM or DVD-Video disc. When playing a DVD-R/-RW disc, press to display/exit the Disc Navigator. 4 MENU BD-ROM: Press to display/hide the pop-up menu. DVD-Video: Press to display the disc menu (if there is one). 5 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Use to navigate on-screen displays and menus. Press ENTER to select an option or execute a command. 6 HOME MENU Press to display the playerâÂÂs Home Menu, access most of the playerâÂÂs functions. 7 RETURN Press to return to a previous screen. 8 Color (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) buttons Use to navigate BD-ROM menus. LCD touch screen 9 ( AUDIO ) Press to select the audio channel or language. ( SUBTITLE ) Press to select a subtitle display. ( ANGLE ) Press to change the camera angle during BD-ROM or DVD-Video movie multi-angle scene playback. 10 Playback controls î Press to start or resume playback. î Press to stop playback (you can resume playback by pressing î ). î Press to pause playback; press again to restart. î , î Press to start reverse/forward scanning. î , î Press to jump to the start of the previous/next chapter/track. î / î , î / î Use for slow motion and step frame. 11 ZOOM Press to zoom the screen when displaying a still image. 12 DISP Press to display information. 13 Number buttons Use to enter title, chapter or track numbers, etc. ENTER Press to select an option or execute a command. CLEAR Press to clear a numeric entry, etc. 14 PLAY MODE Press to change the Play Mode (repeat play, for example). 15 VIDEO ADJ Press to display the Video Adjust screen. SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 3 6 8 4 1 7 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP RECEIVER CTRL TV î î PAGE 5 2 BD 1/2 BD 2/2 ENTER CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 PLAY MODE VIDEO ADJ DISP DISP ZOOM î î î î îÂÂî îÂÂ/î îÂÂ/î î 9 10 13 11 12 14 15 12 HTP-LX70_En.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 19 En Operating a Pioneer DVD player 1 î SOURCE Switches the power for a DVD player to On/Standby. 2 PAGE </> Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when multiple pages are present. 3 TOP MENU Press to display the top menu of a DVD-Video disc. 4 MENU Displays a DVD disc menu â this varies with the disc and may be the same as the âÂÂtop menuâÂÂ. 5 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Moves the cursor around the screen. Press ENTER to select the current menu option. 6 HOME MENU Display/exit the on-screen display. 7 RETURN Returns to the previously displayed menu screen. LCD touch screen 8 ( AUDIO ) Press to select the audio channel or language. ( SUBTITLE ) Press to select a subtitle display. ( ANGLE ) Press to change the camera angle during DVD-Video movie multi-angle scene playback. 9 Playback controls î Press to start or resume playback. î Press to stop playback (you can resume playback by pressing î ). î Press to pause playback; press again to restart. î / î î , î / î î Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed. While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. î / î Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/ track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu page. 10 ZOOM Press to zoom the screen when displaying a still image. 11 DISP Press to display information. 12 Number buttons Use to enter title, chapter or track numbers, etc. ENTER Press to select an option or execute a command. CLEAR Press to clear a numeric entry, etc. 13 PLAY MODE Press to change the Play Mode (repeat play, for example). SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 3 6 4 1 7 DISC NAV IGATOR SETUP RECEIVER CTRL TV î î PAGE 5 2 DVD 1/2 DVD 2/2 ENTER CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 PLAY MODE DISP DISP ZOOM î î îÂÂî î î / îÂÂî î / îÂÂî 8 10 11 13 11 9 12 HTP-LX70_En.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 20 En Operating a Pioneer HDD/DVD Recorder 1 î SOURCE Switches the power for a HDD/DVD recorder to On/Standby. 2 PAGE </> Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when multiple pages are present. 3 TOP MENU / DISC NAVIGATOR Press to display the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded, or the Disc Navigator screen. 4 MENU Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video, finalized DVD-R/-RW or finalized DVD R/ RW disc is loaded. 5 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Use to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option. 6 HOME MENU Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can navigate all the functions of the recorder. 7 RETURN Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or display. LCD touch screen 8 HDD Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording and playback. DVD Press to select the DVD for recording and playback. 9 Playback controls î Press to start playback. î Press to stop playback. î Press to pause playback or recording. î / î Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed. î / î Press to skip to the previous or next title/ chapter/ track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu page. î / î , î / î While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. 10 CM BACK (commercial back) Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward through the video playing. CM SKIP (commercial skip) Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward through the video playing. SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 3 6 4 1 7 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP RECEIVER CTRL TV î î PAGE 2 5 HDD/DVR 1/2 HDD/DVR 2/2 REC î îÂÂ/î î îÂÂ/î î î î îÂÂî î STOP REC INPUT DISP CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 CH - 13 14 11 16 17 9 10 12 8 HDD DVD CM BACK CM SKIP JUKE BO X 15 HTP-LX70_En.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 21 En 11 JUKEBOX Press to display the Jukebox screen of a HDD/DVD recorder, from which you can copy music to the HDD for playback. 12 ( AUDIO ) Press to change the audio language or channel. (When the recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner audio.) ( SUBTITLE ) Press to display/change the subtitles included in multilingual DVD-Video discs. ( ANGLE ) Press to switch camera angles on discs with multi- angle scenes. 13 Number buttons Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection; channel selection, and so on. CLEAR Press to clear an entry and start again. 14 CH /â Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. 15 INPUT Press to change a HDD/DVD recorder input to use for recording. 16 DISP Displays/changes the on-screen information displays. 17 Recording controls î REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins. STOP REC Press to stop recording. Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the battery compartment cover on the back of the remote control. 2 Insert four AA/LR6 alkaline batteries into the battery compartment following the indications ( î , î ) inside the compartment. 3 Close the cover. Caution Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and old batteries together. ⢠DonâÂÂt use different kinds of battery together â although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. ⢠Remove batteries from equipment that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country /area. WARNING ⢠Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries. HTP-LX70_En.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 22 En Using the remote control Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unitâÂÂs remote sensor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote. ⢠Use within the operating range in front of the remote control sensor on the display unit, as shown. Operating the remote control The supplied remote control can control not only the receiver subwoofer, but also other Pioneer products such as a plasma television, DVD player, Blu-ray disc player, and HDD/DVD recorder. To operate these components, orient the remote control toward the display unit. Operating the receiver subwoofer ⢠Press to display the RECEIVER screen. The RECEIVER screen is shown on the remote controlâÂÂs LCD screen, and the remote is switched to Receiver mode. Choosing and operating a source component 1 Press to cycle through connected components. The selected component changes, and the LCD screen on the remote control changes to that of the appropriate component. ⢠To select input for Digital 1 , Digital 2 , Analog , Front Audio In , or iPod , press the LINE button until the desired input function is shown on the display unit. 2 Choose the input source you are using when you have selected HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 or LINE. The LCD screen changes to that for the selected component, and you can then operate the desired component. ⢠When the desired source cannot be found, or when you have a component not manufactured by Pioneer connected, press RCV to put the remote control into Receiver mode. The input for this unit remains unchanged. Note To temporarily control the receiver while listening to audio from a connected component on this unit, press RCV . The selected input will not change, and the remote changes to Receiver mode. To return to the previous operating mode, press RCV once more. Using the LCD touch screen Depending on the type of connected component you are operating (such as DVD player), there may be multiple pages of information for the LCD touch screen. When the component you would like to control is not displayed, press PAGE to scroll to the page where the component you would like to control is located. ⢠When no operations are carried out for over 10 seconds, the display on the LCD touch screen of the remote control is automatically turned off. To have the display shown once again, either touch the LCD or press a button on the remote control. 7 m 30 30 RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR HDMI 12 3 TV FM /AM LINE EXIT BD DVD HDD/ DVR EXIT BD DVD HDD/ DVR TV HDMI input LINE input HTP-LX70_En.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 23 En Chapter 4 Getting started Important ⢠Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen, as shown below). Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound The Multichannel Acoustic Calibration (MCACC) system measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account ambient noise, and testing for channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided, the system uses the information from a series of test tones to measure standing wave and reverb, optimizing the speaker settings and equalization (MCACC Effect) for your particular room. 1 Important ⢠The test tones used for Auto MCACC setup are loud; however, do not turn the volume down during setup as this may result in a sub-optimal setup. ⢠Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the MCACC setup. 1 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on back of the display unit. 2 Place the microphone at your normal listening position. Place it about ear height, and make sure it is level by using a table or chair. Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone. 3 If the receiver subwoofer is off, press î RECEIVER to turn the power on. 4 Press MCACC. Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing MCACC . The volume increases automatically and the system outputs a series of test tones. ⢠To cancel Auto MCACC setup before it has finished, press MCACC . The unit will continue to use the previous settings. ⢠If the ambient noise level is too high, Noisy! blinks in the display for five seconds. To exit and check the noise levels 2 , press MCACC , or to try again, press ENTER when Retry shows in the display. ⢠If you see an Error MIC! or Error Speaker! message in the display, there may be a problem with your mic or the speaker connections. To try again, press ENTER 3 . When the MCACC setup is complete, the volume level returns to normal, Complete 4 shows in the display, and MCACC Effect is activated. 5 ⢠Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this unit upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup. Note 1 You only need to use the Auto MCACC setup once (unless you change the placement of your speakers or your room layout). RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR 2⢠If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC setup (too much ambient noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speak- ers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. ⢠Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the mic. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV during Auto MCACC setup. 3 If this doesnâÂÂt work, press MCACC , turn off the power, and check the problem indicated by the Error message, then try the Auto MCACC setup again. 4 If Complete doesnâÂÂt appear, it is likely an error occurred during the setup. Please check all connections and try again. 5 See Listening with MCACC Effect on page 27 to switch on/off MCACC Effect. RECEIVER î MCACC HTP-LX70_En.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 05 24 En Chapter 5 Listening to your system Important ⢠Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen, as shown below). Effective Sound (for optimum sound) With the uniquely shaped high-quality speakers supplied with this unit, the Effective Sound mode enables the following Pioneer exclusive audio technologies designed to maximize the real experience of sound originally inherent in movies and music. Turn on the Effective Sound mode under normal circumstances to maximize the capabilities of this unit. ⢠Dialogue Enhancement Clarifies dialogue in movies to make it stand out from other background sounds. ⢠Dynamic Range Compression Resuscitates detailed sound susceptible to ambient noise to create an acoustic environment where you feel as if you are right in the action. ⢠Original Channel Balance & Channel Mix Since the orientation of the supplied speaker units is uniquely designed, channels are mixed down and balanced in a special manner. Also, the optimum balance is automatically achieved according to the contents being played back. ⢠Frequency Characteristic Correction Realizes the playback characteristic optimized for long hours of listening in addition to the added features of the supplied speaker units. ⢠Stereo Playback in Surround Outputs audio from the surround speakers while directing vocal sound to the front channels. You can play back stereo sources like CDs in seamless, comfortable surround sound. This effect is available when you play back stereo sources in the Auto listening mode (see below). The Effective sound mode can be turned off (activating Direct mode) by doing the following: ⢠Press to switch to Direct Sound. Press this button to switch between Effective Sound and Direct Sound. ⢠When Direct Sound is selected, the DIRECT indicator lights. Auto listening mode The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to any source as it was mastered: the output from the speakers mirrors the channels in the source material. If you set up the system for Front surround (page 6), the Front Stage Surround modes will give the best results (see page 26). ⢠Press to select the Auto listening mode. Listening in surround sound You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in surround sound. Surround sound is generated from stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic or DTS Neo:6 decoding modes. 1 If you set up the system for Front surround (page 6), the Front Stage Surround modes will give the best results (see page 26). ⢠Press repeatedly to select a listening mode. The choices that appear in the display will vary according to the type of source thatâÂÂs playing. 2 RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR Note 1 After the surround back signals of the 6.1/7.1-channel audio represented by DTS-ES are properly decoded, the original virtual surround back function outputs the surround back signals in combination with surround signals. 2 You cannot select a mode other than Auto and Stereo while playing back DTS-HD, DTS-Express, or Dolby TrueHD (176.4 kHz/192 kHz). Also, you cannot select DTS Neo:6 for Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD (below 96 kHz). DIRECT SURR SURR HTP-LX70_En.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 05 25 En With two channel sources , you can select from: ⢠Auto â Auto listening mode (see page 24) ⢠2 PL II Movie (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) â 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to movie sources ⢠2 PL II Music (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) â 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to music sources; see Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings below ⢠2 PL II Game (Dolby Pro Logic II Game) â 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to video games ⢠2 Pro Logic (Dolby Pro Logic) â 4.1 channel surround sound for use with any two-channel source ⢠Neo:6 Cinema â 6.1 channel sound, especially suited to movie sources ⢠Neo:6 Music â 6.1 channel sound, especially suited to music sources; see Center image setting below ⢠Stereo â See Listening in stereo on page 26 With multichannel sources , you can select (according to format): ⢠Auto â Auto listening mode (see page 24) ⢠StandardDecode â Listening in Dolby Digital or DTS surround decoding. Plays back multichannel sources like Dolby Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM with the most standard decoder ⢠Stereo â See Listening in stereo on page 26 Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode (see above), there are three settings you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension, and Panorama. 1 Press when Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode is active. 2 Select âÂÂCenter WidthâÂÂ, âÂÂDimension â or âÂÂPanoramaâ then press ENTER. ⢠Center Width 1 â Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings). ⢠Dimension â Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings). ⢠Panorama â Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a âÂÂwraparoundâ effect. 3 Adjust the setting, then press ENTER to confirm. Center image setting When listening to two channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode (see page 24), you can also adjust the center image effect. Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect with vocals. 2 1 Press when Neo:6 Music mode is active. 2 Select âÂÂCenter Imageâ then press ENTER. 3 Adjust the setting, then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front right and left speakers) to 10 (center channel sent to the center speaker only). Using Advanced Surround The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional surround sound effects. These modes are designed to provide optimum listening effect when using the Standard surround setup described on page 6. ⢠Press to select an Advanced Surround mode. The ADV.SURR. indicator lights when one of these modes is chosen. You cannot switch between modes for some audio streams. 3 Press repeatedly to select: ⢠Action â Designed for action movies with dynamic soundtracks ⢠Drama â Designed for movies with lots of dialog ⢠Sci-Fi â Designed for science fiction with lots of special effects ⢠Mono Film â Creates surround sound from mono soundtracks Note 1 As this product uses a dual center speaker system, you should normally use the C.Width 3 setting. SOUND ENTER 2 As this product uses a dual center speaker system, you should normally use the C.Image 3 setting. 3 You cannot use this function for the following audio streams: ⢠Dolby TrueHD: over 88.2 kHz ⢠DTS-HD: over 88.2 kHz or with the channel format of 2/0 ⢠DTS-Express: with the channel format of 2/0 ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER ADV SURR HTP-LX70_En.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 05 26 En ⢠Ent.Show â Suitable for musical sources ⢠Expanded â Creates an extra wide stereo field ⢠TV Surround â Provides surround sound for both mono and stereo TV sources ⢠Advanced Game â Suitable for video games ⢠Sports â Suitable for sports programs ⢠Classical â Gives a large concert hall-type sound ⢠Rock/Pop â Creates a live concert sound for rock and/or pop music ⢠Unplugged â Suitable for acoustic music sources ⢠Ext.Stereo â Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source, using all of your speakers Using Front Stage Surround Advance The Front Stage Surround Advance modes are effective when you are using the Front surround speaker setup as described on page 6. ⢠Press to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode. The F.S.SURR indicator lights. Press repeatedly to select Focus 5.1ch , Wide 5.1ch or Extra Power . You cannot select a mode other than Extra Power for some audio streams. 1 ⢠Focus 5.1ch â Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center area where the left and right speakers sound projection converges. ⢠Wide 5.1ch â Use to provide a surround sound effect to a wider area than Focus 5.1ch mode. ⢠Extra Power â Outputs stereo sound (in the case of multi-channel sources, down-mixed stereo sound) from the surround speakers for powerful stereo effect. Listening in stereo You can listen to any source â stereo or multichannel â in stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers and the subwoofer. ⢠Press repeatedly until STEREO shows in the display. Genre Sync Mode Only when you have this unit connected to an HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder and are using the HDMI Control function, you can make use of the Genre Sync Mode to have the listening mode automatically change to that which best matches the genre of the contents playing from the recorder. ⢠Set the HDMI Mode to AMP Mode (page 36). ⢠Press when listening to media contents from a recorder. The most appropriate listening mode is selected and shown in the display. When the related genre could not be determined, No Genre or CanâÂÂt use may be displayed and the listening mode remains unchanged. Tip ⢠Mainly used with Jukebox and MP3 sources. ⢠To use this function, you must have an HDMI Control- compatible Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder connected via HDMI, and have the HDMI Control function set to On. Using the Sound Retriever When audio data is removed during the MP3 or WMA compression process, sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound image. The Sound Retriever feature employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to compressed two channel audio by restoring sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression. ⢠Press while listening to a stereo source 2 . Press repeatedly to switch between: ⢠Retriever On â Switches the Sound Retriever on. ⢠Retriever Off â Switches the Sound Retriever off. Note 1 You cannot use this function for the following audio streams: ⢠Dolby TrueHD: over 88.2 kHz ⢠DTS-HD: over 88.2 kHz or with the channel format of 2/0 ⢠DTS-Express: with the channel format of 2/0 F.S. SURR SURR 2 This setting cannot be used with multichannel sources. Also, in case of SACD, DTS-HD, DTS-Express, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, and PCM (192 kHz/176.4 kHz), even stereo sources cannot be used. GENRE SOUND RTRV HTP-LX70_En.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 05 27 En Listening with MCACC Effect Listen to sound using the corrected acoustic field settings obtained by MCACC. 1 Press to open the sound menu. 2 Select âÂÂMCACC Effectâ then press ENTER. 3 Switch âÂÂMCACC Onâ or âÂÂMCACC Off â then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠When MCACC Effect is off, equalization, channel delay, channel level and standing wave are set to off. ⢠When MCACC Effect is off, the channel delay and channel level can be adjusted manually and the settings stored separately from when MCACC Effect is on. ⢠MCACC Effect is set to on automatically after Auto MCACC setup is used. Using Midnight, Loudness and Quiet listening modes The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels. The Loudness listening feature can be used to get good bass and treble from music sources at low volume levels. The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or treble in a sound source. 1 Press to open the sound menu. 2 Select âÂÂToneâ then press ENTER. 1 3 S elect â Midnight âÂÂ, â Loudness â or â Quiet â then press ENTER to confirm. 2 ⢠To cancel the Midnight, Loudness or Quiet listening modes, select Bass/Treble . Adjusting the bass and treble Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone. 1 Press to open the sound menu. 2 Select âÂÂToneâ then press ENTER. 1 3 S elect âÂÂBass/Trebleâ then press ENTER . ⢠Selecting Bass/Treble cancels the Midnight, Loudness and Quiet listening modes. These modes cannot be used at the same time. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to select âÂÂBassâ or âÂÂTrebleâÂÂ; use the îÂÂ/î buttons to adjust the sound then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠Bass and Treble can be adjusted from -6dB to 6dB . ⢠When the Bass or Treble is set to something other than 0dB , the TONE indicator lights. Adjusting sound delay Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of the video. There are a total of 60 steps (levels) that you can adjust, with a total range of 200 msec. 1 Press to open the sound menu. 2 Select âÂÂSound Delayâ then press ENTER. 3 Select the length of the delay in sound, then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠This option is deactivated and not displayed if you have AutoDelay set to On in HDMI Setup (see Setting the Auto Delay on page 39). Note 1 While playing back DTS-HD (over 88.2 kHz) or Dolby TrueHD (over 88.2 kHz) audio streams, you cannot select Tone if a mode other than Bass/ Treble is selected. 2 While playing back DTS-HD (over 88.2 kHz) or Dolby TrueHD (over 88.2 kHz) audio streams, you cannot select a mode other than Bass/Treble . SOUND ENTER ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to the radio 06 28 En Chapter 6 Listening to the radio Important ⢠To listen to the radio, press the FM/AM button to set the remote control to FM/AM control mode. The LCD screen on the remote control changes to the FM/AM screen. Listening to the radio The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and lets you memorize your favorite stations so you donâÂÂt have to manually tune in every time you want to listen. 1 Switch to the tuner, then press repeatedly to select the FM or AM band. The display shows the band and frequency. 2 Tune to a frequency. There are three tuning modes â manual, auto, and high- speed: ⢠Manual tuning â Press TUNE /â repeatedly to change the displayed frequency. ⢠Auto tuning â Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move, then release. The tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to keep searching. ⢠High-speed tuning â Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the button held down until you reach the frequency you want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the manual tuning method. Improving poor FM reception If youâÂÂre listening to an FM station in stereo but the reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by switching to mono. 1 Press after tuning to an FM radio station. 2 Select âÂÂTuner Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Choose âÂÂFM Auto/Monoâ then press ENTER. 4 Select âÂÂFM Monoâ then press ENTER. The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono reception mode. Select FM Auto above to switch back to auto-stereo mode (the stereo indicator ( ) lights when receiving a stereo broadcast). Improving poor AM sound The simplest way to improve the sound quality of AM radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched off. Also try changing the position and direction of the AM loop antenna. Changing the noise cut mode If you find that the AM sound quality is bad even after trying the above, you may be able to improve it using a different noise cut mode. Just choose the one that sounds best. 1 Press after tuning to an AM radio station. 2 Select âÂÂTuner Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 C hoose âÂÂNoise Cutâ then press ENTER . 4 S elect a Noise cut mode (1, 2 or 3) then press ENTER. FM /AM FM/AM 12 3 FM /AM - TUNE SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to the radio 06 29 En Memorizing stations You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always have easy access to your favorite stations without having to tune in manually each time. 1 Tune to an FM or AM radio station. Select mono or auto-stereo reception (FM) or the Noise Cut mode (AM) as necessary. These settings are saved along with the preset. 2 Press SETUP . 3 Select âÂÂTuner Setupâ then press ENTER. 4 Choose â ST.Memory â then press ENTER . 5 Select the station preset you want then press ENTER . Listening to station presets 1M ake sure the tuner function is selected. 2 Select a station preset. ⢠Alternatively, use the number buttons to select a preset directly. Changing the frequency step If you find that you canâÂÂt tune into stations successfully, the frequency step may not be suitable for your country/ region. 1 Press SETUP. 2 Select âÂÂSystem Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂAM9K/10KâÂÂ, then press ENTER . 4 Select a setting then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠AM 9K â 9 kHz step for AM; 50 kHz step for FM ⢠AM 10K â 10 kHz step for AM; 100 kHz step for FM SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER - ST SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound settings 07 30 En Chapter 7 Surround sound settings Important ⢠Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen, as shown below). Using the Sound Setup menu From the Sound Setup menu you can access all the surround sound settings of the system. During setup, the speakers are represented by the following letters: ⢠L â Front left speaker ⢠C â Center speaker ⢠R â Front right speaker ⢠SR â Surround right speaker ⢠SL â Surround left speaker ⢠SW â Subwoofer Channel level setting 1 The Auto MCACC feature (see page 23) should give you the best surround sound setup. However you may find that by further adjustment of the channel levels you can improve the surround sound in your listening room. This method of setting the channel levels allows you to listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback channel. A further method of setting the channel levels is to use the test tone method. See Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone on page 32 for more on this. 1 Press SETUP. 2 Select âÂÂSound Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂChannelLevelâÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to select a channel or the îÂÂ/î buttons to adjust the level of that channel. ⢠You can adjust the level of each channel by ñ10 dB. 2 5 Press once when youâÂÂre finished. ⢠If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. Speaker distance setting 1 The Auto MCACC feature (see page 23) should give you the best surround sound setup. However you may find that by further adjustment of the speaker distance settings you can improve the surround sound in your listening room. Set the distance of each speaker from your normal listening position. 1 Open the âÂÂSound Setupâ menu. 2 Select âÂÂDistanceâ then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to select a speaker or the îÂÂ/î buttons to adjust the distance. Each speaker can be adjusted from 0.1m to 9.0m . 4 Press ENTER when youâÂÂre finished. ⢠If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. Note 1 When this function is set while MCACC Effect is on, the value for the same function adjusted with the Auto MCACC feature is overwritten. When MCACC Effect is off, the value set here is applied, regardless of the value adjusted with the Auto MCACC feature. (The Auto MCACC setting is not overwritten.) RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR 2 The range of adjustment is limited when the volume level is set over 51. SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound settings 07 31 En Dynamic Range Control When watching Dolby Digital or DTS material at low volume, low level sounds â including some of the dialog â can be difficult to hear properly. Using one of the Dynamic Range Control (DRC) settings can help by bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high level peaks. Dynamic Range Control works only with Dolby Digital soundtracks and some DTS soundtracks. 1 Open the âÂÂSound Setupâ menu. 2 Select âÂÂD.R.C.âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 3 Select a setting. Select one of the following: ⢠D.R.C. Auto â Only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select D.R.C. High or D.R.C. Mid for signals other than Dolby TrueHD. ⢠D.R.C. High â Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are increased) ⢠D.R.C. Mid â Mid setting ⢠D.R.C. Off â No dynamic range adjustment (use when listening at higher volume) 4 Press to exit. Dual mono setting Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should be played. You can also use this setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs recorded with bilingual audio. 1 Open the âÂÂSound Setupâ menu. 2 Select âÂÂDual MonoâÂÂ, then press ENTER. 3 Select a setting. Select one of the following: ⢠CH1 Mono â Only channel 1 is played ⢠CH2 Mono â Only channel 2 is played ⢠CH1/CH2 â Both channels are played through the front speakers 4 Press to exit. SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound settings 07 32 En Using the Virtual Surround Back mode This mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information, or if the material sounds better in the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES. 1 1 Open the âÂÂSound Setupâ menu. 2 Select âÂÂVirtual SBâÂÂ, then press ENTER. 3 Select a setting. Select one of the following: ⢠Vir.SB On â Virtual Surround Back is always used (for example, on 5.1 encoded material) ⢠Vir.SB Auto â Virtual Surround Back is automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES), DTS Neo:6 or Advanced Surround mode ⢠Vir.SB Off â Virtual Surround Back mode is switched off 4 Press to exit. LFE Attenuate Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra- low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra- low bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers. The LFE is not limited when set to 0dB , which is the recommended value. When set to -5dB , -10dB , -15dB or -20dB , the LFE is limited by the respective degree. When Off is selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel. 1 Open the âÂÂSound Setupâ menu. 2 Select âÂÂLFE ATTâÂÂ, then press ENTER . 3 Adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm. Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone If you prefer, you can set the channel levels using a test tone as a reference, rather than playing a source (see Channel level setting on page 30). A test tone is played through each speaker in turn, allowing you to adjust the level as it plays. You can also adjust the channel levels for surround sound using test tone. 1 Carry out tone testing. The test tone is output from each speaker in turn. Adjust the volume level below 50. 2 Adjust the channel level of a tune while it is playing. The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test tone at the same volume from each speaker. You can adjust the level of each channel by ñ10 dB. ⢠You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output using the VOL /â buttons (this does not affect the channel level settings). ⢠Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer produces, it may sound quieter than it really is. We suggest adjusting the subwoofer level while listening to a source. See the method described in Channel level setting on page 30. 3 Press to exit test tone setup once you have finished. ⢠If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. Note 1 Depending on the input signal and the listening mode, the Virtual Surround Back mode may not be effective. SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER TEST TONE ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 08 33 En Chapter 8 Other connections Important ⢠When making or changing connections on the side panel of this unit, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cord to the wall socket. Connecting auxiliary components You can connect both analog and digital external audio sources to this system. Digital audio sources include digital satellite receivers, CD recorders, etc. We recommend using an HDMI cable to connect sources that have HDMI terminals. For more information see Connecting using HDMI on page 35. To listen to audio from a TV, connect the TVâÂÂs audio cable to one of the inputs on this unit. Connecting for digital audio This system has optical-type digital inputs. Use these to connect external components, such as your MD or CD recorder. ⢠Connect the OPTICAL IN 2 jack on the side panel to the optical output of an external playback component. These include digital components such as an MD player, digital satellite, or a game system. You can also use the OPTICAL IN 1 jack to connect external components when not using it for sound input from a TV. Connecting an analog audio component You can use the ANALOG AUDIO IN jacks to connect an analog audio component, such as a tape player. You can use the F.AUDIO input jack on the display unit to easily playback audio from a digital audio player or PC. Use a stereo mini-plug cable to connect a source to the display unit. ⢠When you connect a cable to the F.AUDIO jack, this unitâÂÂs input automatically switches to Front Audio In . MD , CD Recorder , et c. From digital audio output (optical) OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 DIGIT AL Side panel Receiver subwoofer From Audio output R L ANALOG AUDIO IN Side panel Receiver subwoofer T ape play er , MD , DA T , et c. F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM F.AUDIO Digital audio player , etc. Display unit From analog audio output St ereo mini-plug cable HTP-LX70_En.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 08 34 En Connecting an iPod You can use the iPod jack on the display unit to playback music from an iPod. All operations can be carried out via the iPod. Use the supplied iPod cable to connect an iPod to this unit. ⢠When you connect an iPod, this unitâÂÂs input automatically switches to iPod . ⢠Certain iPod models have connectors that are not compatible with this unit. iPod î is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Listening to an external audio source To listen to audio from a connected external component on this unit, choose its input function on the remote control. Some Pioneer products can be controlled via this remote. 1 If the system isnâÂÂt already on, press î RECEIVER to switch on. Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite receiver, etc.) is switched on. 2 Select an audio input source. Input sources are cycled through as shown below: The LCD screen changes to that of the selected input source. 3 Press the button for the appropriate connected component. When a connected component is not displayed on the screen, or when you have connected a component not manufactured by Pioneer, press RCV button to put the remote control on the receiver subwoofer operation screen. 4 If necessary, start playback of the external source. MENU F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM iPod iPod Music > Extras > Settings > Shuffle Songs Backlight iPod iPod cable Display unit R LINE Digital 2 Front Audio In iPod Analog Digital 1 HTP-LX70_En.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 08 35 En Connecting external antennas For an external AM antenna, use 5 to 6 meters of vinyl- insulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors. Leave the loop antenna connected. For an external FM antenna, use a PAL connector to hook up an external FM antenna. About control out connections Many Pioneer components support CONTROL connections, by which you can use the remote controls of any connected components by aiming them at the sensor of just one component. When you use a remote control, the control signal is passed along the chain to the appropriate component. If you choose to use this feature, you must make sure that you also have at least one set of HDMI or analog audio jacks connected to another component for grounding purposes. ⢠Using the supplied control cable on either side, connect the CONTROL IN jack on another Pioneer component to the CONTROL OUT jack on the receiver subwoofer. This will allow you to control the other component by pointing its remote at the display unit supplied with this receiver subwoofer. Connecting using HDMI If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component, you can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable. 1 The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the connected component is compatible with, including DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Blu-ray Disc, Video CD/ Super VCD, CD and MP3, etc. AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 ⦠ANTENNA Side panel Receiver subwoofer ex te rnal FM antenna Outdoor antenna ext ernal AM antenna AM Loop antenna PA L connector 5 m to 6 m Indoor antenna (vinyl-coated Wire) Note 1⢠An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVI î HDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information. ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) Version 1.3a. Depending on the c omponent you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. Also, when using a component with HDMI version 1.0, it is not possible to output copy-controlled DVD-Audio CPPM sources from the HDMI connection. ⢠This unit supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this unit also supports the corresponding format. From HDMI output HDMI T IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 Receiver subwoofer HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 Rear panel HDMI/DVI-equipped component HTP-LX70_En.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 08 36 En 1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI IN 1 to 3 interconnect on this receiver subwoofer to an HDMI output on your HDMI component. Once this receiver subwoofer is properly connected to your HDMI component, the HDMI indicator (red) lights up on the display unit when you watch HDMI contents. 2 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT interconnect on this receiver subwoofer to an HDMI interconnect on a HDMI-compatible display. ⢠The arrow on the cable connector body should be facing right for correct alignment with the connector on the player. 3 Use the HDMI 1 to 3 button to select the HDMI input youâÂÂve connected to (for example, HDMI 2). You can also use the display unit INPUT SELECTOR to carry out this operation. ⢠Set the HDMI Mode in HDMI mode setting below to Through Mode if you want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV or plasma television (no sound will be heard from this receiver subwoofer). ⢠If the video signal does not appear on your TV or plasma television, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. HDMI mode setting Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver subwoofer (amp) or through to a TV or plasma television. You cannot use a number of sound functions of this unit when HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode . Important ⢠Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen). 1 Press SETUP. 2 Select âÂÂHDMI Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂHDMI ModeâÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠AMP Mode â Output an HDMI audio signal from this unit. ⢠Through Mode â Output an HDMI audio signal from a TV or plasma television. The HDMI THROUGH indicator lights. About HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays. HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncom- pressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 2.2 gigabytes per second (with HDTV signals), one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. RCV SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
HDMI Control 09 37 En Chapter 9 HDMI Control By connecting this unit to an HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma television or the HDD/DVD recorder with an HDMI cable, you can control this unit from the remote control of a connected plasma television, as well as have the connected plasma television automatically change inputs in response to operations carried out on this unit. Refer to the operating instructions for your plasma television for more information about which operations can be carried out by connecting via HDMI cable. ⢠You cannot use this function with components that do not support HDMI Control. ⢠We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI Control-compatible components other than those made by Pioneer. Important ⢠Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen, as shown below). Making the HDMI Control connections You can use synchronized operation for a connected plasma television and up to three other components (including a maximum of two recorders or players). Be sure to connect the plasma televisionâÂÂs audio cable to the audio input of this unit. ⢠If you use a commercially available HDMI cable, check whether the cable supports the HDMI 1.3 standard. Otherwise, the HDMI Control function may not operate properly. RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 R L AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 ⦠OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 ANALOG AUDIO IN ANTENNA DIGIT AL From Audio output or From digital audio output (optical) To HDMI input From HDMI outut Receiver subw oofer Rear panel Si de panel HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder , Blu-ray disc pla yer or DVD play er HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma television HTP-LX70_En.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
HDMI Control 09 38 En ⢠Connect the plasma television directly to this unit. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors. ⢠Only connect components you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this unit. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors. Important ⢠When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket. ⢠After connecting this unit to an AC outlet, a 15-second initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during initialization. The HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during initialization, and you can turn this unit on once it has stopped blinking. ⢠To get the most out of this function, we recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a plasma television but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this unit. Setting the HDMI options You must adjust the settings of this unit as well as HDMI Control-compatible connected components in order to make use of the HDMI Control function. For more information see the operating instructions for each component. Setting the HDMI Control mode Choose whether to set this unitâÂÂs HDMI Control function On or Off . You will need to set it to Control On to use the HDMI Control function. ⢠When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer, put this setting to Control Off . 1 Press SETUP. 2 Select âÂÂHDMI Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂHDMI CtrlâÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠Control On â Enables the HDMI Control function. When this unitâÂÂs power is turned off and you have a supported source begin playback while using the HDMI Control function, the audio and video output from the HDMI connection are output from the plasma television. ⢠Control Off â The HDMI Control is disabled. Synchronized operations cannot be used. When this unitâÂÂs power is turned off, audio and video of sources connected via HDMI are not output. HDMI cable HDMI cable HDMI input HDMI output HDMI input HDMI OUT Other amps or AV conv erter Receiver subwoof er HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma television HDMI cable HDMI cable HDMI input HDMI output HDMI IN HDMI OUT Other amps or AV converter Receiver subwoof er HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma television SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
HDMI Control 09 39 En Setting the Auto Delay This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay between components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is automatically adjusted according to the video delay time. 1 Press SETUP. 2 Select âÂÂHDMI Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂAuto DelayâÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Select âÂÂA.Delay Onâ or âÂÂA.Delay Off â then press ENTER to confirm. Tip ⢠This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (âÂÂlip-syncâÂÂ) for HDMI or HDMI Control. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.Delay to Off and adjust the sound delay settings manually (page 27). Audio input settings from plasma televisions (TV Input) To listen to audio from a plasma television on this device, you will need to connect an audio cable other than an HDMI cable. From this menu, set the audio input to that which you would like to connect. Press TV on the remote control to switch this unit to the input source selected here. This setting is changed to the selected input and the audio from the plasma television is output from this device. Select from inputs Digital 1 , Digital 2 and Analog . 1 Press SETUP. 2 Select âÂÂSystem Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂTV InputâÂÂ, then press ENTER . 4 Adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm. Important ⢠You must set this setting to activate the HDMI Control function. Before using synchronization Once you have finished all connections and settings, you must: 1 Put all components into standby mode. 2 Turn the power ON for all components, with the power for the plasma television being turned on last. 3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this unit, and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen on not. Synchronized amp mode Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an operation for the plasma television. For more information, see the operating instructions of your plasma television. Synchronized amp mode operations By connecting a component to this unit with an HDMI cable you can use synchronized amp mode, which allows you to synchronize the following operations: ⢠Displays on the plasma television when you mute or adjust the volume of this unit. ⢠The input of this unit is automatically changed when playback occurs on a connected component. ⢠Even if you change this unitâÂÂs input to a device that is not connected by HDMI, the synchronized amp mode remains in effect. ⢠By pressing GENRE when listening to a source from an HDD/DVD recorder, the most appropriate listening mode is automatically selected (page 26). Canceling synchronized amp mode If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected via HDMI to a plasma television or while you are watching a TV programme, the power for this unit is turned off. SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 40 En Chapter 10 Additional information Important ⢠Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen, as shown below). Dimming the display You can choose to dim the display of the display unit if you find it too bright. 1 1 Press SETUP. 2 Select âÂÂSystem Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂDimmerâ then press ENTER . 4 Select âÂÂDimmer Lightâ or âÂÂDimmer Dark â then press ENTER to confirm. Setting the sleep timer The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying about it. ⢠Press to select an option. Choose between the following options: ⢠Sleep On â Switches off after about an hour ⢠Sleep Off â Cancels the sleep timer After selecting Sleep On , you can press SLEEP again to check how much time is left. Each line indicates approximately 12 minutes (remaining): Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table on the following page. 1 Set the input to TV. 2 Press and hold the TV button and press SETUP. The TV preset screen is shown on the remote control, and the current maker code is displayed on the LCD screen. 3 Use the number buttons to input the maker code for your TV, and press ENTER. See the table on the next page for the list of maker codes. If there is more than one code given for your make, input the first one in the list. ⢠If the makerâÂÂs name of your TV doesnâÂÂt appear in the table, you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV. 4 Point the remote towards your TV and press î SOURCE to check that the remote works with your TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch off. If it doesnâÂÂt and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 1 with a new code. Note 1 The display of the display unit dims when the sleep timer is set, regardless of this setting. RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SLEEP S l e e p --- -- TV TV PRESET 3 5 1 EXIT ENTER CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 Number buttons ENTER Maker code HTP-LX70_En.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 41 En TV Preset code list Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. Manufacturer Code(s) Manufacturer Code(s) Admiral 003, 004, 005 Aiwa 006, 007, 008 Akai 009, 010 Alba 011 AOC 012 Bell&Howell 013, 014 Bestar 015 Blaupunkt 016, 017 Blue sky 018 Brandt 019 Brocsonic 020, 021 Bush 022 Clatronic 023 Craig 024, 025, 026, 027 Croslex 028 Curtis Mathis 029, 030, 031 Daewoo 032, 033, 034, 035, 036, 037 Daytron 038 Dual 039, 040 Emerson 041, 042, 043, 044, 045, 046, 047 Ferguson 048, 049, 050 First line 051 Fisher 052, 053 Fraba 054 Fujitsu General 055 Funai 056, 057, 058, 059, 060 GE 061, 062, 063, 064, 065 Goldstar 066, 067, 068, 069, 070 Goodmans 071, 072, 073 Grundig 074, 075, 076 Hitachi 077, 078, 079, 080, 081, 082 HYUNDAI 083 ICE 084 Irradio 085 Itt 086, 087 JC Penny 088, 089, 090, 091 JVC 092, 093, 094, 095, 096, 097 Kendo 098 KTV 099, 100, 101 LG 102 Loewe 103, 104, 105 LXI 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111 Magnavox 112, 113, 114, 115 Mark 116 Matsui 117, 118 Medion 119 Mitsubishi 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126 Mivar 127 NEC 128, 129, 130, 131 Nokia 086, 087, 132, 133, 134 Nokia Oceanic 135, 136 Nordmende 137, 138, 139 Okano 140 Onwa 141 Orion 142 Panasonic 143, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150 Philco 151, 152, 153 Philips 154, 155, 156 Phonola 157 Portland 158, 159 Proscan 160 Quasar 161, 162 Radio 163 Radio Shack 164, 165, 166, 167 Radiola 168 RCA 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175 SABA 176, 177, 178, 179, 180 Samsung 181, 182, 183, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188 Sanyo 189, 190, 191, 192, 193, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198 Schneider 199, 200, 201, 202 Scott 203, 204 Sharp 205, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211 Siemens 212 Signature 213, 214 Sony 215, 216 Sylvania 217, 218, 219 Symphonic 220 Tatung 221 Telefunken 222, 223, 224, 225 Thomson 226, 227 Thorn 228 Toshiba 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234 Universum 235 Videch 236, 237, 238 W.Whouse 239 Wards 240, 241, 242, 243 Watson 244 Yamaha 245, 246, 247, 248, 249 Zenith 250, 251 PIONEER 001, 002 HTP-LX70_En.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 42 En Resetting the system Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the factory default. 1S witch the system on. 2 Press and hold INPUT SELECTOR then press the î STANDBY/ON button on the display unit. The next time you switch on, all the system settings should be reset. Installation and maintenance Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a location: Do... î Use in a well-ventilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack . DonâÂÂt... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the system will be exposed to direct sunlight. î Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment. î Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference â especially if the television uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be exposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth â this may prevent proper cooling of the system unit. î Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the system unitâÂÂs feet. Surround sound formats Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats youâÂÂll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes. Dolby The Dolby technologies are explained below. See www.dolby.com for more detailed information. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full range channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects) channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects; hence the term âÂÂ5.1-channelâ Dolby Digital. In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono, stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit rates and channels. Another feature, called Dialog Normalization, attenuates programs based on the average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve uniform playback level. Dolby Pro Logic II and Dolby Surround Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using the innovative âÂÂsteering logicâ circuit, this system extracts surround sound from sources as follows: ⢠Dolby Pro Logic â 4.1 channel sound (mono surround) from any stereo source ⢠Dolby Pro Logic II â 5.1 channel sound (stereo surround) from any stereo source With two channel sources, the âÂÂ.1â subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver. Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack, which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio technology for all high-definition programming and media. It combines the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming high-definition era. Built on Dolby Digital, the multi-channel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the next-generation A/V receivers but remains fully compatible with all current A/V receivers. HTP-LX70_En.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 43 En Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs of up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs in a single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps on Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby Digital Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended by directors and producers. It also features multi-channel sound with discrete channel output, interactive mixing and streaming capability in advanced systems. Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and video. Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, unlocking the true high-definition entertainment experience on high-definition optical discs in the next generation. When coupled with high-definition video, Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater experience with stunning sound and high-definition picture. It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8 full- range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz audio. It also features extensive metadata including dialogue normalization and dynamic range control. Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and video. * HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than eight audio channels. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâÂÂ, âÂÂPro Logicâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS The DTS technologies are explained below. See www.dtstech.com for more detailed information. DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full range channels, including an LFE channel. Higher sound quality is achieved through the use of a low compression rate, and high rates of transmittance during playback. DTS-ES DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives âÂÂtrueâ 6.1 channel sound, with a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel. DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed into the surround left/right channels. Both sources are also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder. DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel information already encoded into the source, as well as its own processing to determine channel localization (with two channel sources, the âÂÂ.1â subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver). Two modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS Neo:6 with two channel sources. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully backward compatible with all existing decoders. This means that DVD players can play this software using a conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder. DTS-EXPRESS DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and memory audio contents. DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio quality. DTS-HD Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates, facilitating data transfer to the maximum rate of 24.5 Mbps in the Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in the HD-DVD format, which by far exceeds that of a standard DVD. These high data transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96 kHz/24-bit 7.1-channel audio sources without deteriorating the quality of the original sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is an irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound faithfully as intended by the creator of music or movies. âÂÂDTSâ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and âÂÂDTS-HD Master Audioâ is a trademark of DTS, Inc. HTP-LX70_En.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 44 En Troubleshooting Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. ⢠If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. ⢠For audio-related problems, please also check the settings of the audio playback device. See the operating instructions for the device for detailed information. General Problem Remedy The power does not turn on, or switches off suddenly (an error message may be displayed at startup). Or, the display disappears suddenly and no sound is output (with the POWER ON indicator (Blue) and the HDMI indicator (Red) lit up). ⢠Leave the unit plugged in, wait for one minute, then switch back on. ⢠Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit. This could cause the system to shut off automatically. ⢠Check that the speakers are connected correctly. ⢠Make sure there is enough space for ventilation around the receiver subwoofer. ⢠Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model. ⢠Try reducing the volume level. ⢠If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. ⢠Do not block the air intake opening on the bottom as well as the air exhaust opening on the back of this unit. No sound is output when an input function is selected. ⢠If youâÂÂre using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly and the volume level of your external component (i.e. a portable player, etc.) is adjusted (see Connecting auxiliary components on page 33). ⢠Turn up the volume. ⢠No audio is output from the speakers connected to this unit if HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode (page 36). ⢠No audio is output if a DVI component is connected via HDMI. ⢠Press MUTE on the remote control to turn muting off. No sound from surround speaker. ⢠Refer to Channel level setting on page 30 to check the speaker levels. ⢠Check that you havenâÂÂt selected the Stereo mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 24). ⢠Connect the speakers properly (refer to Connecting up on page 8). ⢠Verify the audio output and HDMI settings of your external component when connecting an external component via an optical digital cable or HDMI cable. CanâÂÂt operate using the remote control. ⢠Replace the batteries ( Putting the batteries in the remote control on page 21). ⢠Operate within 7 m, 30ð of the remote sensor ( Using the remote control on page 22). ⢠Remove any obstacles or operate from another position. ⢠Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light. ⢠For operating the other Pioneer component connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of this receiver subwoofer , make sure that the control cable and either an HDMI or analog audio cable are connected (page 35). HTP-LX70_En.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 45 En Tuner HDMI Problem Remedy Considerable noise in radio broadcasts. ⢠Connect the AM antenna (refer to Connecting up on page 8) and adjust the direction and position for best reception. You may also connect an additional internal or external AM antenna (refer to Connecting external antennas on page 35). ⢠Fully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. You may also connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 35). ⢠Turn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away. ⢠The tuning inter val is incorrect for your country or region. See Changing the frequency step on page 29 to switch the tuning inter val. Auto tuning does not pick up some stations. ⢠The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal. For more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna. Symptom Remedy No picture or sound. ⢠This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-compatible. ⢠Depending on the connected source component, itâÂÂs possible that it will not work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). ⢠If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support. No sound, or sound suddenly ceases. ⢠Check that the HDMI Mode setting is set to AMP Mode / Through Mode . ⢠If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio. ⢠Check the audio output settings of the source component. HTP-LX70_En.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 46 En Displayed Messages Message Description 192kHz PCM SACD DTS-HD DTS Express Dolby T rueHD Dolby D These messages are displayed when you operate a function incompatible with the audio source being played back. No MIC Displays when you press MCACC when the MCACC setup mic is not connected. Muting Displays when you press TEST TONE or MCACC while this unit is muted. 2ch Only An operation is prohibited because it is only applicable to 2 channel sources, while the current source is a multichannel source. Exit Appears when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity. HDMI Through Displays when you change the Listening Mode, the volume level, or some sound settings when the HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode. Unknown The genre information for contents being played back on the HDD/DVD recorder cannot be obtained. No Genre There is no genre set for contents being played back on the HDD/DVD recorder. HDMI C.ERR 2C* The connected component is not compatible with synchronized genre mode. CanâÂÂt use ⢠You tried to use Genre Sync Mode for a source component that does not support this function. ⢠The source component is in a situation where Genre Sync Mode cannot be used. ⢠You tried to use Genre Sync Mode when the input source of this unit is a source other than HDMI. ⢠The operation is forbidden due to the surround settings. ⢠When the volume level is over 51, some functions are restricted. HDMI C.ERR 1** Check if the HDMI cable is properly connected. If the cable is properly connected, this unit may be damaged. In such an event, please contact a Pioneer-authorized service center or your nearest dealer. Noisy! Background noise is too high to complete MCACC setup successfully. Error MIC! An error occurred during MCACC setup because the microphone is not connected or is not connected properly. Error Speaker! An error occurred during MCACC setup because the speakers are not connected or are not connected properly. Over T emp Try lowering the volume. If this problem is not fixed by removing and inserting the power cable, this unit may be damaged. In such an event, please contact a Pioneer-authorized service center or your nearest dealer. OC Error1 OC Error2 Check whether the speaker cables are short-circuited. If the error message continues to be displayed, contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. *** BackUpERR Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. HTP-LX70_En.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 47 En Specifications SX-LX70W Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer ⢠Amplifier section RMS Power Output (8 channel output): Front (L/R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W (50 W 50 W) (1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 8 ⦠) Dual Center (CL/CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 W (50 W 50 W) (1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 8 ⦠) Surround (L/R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W (50 W 50 W) (1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 8 ⦠) Double Subwoofer (2 channel) . . . . . 100 W (50 W 50 W) (100 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 8 ⦠) â¢F M tuner section Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ⦠, unbalanced â¢A M tuner section Frequency range With 9 kHz step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz With 10 kHz step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz to 1700 kHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna ⢠Subwoofer section Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bass-reflex floor type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cm 1-way system Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cm cone type x2 Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz to 500 Hz Maximum Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W x2 ⢠Input/Output section HDMI terminal input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin x3 output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin (5 V, 100 mA) Other connector System connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 pin Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical x2 (Digital) RCA (2 pin) (Analog) Control output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack x2 Display unit System connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 pin Front Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack MCACC input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack iPod input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 pin (12 V, 420 mA) â¢M iscellaneous Power requirements . . . . . . . AC 110 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 W Power consumption in standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.39 W (HDMI Control ON) 0.29 W (HDMI Control OFF) Dimensions . . . . . . 245 mm (W) x 409 mm (H) x 600 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.8 kg SSP-LX70ST Satellite Speaker (Front/center speakers x2, Surround speakers x2) ⢠Front/center speakers Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm 1-way system Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm cone type x3 Impedance Front channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠Center channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power Front channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W Center channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W Dimensions . . . . 122.5 mm (W) x 89.5 mm (H) x 104 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 kg ⢠Surround speakers Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm 1-way system Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm cone type x2 Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W Dimensions . . . . 122.5 mm (W) x 89.5 mm (H) x 104 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.44 kg Accessories ⢠Accessory box (AS-LX70): Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AA/LR6 alkaline batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 HDMI cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Display cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Optical digital cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 iPod cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 This operating instructions ⢠Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX70W) box: Cleaning cloth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ⢠Satellite Speakers (SSP-LX70ST) box: Speaker cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Speaker bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Non-skid pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Note ⢠Specifications and design subject to possible modification without notice, due to improvements. Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2007 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. HTP-LX70_En.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_ChH HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 2 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 3 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
4 ChH ç®é ç®é å è£Â箱堧容ç© . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 01 æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂå è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂæÂÂ注æÂÂçÂÂå®Âå ¨æÂªæÂ½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 å®¶åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢é³æÂÂè¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 æ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Ã¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 æºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ä¸Â使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§æÂ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 æÂÂè²å¨系統æÂ¥ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 éÂÂæÂ¼æÂÂè²å¨æÂºè¨ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Â注æÂÂäºÂé  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 02 æÂ¥ç· æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 å´é¢æÂ¿ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 å¾Âé¢æÂ¿ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 顯示è£Âç½®èÂÂé¢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 åºæÂŽÂ£æÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 03 æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 顯示è£Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 顯示幠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 éÂÂæÂ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 æÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 æÂÂä½Â堧建ç FM/AM 調諧å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 æÂÂä½Âå ÂéÂÂé»漿é»è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â莻è¦Âæ© . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 æÂÂä½Âå Âé Blu-ray Disc æÂÂæÂ¾æ© . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 æÂÂä½Âå Âé DVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 æÂÂä½Âå ÂéÂÂ硬碠/DVD éÂÂ影橠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 è£Âå ¥éÂÂæÂ§å¨é»池. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 æÂÂä½ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 使ç¨液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 04 éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂ你使ç¨ ãÂÂèªå MCACC ãÂÂè¨Âå®Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ç°ç¹Âé³æÂ . . . . . 23 05 èÂÂè½æÂ¨çÂÂ系統輸åºçÂÂé³æÂ æÂÂæÂÂè²é³ ï¼Âé©ç¨æÂ¼æÂÂä½³è²é³@. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 以ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂèÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Dolby Pro Logic II Music è¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ä¸Â央影åÂÂè¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 使ç¨ ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 使ç¨åÂÂå ´åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 以ç«Âé«Âè²èÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂ模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 使ç¨ ãÂÂè²é³修æÂ£å¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 以 MCACC æÂÂæÂÂèÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 使ç¨ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âã ã ãÂÂé¿度ãÂÂå ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂèÂÂè½模张. . . . . 27 調æÂ´ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 調æÂ´è²é³延é² . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 06 æÂ¶è½廣æÂ æÂ¶è½廣æÂ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 æÂ¹å FM æÂ¥æÂ¶ä¸Âè¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 æÂ¹å AM 鳿ÂÂä¸Âä½³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 æÂ¹è®ÂéÂÂ鳿ÂÂå¶模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 è¨ÂæÂ¶éÂȌ° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 æÂ¶è½é Âè¨ÂéÂȌ° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 æÂ¹è®Âé »çÂÂéÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 07 ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 使ç¨ ãÂÂè²é³è¨Âå®ÂãÂÂé¸å® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢è¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Ã¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ§å¶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 éÂÂå®è²éÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 使ç¨èÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°ç¹Â模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 LFE 衰渠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 使ç¨測試é³調æÂ´è²éÂÂä½Â溠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 08 å ¶ä»ÂæÂ¥ç· é£æÂ¥è¼Âå©è¨Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 æÂ¸ä½Âé³è¨ÂçÂÂ飿ÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 é£æÂ¥é¡Âæ¯Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 飿ÂÂ¥ iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 èÂÂè½å¤ÂæÂ¥é³è¨Âä¾Â溠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 é£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥å¤©ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 éÂÂæÂ¼æÂ§å¶輸åºé£æÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 使ç¨ HDMI 飿ÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 HDMI 模å¼Âè¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 éÂÂæÂ¼ HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 4 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
5 ChH ç®é 09 HDMI Control é²衠HDMI Control 飿ÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 è¨Âå® HDMI é¸頠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 è¨Âå® HDMI Control 模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 è¨Âå®ÂèªåÂÂå»¶é² . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 é»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂé³è¨Â輸堥è¨Âå® ï¼ TV 輸堥@. . . . . . . . . . 39 使ç¨åÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂä¹Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Ã¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Ã¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模å¼ÂæÂÂä½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Ã¥ÂÂæ¶ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 10 å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠調æÂÂ顯示å¹Â亮度 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 è¨Âå®ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨以æÂ§å¶é»è¦Âæ© . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 é»è¦Âæ©Âé Âè¨Â代碼表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 éÂÂè¨Â系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 å®Âè£ÂèÂÂç¶Âè· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 å®Âè£ÂæÂÂ示 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂ格张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 æÂ éÂÂæÂÂé¤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 ä¸Âè¬ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 調諧å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 顯示çÂÂè¨ÂæÂ¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 è¦Âæ ¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 å è£Â箱堧容ç© è«Â確èªÂå è£Â箱堧æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé  ç®çÂÂç©åÂÂã é Âä»¶ç @AS-LX70 ï¼Â@⢠éÂÂæÂ§å¨ ï¼Â第 15 é Â@⢠AA/LR6 é¹¼æÂ§é»池x4 ï¼Â第 21 é Âï¼ â¢ é»æºÂç· x3 ï¼Â第 12 é Â@⢠顯示è£Âç½® ï¼Â第 13 é Â@⢠AM 迴路天締ï¼Â第 11 é Â@⢠FM ç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天締ï¼Â第 11 é Â@⢠麥å Â風 ï¼Âç¨æÂ¼èªå MCACC è¨Âå®Âï¼ ï¼Â第 23 é Â@⢠HDMI é£æÂ¥ç· â¢ æÂ§å¶é£æÂ¥ç· ï¼Â第 35 é Â@⢠顯示é£æÂ¥ç· ï¼Â第 11 é Â@⢠å Âå¸æÂ¸ä½Âé£æÂ¥ç· ï¼Â第 12 é Â@⢠iPod é£æÂ¥ç· ï¼Â第 34 é Â@⢠æÂ¾ÂÂä½ÂæÂÂå æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ SX-LX70W ï¼Âå è£Â箱@⢠渠æ½Â帠æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ SSP-LX70ST ï¼Âå è£Â箱@⢠æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½® x2 ãÂÂç°繠x2 ï¼Â@第 6 ï¼ 11 é Â@⢠æÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥ç· x6 ï¼Â第 11 é Â@⢠æÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ x4 ï¼Â第 6 é Âï¼ â¢ é²æ»Â墠x16 ï¼Â第 6 ï¼ 7 é Â@⢠èº絲 x4 ï¼Â第 7 é Âï¼ HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 5 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂå 01 6 ChH 第 1 ç« æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂå è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂæÂÂ注æÂÂçÂÂå®Âå ¨æÂªæÂ½ çµÂè£ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨平æÂ¾ä»¥å Âç¼çÂÂæÂÂå¤ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå·ã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ å¨平穩çÂÂ表é¢ä¸Âé²è¡ÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂçµÂè£ÂãÂÂè¨Âå®ÂèÂÂæÂº æÂ¾ã 家åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢é³æÂÂè¨Âå® æÂ¨å¯è¦ÂæÂ¿éÂÂ大å°ÂèÂÂç¹æÂ§ï¼Â決å®Â使ç¨éÂÂå¥Â系統ä¸Âé©ç¨çÂÂæÂ è²å¨å®Âç½®æÂ¹å¼Âã æ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âå® æÂ¤çºæ¨ÂæºÂå¤Âè²éÂÂç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®Âï¼Âé©ç¨æÂ¼ 5.1 è²é çÂÂå®¶åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢é³æÂÂã åÂÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âå® æÂ¤è¨Âå®ÂæÂ¹å¼ÂæÂÂé©åÂÂå¨ç¡æ³ÂæÂ¾ç½®å¾Âç°ç¹ÂçÂÂæÂ æ³Âä¸Âï¼ÂæÂÂè 丠å¸ÂæÂÂå¨èÂÂè½åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå §æÂºè¨ÂéÂÂé·çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é»ç·ÂæÂÂ使ç¨ã 使ç¨ æÂ¤è¨Âå®ÂçµÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨第 26 é Âä¸ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå ´åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âã æºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ æÂ¬æ©Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§å¯ç¨æÂ¼éÂÂå°Âå¨æÂ¿éÂÂå §çÂÂæÂºæÂ¾ä½Âç½® èÂÂé²è¡Â調æÂ´ã 使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ 1 å¦Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示ï¼Âå°Â鲿»Âå¢Âè²¼å¨æÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ä¸Âã è«Â使ç¨é²æ»Âå¢ÂæÂÂé»ÂæÂ§çÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂè²¼ä¸Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§çÂÂ庠é¨ã ç°ç¹Âè²ï¼Âå·¦å´@ç°ç¹Âè²ï¼Âå³å´@åÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½®ï¼Âå·¦å´@åÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½®ï¼Âå³å´@èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ ç°ç¹Âè²ï¼Âå·¦å´@ç°ç¹Âè²ï¼Âå³å´@èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ Ã¥ÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½® ï¼Âå·¦å´@åÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½® ï¼Âå³å´@æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ 鲿»Â墠x 16 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 6 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂå 01 7 ChH 2 è£Âä¸ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ã å°ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¾å¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ä¸Âï¼Âç¶å¾Â使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂèº çµ²å°ÂæÂ¯åº§åºå®Âã â¢ é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§æÂÂ堩種形çÂÂã æÂ¨å¯以å¨å°ÂæÂÂè²å¨ æÂ¾å¨æÂ¯åº§ä¸Âå¾Âï¼Â檢æÂ¥èº絲çÂÂä½Âç½®æÂ¯å¦æÂ£ç¢ºå°Âé½Âä¾Âå¤ æÂ·æÂ¯å¦使ç¨æÂ£ç¢ºçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ã ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½® ï¼Âå·¦å´ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âå³å´@ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½® ï¼Âå³å´ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âå·¦å´ï¼Â使ç¨ç¹å®ÂçÂÂæÂ¯åº§ï¼ ä¸¦é¨éÂÂæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂ堩種é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¯åº§ãÂÂï¼ ä¸Â使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§æÂ â¢ å°Â鲿»Âå¢Âé»Âè²¼æÂ¼æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½®èÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂ庠é¨ ï¼Âå¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示@ã è«Â使ç¨é²æ»Âå¢ÂæÂÂé»ÂæÂ§çÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂè²¼ä¸Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂåºÂé¨ã æÂÂè²å¨系統æÂ¥ç· è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± æÂ¥ç· ä»¥ä¾¿æÂ£ç¢ºé£æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨ã å®ÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·Âå¾Âï¼Âè«Âä¾Âç § ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示å®Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ï¼Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã å®Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ å¾Âï¼Âè«Âå·è¡Âèªå MCACC è¨Âå® ï¼Â第 23 é Âï¼ ï¼Âå®ÂæÂÂç°繠鳿ÂÂçÂÂè¨Âå®Âã éÂÂæÂ¼æÂÂè²å¨æÂºè¨ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Â注æÂÂäºÂ頠⢠å°Â主è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂ左峿ÂÂè²å¨å®Âè£Âå¨èÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂè·Âä¹ÂèÂÂã â¢ 使ç¨æ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âå®ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°Âç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨å®Âè£Âå¨ç¨Âå¾® é«ÂæÂ¼è³æÂµçÂÂä½Â置以å¾Âå°æÂÂä½³æÂÂæÂÂã â¢ 使ç¨åÂÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âå®ÂæÂÂï¼Â使左å´èÂÂå³å´æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢素1.5 m 以å¾Âå°æÂÂä½³æÂÂæÂÂã å®Âå ¨é Âç¥@⢠è«Âå¿å°ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¾ç½®æÂ¼ä¸Âç©©å®ÂçÂÂå¹³é¢ä¸Âï¼ÂéÂÂ樣å¯è½尠è´æÂÂè²å¨å¾åÂÂï¼Âé æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂÂå£ÂæÂÂ人å¡åÂÂå·ã â¢ æÂ¬ç³»çµ±é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é½æÂ¯é²ç£ÂæÂÂè²å¨ã ç¶èÂÂï¼ è¦Âå®Âè£Âä½Âç½®ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂèÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨å®Âè£Âä½Âç½®éÂÂæÂ¼æÂ¥è¿Âé»覠æ©Âè¢å¹Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯è½æÂÂç¼çÂÂè²彩失çÂÂçÂÂæÂ æ³Âã èÂ¥ç¼çÂÂæÂ¤ æÂ æ³Âï¼Âè«Âå ÂéÂÂéÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â黿ºÂï¼ 15 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂè³ 30 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå¾ åÂÂéÂÂæÂ°éÂÂæ©ÂãÂÂèÂ¥æÂ æ³Âä»ÂæÂªæÂ¹åÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨系統é é¢é»è¦Âæ©Âã â¢ çºå®Â堨起è¦Âï¼Âè«Â確å®ÂæÂÂè²å¨端åÂÂå¤Âæ²ÂæÂÂä»»ä½ÂæÂªå 覠çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é»ç·Âã â¢ è«Âå¿å°Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥å ¶ä»ÂæÂ´å¤§å¨ã å¦åÂÂå¯è½é æÂÂæÂ éÂÂæÂÂå¼Âèµ·ç«ç½ã â¢ è«Âå¿é£æÂ¥æÂ¤ç³»çµ±å¤ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂÂè²å¨ã â¢ æÂÂè²å¨系統è·網èÂÂç¡æ³ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âã è«Âå¿試åÂÂå¼·è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå®Âï¼ å¦åÂÂå¯è½å°Âè´è·網èÂÂæÂÂå£Âã â¢ è«Â使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂ渠æ½Âå¸Â渠æ½Âé³箱ãÂÂè«Âå¿è®Âé Âç²¾ãÂÂç¨Âé åÂÂãÂÂç²è¯æÂÂ殺è²åÂÂæÂ¥è§¸å°æÂ¬æ©Â表é¢ï¼Âå¦åÂÂ表é¢å¯è½ æÂÂè®Âè²ãÂÂæÂ¤å¤Âï¼Â使ç¨沾æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¸èÂ¥åÂÂçÂÂ渠æ½Âå¸ÂæÂÂï¼Âè« å°Âå¿Âéµå®Â堶注æÂÂäºÂé  ã æÂÂè²å¨ èº絲 æÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ Ã¥ÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½®èÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ 鲿»Â墠x 16 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 7 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ¥ç· 02 8 ChH 第 2 ç« æÂ¥ç· æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ å´é¢æÂ¿ ⢠å´é¢æÂ¿çÂÂæÂ¥é Âä¸ÂæÂÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã A. æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂèµ·é¤åÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸ÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã B. å®ÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼Âå°ÂæºÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂä½Âç½®ï¼Âç¶å¾Âå°ÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¾åÂÂå å§Âä½Âç½®ã 1 CONTROL OUT æÂÂå @x2 @使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂ§å¶é£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥å ¶ä»Âå ÂéÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 DIGITAL OPTICAL IN æÂÂå @x2 ï¼ è¦ÂæÂ¶è½å Âå¸æÂ¸ä½Â鳿ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°Â輸堥è®ÂæÂ´çº Digital 1 æÂ Digital 2 ã ç¶æÂ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂæÂ¸ä½Â輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥å°éÂÂäºÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âè¨Âå® ã TV Input ã ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 39 é Âï¼ ã 3 AM LOOP 天ç·Â端å 4F M 天ç·ÂæÂÂ座 5 ANALOG AUDIO IN æÂÂå 使ç¨ç«Âé«Âè²é³æÂÂ代碼èÂÂçÂÂä¾Âèªå¤Âé¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè²é³ã èÂ¥è¦ÂæÂ¶ è½é¡Âæ¯Â鳿ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°Â輸堥è®ÂæÂ´çº Analog ã ç¶æÂ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂé¡Âæ¯Â輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥å°éÂÂäºÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âè¨Âå® ã TV Input ã ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 39 é Âï¼ ã 6 SPEAKERS 端å æ¯Âå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂé¡Âè²èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèªçÂÂæÂ¥é Âé¡Âè²ã 7 AC IN ï¼Â黿ºÂæÂÂå FRONT R R L RL LR L AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 ⦠FRONT CENTER SURROUND SUBWOOFER OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 OUT 1 OUT 2 SPEAKERS ( 8 ⦠) ANALOG AUDIO IN ANTENNA DIGIT AL CONTROL 1 2 5 6 7 4 3 AC IN A B HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 8 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ¥ç· 02 9 ChH å¾Âé¢æÂ¿ 8 HDMI OUT æÂ¥é  é£æÂ¥è³æÂ HDMI 端åÂÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã 9 HDMI IN æÂ¥é  ï¼ x3 @使ç¨é«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ質é³è¨Âî¿è¦Âè¨Âé£æÂ¥æÂ¹å¼Âé£æÂ¥ç¸容ç HDMI è£Âç½® ã èÂ¥è¦Â鏿ÂÂæÂ¤è¼¸å ¥ï¼Âè«Âé¸æÂ HDMI 1 è³ HDMI 3 ã 10 SYSTEM æÂ¥é  é£æÂ¥è³顯示è£Âç½®ã 顯示è£Âç½®èÂÂé¢ 1 SYSTEM æÂ¥é  é£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ 2 F.AUDIO 輸堥æÂÂå èÂ¥è¦ÂèÂÂè½ä¾Âèªå¤Âé¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂï¼Âè«Â使ç¨ç«Âé«Âè²迷你æÂÂé  é£æÂ¥ç·Â飿ÂÂ¥ ã é£æÂ¥å¾Âï¼Â輸堥èªåÂÂè®ÂæÂ´çº Front Audio In ã 3 iPod 輸堥端å ç¨æÂ¼é£æÂ¥æÂ¨ç Apple iPod Ã¥ÂÂçºé³æºÂã é£æÂÂ¥ iPod æÂÂï¼Â輸堥èªåÂÂè®ÂæÂ´çº iPod ã 4 MCACC SETUP MIC æÂÂå ç¨æÂ¼é£æÂ¥ä¾Âèªå MCACC è¨Âå®Â使ç¨çÂÂé¨éÂÂ麥å Â風 ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 23 é Âï¼ ã HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 89 10 F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM 1 2 3 4 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 9 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ¥ç· 02 10 ChH åºæÂŽÂ£æÂÂ¥ éÂÂ覠⢠å°ÂæÂ¤ç³»çµ±é²è¡ÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂè®ÂæÂ´æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ éÂÂéÂÂ黿ºÂ@並å°Â黿ºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂèªçÂÂä¸Â黿ºÂæÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂé¤ãÂÂå®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ æÂ¥ç·Âå¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°Â黿ºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂ¥ä¸Â黿ºÂæÂÂ座ã è¦å â¢ å ÂéÂÂå°ÂæÂ¼ä»»ä½Âå é¯誤çµÂè£ÂæÂÂå®Âè£ÂãÂÂçÂÂå£Âåºå®Â強度丠足ãÂÂåºå®Âè£Âå ï¼ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»Â建æÂÂï¼ ãÂÂä¸Âç¶使ç¨æÂÂ天ç½æÂ é æÂÂä¹ÂæÂÂå¤Âï¼Âæ¦Âä¸Â負責ã HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 2 SYSTEM F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT INPUT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM 1 FL CL FR CR SR SL èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® AM 迴路天締FM 天締å¾Âé¢æÂ¿ 顯示è£Âç½® æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ 顯示é£æÂ¥ç· åÂÂç½®î¿ ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âå³å´@åÂÂç½®î¿ ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âå·¦å´@ç°ç¹Âè² æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âå³å´@ç°ç¹Âè² æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âå·¦å´@å´é¢æÂ¿ FRONT R R L RL LR L AM LOOP FRONT CENTER SURROUND SUB ANALOG AU DI O IN ANTENNA 3 4 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 10 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ¥ç· 02 11 ChH 1 é£æÂ¥é¡¯ç¤ºè£Âç½®èÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ã å°Â顯示å¹Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂ堥顯示è£Âç½®å¾ÂæÂ¹çÂÂæÂ¥é Âï¼Âç¶å¾Âå°Â顯示 å¹Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂå¦ä¸Â端æÂÂå ¥æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ç SYSTEM æÂ¥é Âã 注æÂ â¢ è«Âå¿åÂÂ試å°Â顯示è£Âç½®å®Âè£Âå¨çÂÂä¸Âã 2 çµÂ裠AM 迴路天ç·Âã a. ä¾Âç®Âé ÂæÂÂ示æÂ¹åÂÂå½ÂæÂ²æÂ¯æÂ¶ã b. å°Â迴路天ç·Â夾å¨æÂ¯æÂ¶ä¸Âã c. èÂ¥è¦Âåºå®Âå¨çÂÂå£ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»Â表é¢ä¸Âï¼Âå Â以èº絲åºå®ÂæÂ¯æÂ¶ å¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå·è¡ÂæÂ¥é© b ã æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è°æÂ¨ä»¥èº絲åºå®ÂæÂ¯æÂ¶åÂÂï¼Âå Â確èªÂæÂ¥æÂ¶å¼·åº¦ã 3 飿ÂÂ¥ AM å FM 天締1 ã a. å° AM 迴路天ç·ÂçÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Âæ¢Âé»ç·Âé£æÂ¥å°æ¯Âå AM 天締端åÂÂ丠2 ã æÂÂä¸Âå¡èÂÂ便å¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ端åÂÂï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾ÂæÂÂå ¥é»ç·Âï¼Âé¬ÂéÂÂå¡ èÂÂ便å¯å°Âé»ç·Â夾ä½Âåºå®Âã b. å° FM 天締3 æÂÂé ÂæÂ¨å ¥ FM 天ç·ÂæÂÂæ§½çÂÂä¸Â央æÂ¥è ³ã 4 é£æÂ¥æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ã â¢ æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Â端齿ÂÂå«é¡Âè²代碼çÂÂæÂÂ¥ é Âï¼Âå¦ä¸Â端åÂÂæÂÂå ©æ¢Âé»ç·Âã â¢ æÂÂéÂÂ並æÂÂåºæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂé»ç·ÂçÂÂä¿Âè·層ã â¢ å°Âé»ç·Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂÂè²å¨ä¸Âã 使ç¨å¾Â表é¢åÂÂèÂÂæ¨Â籤ä¸ÂæÂ ä¾ÂçÂÂé¡Âè²代碼æÂÂ示å¯以èÂÂå¥åÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæ¯Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ã æ¯Âå°Âé¡Âè²代碼ç·ÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂæ¨Â籤ä¸Âé¡Âè²æÂÂ示ï¼Âç¶å¾Âå° é¡Âè²代碼ç·ÂæÂÂ堥素è² ï¼ ï¼Â端ï¼Âå¦ä¸Âæ¢Âç·ÂæÂÂå ¥ é»Âè² ï¼ â ï¼Â端ã â¢ å°Âå¦ä¸Â端æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨å´é¢æÂÂé¡Âè²代碼ç æÂÂè²å¨端åÂÂã è«Â確å®Âå°Âé»ç·Âå®Âå ¨æÂÂå ¥ã è«Âå°Âå¿ÂæÂÂå ¥æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂé Âï¼Âå æÂ¤å¨æÂÂ堥堶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ端å æÂÂå¿ é ÂæÂÂæÂ£ç¢ºæÂ¹åÂÂæÂÂå ¥ã è«Â確å®ÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂ£ç¢ºã éÂÂ註 1 ⢠è«Âå°Â天ç·Âé é¢堶ä»Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂãÂÂ顯示è£Â置以åÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ã â¢ èÂ¥é¨éÂÂ天ç·ÂçÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶è¨ÂèÂÂä¸Âè¯ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 28 é Âä¸Âç æÂ¹å FM æÂ¥æÂ¶ä¸Âè¯ 以å æÂ¹å AM 鳿ÂÂä¸Âä½³ ï¼ÂæÂÂ第 35 é Âä¸Âç é£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥å¤©ç· ã â¢ ä¸Âå¯å®Âè£Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂ迴路天ç·Â以å¤ÂçÂÂ天ç·Âï¼ÂæÂÂ妠第 35 é  æÂÂè¿°çÂÂå¤ÂæÂ¥å¤©ç·Âã 2 ⢠è«Âå¿使天ç·ÂæÂ¥è§¸éÂÂ屬ç©é«Âï¼Â並é¿å Âå°Âå ¶å®Âç½®å¨é»蠦ãÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»ÂéÂȌ¨ç¨åÂÂéÂÂè¿Âã â¢ èÂ¥ç¡ç·ÂéÂȾ¶è¨Âä¸Âè¯ï¼Âå¯éÂÂæÂ°å°Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天ç·Âé»ç·Âè£Âè³ç¸åÂÂçÂÂ端åÂÂ以æ±ÂæÂ¹åÂÂã â¢ çºéÂÂæÂÂä½³æÂ¶è¨Âï¼Âè«Âå¿尠AM 迴路天ç·Âé»ç·ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¹åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂå°Âå ¶ç¹Âå¨迴路天ç·Âå¨åÂÂã 3 çº確ä¿ÂæÂÂä½³æÂ¶è¨Âï¼Âè«Â確宠FM 天ç·Âå®Âå ¨å±ÂéÂÂï¼Âä¸ÂæÂªçºÂç¹ÂæÂÂæÂ¸æÂÂæÂ¼è£Âç½®å¾ÂæÂ¹ã a b c 1 2 3 é¡Âè²代碼締ï¼Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂÂè²å¨@é¡Âè²代碼çÂÂæÂ¥é  ï¼Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨@é»Âè² (âÂÂ) ç´ è² ( ) é¡Âè²代碼締HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 11 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ¥ç· 02 12 ChH 注æÂ â¢ éÂÂäºÂæÂÂè²å¨端åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ帶æÂ å±éªé»å£Âã çºé¿å Âå¨é£æÂ¥æÂ è«é¢æÂÂè²å¨ç·ÂæÂÂç¼çÂÂéÂȾÂÂå±éªï¼Âå¨觸æÂ¸ä»»ä½ÂæÂªçµÂç·£ é¨åÂÂä¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå Âå°Â黿ºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂÂé¢ã â¢ è«Âå¿é£æÂ¥æÂ¤ç³»çµ±å¤ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂÂè²å¨ã â¢ è«Âå¿å°Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥æÂ¤ç³»çµ±ä»¥å¤ÂçÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨ã èÂÂ¥ é£æÂ¥å ¶ä»ÂæÂ´å¤§å¨å¯è½å°Âè´æÂ éÂÂæÂÂå¼Âèµ·ç«ç½ã â¢ é£æÂ¥æÂÂé Âå¾Âï¼Âè¼Âè¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Â以確å®Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂ締端已ç¶ÂèÂÂ端åÂÂç¢ç¢å°é£æÂ¥ã é£æÂ¥ä¸Âè¯å¯è½ç¢çÂÂåªé³ 並é æÂÂè²é³ä¸ÂæÂ·ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂçºÂç·ÂçÂÂè¯ç·ÂæÂÂå¤Â被æÂÂåº端åÂÂå¤Â並å°Âè´è¯ç·ÂäºÂç¸ æÂ¥è§¸ï¼Âå°ÂæÂÂå°ÂæÂ¾å¤§å¨ç¢çÂÂéÂÂéÂÂçÂÂé¡Âå¤Âè² è¼Âã éÂÂ樣å¯ è½é æÂÂæÂ¾å¤§å¨åÂÂæÂ¢ä½Âç¨ï¼ÂçÂÂè³æÂÂå£ÂæÂ¾å¤§å¨ã 5 èÂ¥æÂÂå ¶ä»Âè¦Âé£æÂ¥ç DVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨æÂÂå½±é³ä¾Â溠1 è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ è«Âå Âé²è¡Âé£æÂ¥ï¼Âç¨Âå¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Â黿ºÂã éÂÂæÂ¼é£æÂ¥æÂ¸ä½Âä¾ÂæºÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂ¹å¼Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 33 é Âã 6 å°ÂéÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥è³é»è¦Âæ©Âã â¢ å°ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ç HDMI OUT æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³é»覠æ©Âç HDMI 輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 7 å°Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂé³è¨Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ã â¢ èÂ¥è¦Â使ç¨æÂ¬æ©ÂèÂÂè½é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂè²é³ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¿ é Âå°Âé»è¦Âæ© çÂÂé³è¨Â輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂé³è¨Â輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã æÂ¨å¯ 以使ç¨æÂ¸ä½ ï¼Âå Âå¸ï¼ÂæÂÂé¡Âæ¯Âé³è¨Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥ã å¦Â覠èÂÂè½æÂ¸ä½Â鳿ÂÂï¼Âè«Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ä¸Âç DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 ãÂÂèÂ¥è¦Âå¨é£æÂ¥è³æÂ¯æÂ´çÂÂå Âé é»漿é»è¦ÂæÂÂ使ç¨ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¿ é ÂéÂÂé HDMI é£æÂ¥ã â¢ æÂ¨å¿ é Âå Âè¨Âå® ã TV Input ãÂÂ以åÂÂæÂÂä¾Âèªé»漿é»覠ï¼Âå ·æÂ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ï¼ÂçÂÂé³è¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂå°ÂæÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂ輸 å ¥ä¾ÂæºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³é»è¦Âæ©Âé³è¨Âï¼Âç¶å¾Â使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ æÂÂä½ÂæÂ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã å¦ÂéÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 17 é Â丠ç æÂÂä½Âå ÂéÂÂé»漿é»è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â莻è¦Âæ© åÂÂ第 39 é Âä¸Âç é» 漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂé³è¨Â輸堥è¨Âå® ï¼ TV 輸堥@ã 8 æÂ¥ä¸Â黿ºÂç·Âã 2 ⢠å°Â黿ºÂç·Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ç AC 黿ºÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã ä¾Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé ÂåºÂå°Âæ¯Âæ¢Â黿ºÂç·Âé£æÂ¥è³çÂÂä¸Â黿ºÂæÂÂ座ã 1. æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ 2. é»è¦Â橠⢠å°Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨å´é¢æÂ¿çÂÂ黿ºÂç·Âç¹ÂéÂÂæÂ¬ æ©ÂèÂÂé¢ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ´æÂÂå´é¢æÂ¿çÂÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 R L AM LOOP OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 ANALOG AUD I O IN ANTENNA DIGIT AL é»è¦Âæ© 7 6 å¾Âé³è¨Â輸åº æÂ å¾ÂæÂ¸ä½Âé³訠輸åºï¼Âå Âå¸@è³ HDMI 輸堥 å¾Âé¢æÂ¿ å´é¢æÂ¿ æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ éÂÂ註 1 è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ é£æÂ¥é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂ顯示å¨ ï¼ÂèÂ¥æÂÂè¦Âè¨Âä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âï¼Â以便ç¼æÂ®æÂ¤ç³»çµ±çÂÂå®¶åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢åÂÂè½ã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂ顯示å¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Â以äºÂè§£é£æÂ¥çÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âã 2 ⢠è«Âå¿使ç¨æÂ¬ç³»çµ±é¨éÂÂ以å¤ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Â黿ºÂç·Âã â¢ é¤é£æÂ¥æÂ¬ç³»çµ±å¤Âï¼Âè«Âå¿å°Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂ黿ºÂç·Âä½Âçº堶ä»Âç¨éÂÂ使ç¨ã â¢ å°ÂæÂ¬æ©Âé£æÂ¥è³ AC 黿ºÂæÂÂ座å¾Âï¼ÂéÂÂå§ 15 ç§ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¨ÂåºÂã åÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂä¸Âå¯以å·è¡Âä»»ä½ÂæÂÂä½Âã 顯示è£Âç½®ä¸Âç HDMI æÂÂ示çÂÂå¨åÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂçÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯ 以å¨æÂ¤ HDMI æÂÂ示çÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¢éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂå³éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¬æ©Â黿ºÂã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 12 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 13 ChH 第 3 ç« æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 顯示è£Âç½® 1 î STANDBY/ON æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨é»æºÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 INPUT SELECTOR ï¼Â第 33 é Âï¼ åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âé¨é³è¨Â輸堥æÂÂå @HDMI 1 è³ HDMI 3 ã Digital 1 ã Digital 2 ã Analog ã iPod æÂ Front Audio In ï¼ ã 3 VOL /â æÂÂéµ ç¨æÂ¼èª¿æÂ´é³éÂÂã 4 POWER ON æÂÂ示ç ï¼ÂèÂÂè²@5 Ã¥ÂÂé¢æÂ¿é¡¯ç¤º 詳æÂ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 14 é Âã 6 ç´ å¤Âç·ÂéÂÂæÂ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨ ï¼Â第 22 é Âï¼ 7 HDMI æÂÂ示ç ï¼Âç´ è²@ç¶æÂ¤æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥è³ HDMI ï¼ HDCP ï¼Âç¸容è¨Âå æÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã å¨å°ÂæÂ¬æ©Â黿ºÂæÂÂé ÂæÂÂå ¥ AC 黿ºÂæÂÂ座å¾ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæÂ ç¤ºçÂÂä¹ÂæÂÂ亮起ã é Â鍿ÂÂé 1 2 3 4 7 5 6 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 13 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 14 ChH 顯示幠1 DIRECT 鏿ÂÂç´æÂ¥è²é³æÂ ï¼Âå³éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²é³æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 24 é Âï¼ ã 2 èÂÂè½模å¼ÂæÂÂ示ç STEREO 鏿ÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模å¼ÂæÂÂå¨ ãÂÂèªåÂÂèÂÂè½ãÂÂ模å¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ç«Âé« è²é³æºÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã F.S.SURR. 鏿ÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Â種åÂÂå ´åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²èÂÂè½模å¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮 起@第 26 é Âï¼ ã ADV.SURR. 鏿ÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Â種å Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²èÂÂè½模å¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 25 é Âï¼ ã 3 2 PRO LOGIC II å¨ Dolby Pro Logic II 解碼æÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 25 é Âï¼ ã 4 è²é³èÂÂçÂÂæÂÂ示ç å¨é¸æÂ ãÂÂé¿度ã ã ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âã ã ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂæÂÂé³調æÂ§å¶åÂÂè½æÂ æÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 27 é Âï¼ ã 5 S.RTRV è²é³修æÂ£å¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã 6 HDMI THROUGH HDMI Mode è¨Âå®Âçº Through Mode æÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã 7 MCACC MCACC ç¹æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 27 é Âï¼ ã èªå MCACC è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂç ï¼Â第 23 é Âï¼ ã 8 æÂ¸ä½Âæ ¼å¼ÂæÂÂ示ç 2 DIGITAL æÂÂæÂ¾ Dolby Digital ä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ï¼Â第 24 é Âï¼ ã DTS æÂÂæÂ¾ DTS ä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 24 é Âï¼ ã DTS 96/24 æÂÂæÂ¾ DTS 96/24 解碼æÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 24 é Âï¼ ã DSD î PCM 以 SACD å° DSD ï¼ Direct Stream Digital ï¼Âç´æÂ¥æµÂæÂ¸ ä½Âï¼Âè½ÂæÂÂçº PCM æÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã PCM æÂÂæÂ¾ PCM è¨ÂèÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã 9 Ã¥ÂÂå Â顯示幠10 調諧卿ÂÂ示ç æÂ¥æÂ¶å»£æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã å¨èªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模å¼Âä¸ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶ç«Âé«Âè² FM 廣æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂ äº®èµ·ã é¸æÂ FM å®è²éÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã 11 ç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 40 é Âï¼ ã 2 DIGIT AL DTS 96/24 DIRECT STEREO F .S.SURR. LO UDNESS MIDNIGHT DNR DIAL OG HDMI THROUGH QUIET TONE S.RTRV MCACC ADV .SURR. 2 PRO L OGIC DSD PCM 2 1 4 6 5 89 10 11 3 7 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 14 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 15 ChH éÂÂæÂ§å¨ â¢ å¦ÂéÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨çÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 22 é Âä¸Âç æÂ ä½ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ ã æÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ æÂ¬ç¯Â說æÂÂå¦Âä½ÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨çÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ã è«Â注 æÂÂï¼Âç¶æÂ¨çºåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂè£Âç½®é¸æÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½æÂÂï¼ÂæÂ§å¶æÂÂéµ æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 1 î RECEIVER å°ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨åÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ã 2 î TV å°Âé»è¦Âæ©Â黿ºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ã TV CTRL å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨åÂÂæÂÂè³é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂä½Â模张ï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂå½±é¿æÂ¬æ©Âç ç®åÂÂ輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂï¼ ã 3 î SOURCE å°ÂæÂÂ鏿ÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ黿ºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ï¼Â第 22 é Âï¼ ã 4 輸堥鏿ÂÂæÂÂéµ è®ÂæÂ´æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂ輸堥ã 使ç¨æÂŽÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂÂä½Âå¦ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è¨Âå æÂÂï¼Âå¿ é ÂæÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂäºÂæÂÂéµçÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¹Âä¸Âã HDMI 1 è³ HDMI 3 å°Â輸堥徠HDMI 1 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ HDMI 3 ã TV Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂè³å¨é»è¦Âæ©Â輸堥è¨Âå®Â鏿ÂÂçÂÂ輸堥 ï¼Â第 39 é Âï¼ ã FM/AM ï¼Â第 28 é Âï¼ åÂÂæÂ FM å AM 波段ã LINE ï¼Â第 34 é Âï¼ åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨çÂÂé³訠輸堥 ï¼ Digital 1 ã Digital 2 ã Analog ã iPod æÂ Front Audio In ï¼Âã 5 æ¶²æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ 顯示ç¨æÂ¼æÂ§å¶æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ãÂÂé»漿é»è¦Âã DVD æÂÂæÂ¾ å¨ã Blu-ray Disc æÂÂæÂ¾æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂ硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂçÂÂå¤Âé¨è¨Âå çÂÂæÂÂéµã ç®åÂÂçÂÂæÂÂä½Â模å¼Â顯示å¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨è¢å¹ÂçÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂæÂ¹ã éÂÂç¶液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢å¨ä¸Â段æÂÂéÂÂæÂªå·è¡Âä»»ä½ÂæÂÂä½Âå¾ÂæÂÂ涠失ï¼Âä½Âåªè¦Â碰觸è¢å¹ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂ鵿ÂÂï¼Âå®Âå°±æÂ åºç¾ã 6 å ¶ä»Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéµ ç¨æÂ¼æÂÂä½Â硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»Âé£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 7 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Â游æ¨ÂæÂÂéÂ括Âå ENTER ç¨æÂ¼æÂ§å¶æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨åÂÂè½ã 8 SETUP ç¨æÂ¼åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå®ÂãÂÂ調諧å¨è¨Âå®ÂçÂÂçÂÂé¸å®系統 ï¼Â第 28 ã 30 ã 38 ã 40 é Âï¼ ã 9 RETURN ç¨æÂ¼åÂÂæ¶Âè¨Âå®Âã 10 RCV ç¨æÂ¼ç¶æÂ¬æ©Âå¨堶ä»ÂæÂÂä½Â模å¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè² å¨ã åÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次å¯è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂä½Â模å¼Âã 11 VOL /â ç¨æÂ¼èª¿æÂ´æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨çÂÂé³éÂÂã 12 MUTE éÂÂ鳿ÂÂæÂ¢å¾©æÂÂæÂ¾å·²éÂÂé³çÂÂè²é³ ï¼Â調æÂ´é³éÂÂä¹Â使è²é³æÂ¢å¾© æÂÂæÂ¾ï¼ ã RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 123 CTRL TV LINE FM/AM TV TOP MENU DISC NAVIGATOR HOME MENU MENU PAGE RETURN RECEIVER RCV VOL M UT E SETUP î î î 1 5 8 10 11 7 4 2 3 9 12 6 6 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 15 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 16 ChH æ¶²æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ 13 SURR ç¨æÂ¼é¸æÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模张ï¼Â第 24 é Âï¼ ã ADV.SURR ç¨æÂ¼å°Âé³è¨Âè¨Âå®Âè®ÂæÂ´çºå ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå§ÂçÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²模张ï¼Â第 25 é Âï¼ ã F.S.SURR ç¨æÂ¼é¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå ´åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模张ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã 14 GENRE ç¨æÂ¼å¨ ãÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂãÂÂ模å¼Âä¸ÂèÂÂè½é³æÂ ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã ï¼ÂæÂ¤æÂÂéµå å¨æÂÂä½Â硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂæÂÂéÂÂåºç¾ RECEIVER ç«é¢æÂÂ顯示ãÂÂï¼ 15 SOUND RTRV æÂÂä¸Âå¯尠CD Ã¥ÂÂ質鳿ÂÂæÂ¢å¾©æÂÂå£Â縮çÂÂ鳿ÂÂä¾Â溠ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã 16 DIRECT ç¨æÂ¼éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²é³模张ï¼Â第 24 é Âï¼ ã 17 MCACC éÂÂå§Âèªå MCACC è¨Âå® ï¼Â第 23 é Âï¼ ã 18 TEST TONE ç¨æÂ¼è¼¸åº測試é³ ï¼Â以便é²è¡ÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®Âï¼ ï¼Â第 32 é Âï¼ ã 19 SOUND æÂÂä¸Âå¯é²堥鳿ÂÂé¸å®ï¼Âé²èÂÂ調æÂ´ä½Âé³èÂÂé«Âé³çÂÂã 20 SLEEP æÂÂä¸Âå¯è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ ï¼Â第 40 é Âï¼ ã 21 EXIT Ã¥ÂÂæ¶Âè¨Âå®Â並éÂÂåº RECEIVER ç«é¢ã æÂÂä½Â堧建ç FM/AM 調諧å¨ 1 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Â游æ¨ÂæÂÂéÂ括Âå ENTER ç¨æÂ¼æÂ§å¶ FM/AM 調諧å¨åÂÂè½ã 2 SETUP ç¨æÂ¼åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸å®系統æÂÂ調諧å¨è¨Âå®Âã 3 RETURN ç¨æÂ¼åÂÂæ¶Âè¨Âå®Âã 液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ 4 æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµ ç¨æÂ¼ç´æÂ¥é¸æÂÂé Âè¨Â廣æÂÂéÂȌ°ã CLEAR æÂÂä¸Âå¯渠é¤任ä½Â輸堥çÂÂ堧容並éÂÂæÂ°è¼¸å ¥ã 5 TUNE /â ç¨æÂ¼æÂÂå°ÂéÂȌ°頻çÂÂã 6 ST /â ç¨æÂ¼é¸æÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ã RECEIVER SURR GENRE SLEEP EXIT MC ACC SOUND DIRECT ADV . SURR TEST TONE SOUND RTRV F .S. SURR 16 19 21 18 15 13 14 17 20 TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN 2 3 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP 1 FM/AM - TUNE - ST CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 4 5 6 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 16 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 17 ChH æÂÂä½Âå ÂéÂÂé»漿é»è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â莻è¦Âæ© è«Âå ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 40 é Âä¸Âç è¨Âå®ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨以æÂ§å¶é»è¦Âæ© ä¸ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¨Âå®Âé»è¦Âæ©Âé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°çÂÂè³Âè¨Âã è«Â注æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂäºÂæÂÂéµç¡æ³ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂ äºÂé»è¦Âæ©Â使ç¨ã 1 î TV å°Âé»è¦Âæ©Â黿ºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ã TV CTRL å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨åÂÂæÂÂè³é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂä½Â模张ï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂå½±é¿æÂ¬æ©Âç ç®åÂÂ輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂï¼ ã 2 î SOURCE å°Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂ黿ºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ã 3 PAGE </> Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂæ¶²æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ä¸ÂçÂÂé Âé¢ã 4 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Â游æ¨ÂæÂÂéÂ括Âå ENTER ç¨æÂ¼å°Â覽æÂÂæÂÂè¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½é¸å®ã æÂÂ丠ENTER 鏿ÂÂç®åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½ çÂÂé¸頠ã 5 HOME MENU 顯示 HOME MENU ç«é¢ã 6 RETURN Ã¥ÂÂå°åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸å®ç«é¢ã 7 彩è² ï¼Âç´ î¿綠î¿é»Âî¿èÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂéµ é¸æÂÂé Âé¢ã 液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ 8 æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµ é¸æÂÂé »éÂÂã 9 CH RTN Ã¥ÂÂå°åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ鏿ÂÂçÂÂé »éÂÂã 10 CH ENTER æÂÂæÂ¾æÂÂ鏿ÂÂçÂÂé »éÂÂèÂÂ碼ã 11 P /â é¸æÂÂé »éÂÂã 12 INPUT 鏿ÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂ輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂã 13 MUTE éÂÂé³ã 14 TV VOL /â è¨Âå®Âé³éÂÂã SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 5 7 2 6 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP CTRL TV î RECEIVER î PAGE 4 1 3 PDP MUTE INPUT 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 P - TV V O L - 12 10 9 14 11 13 TV 12 3 8 æÂªè¨Âå®Âçºå Âé é»漿é»è¦ÂæÂÂ顯示ã CH ENTER CH RTN HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 17 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 18 ChH æÂÂä½Âå Âé Blu-ray Disc æÂÂæÂ¾æ© 1 î SOURCE å° Blu-ray Disc æÂÂæÂ¾æ©ÂçÂÂ黿ºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ã 2 PAGE </> æ¶²æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢顯示å¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂé Â颿ÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂé Âé¢ã 3 TOP MENU / DISC NAVIGATOR æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示 BD-ROM æÂ DVD-Video ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂæÂÂä¸Â層é¸å®ã æÂÂæÂ¾ DVD-R/-RW æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示î¿éÂÂåº ãÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂã ã 4 MENU BD-ROM ï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示î¿é±èÂÂå½Âåºå¼Âé¸å®ã DVD-Video ï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å® ï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂï¼ ã 5 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Â游æ¨ÂæÂÂéÂ括Âå ENTER ç¨æÂ¼å°Â覽è¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½åÂÂé¸å®ã æÂÂ丠ENTER 鏿ÂÂé¸頠æÂÂå·衠æÂÂ令ã 6 HOME MENU æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ç Home Menu ï¼Âé²堥 Home Menu å¯ 使ç¨大é¨åÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾å¨åÂÂè½ã 7 RETURN æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂå°åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç«é¢ã 8 彩è² ï¼Âç´ î¿綠î¿é»Âî¿èÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂéµ ç¨æÂ¼å°Â覽 BD-ROM é¸å®ã 液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ 9 ( AUDIO ) æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂè²éÂÂæÂÂèªÂè¨Âã ( SUBTITLE ) æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂçÂÂ顯示ã ( ANGLE ) æÂÂæÂ¾ BD-ROM æÂ DVD-Video å½±çÂÂçÂÂå¤Âè§Â度場æÂ¯æÂÂï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯è®ÂæÂ´æÂÂæÂÂè§Â度ã 10 æÂÂæÂ¾æÂ§å¶æÂÂéµ î æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂç¹¼çºÂæÂÂæÂ¾ã î æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂ¢æÂÂæÂ¾ ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以æÂ î 繼çºÂæÂÂæÂ¾ï¼ ã î æÂÂä¸Âå¯æÂ«åÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次å³å¯éÂÂæÂ°éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ã î @î æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂî¿快è½ÂæÂÂæÂÂã î @î æÂÂä¸Âå¯跳å°ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç« ç¯Âî¿æÂ²ç®ã î / î @î / î ç¨æÂ¼æ ¢åÂÂä½Âæ ¼éÂÂ梯å¼Âæ ¼æÂ¾ã 11 ZOOM æÂÂä¸Âå¯å¨æÂÂæÂ¾éÂÂæ Âå½±åÂÂæÂÂ縮æÂ¾ç«é¢ã 12 DISP æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示è³Âè¨Âã 13 æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµ ç¨æÂ¼è¼¸å ¥æ¨Âé¡ÂãÂÂç« ç¯ÂæÂÂæÂ²ç®編èÂÂçÂÂã ENTER æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂé¸頠æÂÂå·è¡ÂæÂÂ令ã CLEAR æÂÂä¸Âå¯渠é¤輸堥çÂÂæÂ¸åÂÂçÂÂã 14 PLAY MODE æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾æ¨¡å¼ ï¼Âä¾Âå¦ÂéÂÂæÂÂï¼ ã 15 VIDEO ADJ æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示 ãÂÂ調æÂ´è¦Âè¨ÂãÂÂç«é¢ã SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 3 6 8 4 1 7 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP RECEIVER CTRL TV î î PAGE 5 2 BD 1/2 BD 2/2 ENTER CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 PLAY MODE VIDEO ADJ DISP DISP ZOOM î î î î îÂÂî îÂÂ/î îÂÂ/î î 9 10 13 11 12 14 15 12 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 18 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 19 ChH æÂÂä½Âå Âé DVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ 1 î SOURCE å° DVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨çÂÂ黿ºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ã 2 PAGE </> æ¶²æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢顯示å¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂé Â颿ÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂé Âé¢ã 3 TOP MENU æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示 DVD-Video ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂæÂÂä¸Â層é¸å®ã 4 MENU 顯示 DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ï¼ÂæÂŒÂÂè½è¦Âç¢ÂçÂÂèÂÂç°ï¼ÂèÂÂä¸Âå¯è½顯示 ç¸åÂÂç ãÂÂæÂÂä¸Â層é¸å®ã ã 5 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Â游æ¨ÂæÂÂéÂ括Âå ENTER å¨è¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨移åÂÂ游æ¨Âã æÂÂ丠ENTER 鏿ÂÂç®åÂÂçÂÂé¸å®é¸ é  ã 6 HOME MENU 顯示î¿éÂÂåºè¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½é¸å®ã 7 RETURN Ã¥ÂÂå°åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示çÂÂé¸å®ç«é¢ã 液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ 8 ( AUDIO ) æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂè²éÂÂæÂÂèªÂè¨Âã ( SUBTITLE ) æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂçÂÂ顯示ã ( ANGLE ) æÂÂæÂ¾ DVD-Video å½±çÂÂçÂÂå¤Âè§Â度場æÂ¯æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯è®ÂæÂ´ æÂÂæÂÂè§Â度ã 9 æÂÂæÂ¾æÂ§å¶æÂÂéµ î æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂç¹¼çºÂæÂÂæÂ¾ã î æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂ¢æÂÂæÂ¾ ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以æÂ î 繼çºÂæÂÂæÂ¾ï¼ ã î æÂÂä¸Âå¯æÂ«åÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次å³å¯éÂÂæÂ°éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ã î / î î @î / î î æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂÂå¿«è½ÂæÂÂæÂÂã åÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次å¯è®ÂæÂ´éÂÂ度ã æÂ«åÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä½Âå¯éÂÂå§Âæ ¢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ã åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂå¯以è®ÂæÂ´ æÂÂæÂ¾éÂÂ度ã æÂ«åÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¾Âå¾Âç§»åÂÂä¸Âæ ¼ã î / î æÂÂä¸Âå¯跳å°ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âî¿章ç¯Âî¿æÂ²ç®î¿ è³ÂæÂÂ夾ï¼ÂæÂÂ顯示ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸å®é Âé¢ã 10 ZOOM æÂÂä¸Âå¯å¨æÂÂæÂ¾éÂÂæ Âå½±åÂÂæÂÂ縮æÂ¾ç«é¢ã 11 DISP æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示è³Âè¨Âã 12 æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµ ç¨æÂ¼è¼¸å ¥æ¨Âé¡ÂãÂÂç« ç¯ÂæÂÂæÂ²ç®編èÂÂçÂÂã ENTER æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂé¸頠æÂÂå·è¡ÂæÂÂ令ã CLEAR æÂÂä¸Âå¯渠é¤輸堥çÂÂæÂ¸åÂÂçÂÂã 13 PLAY MODE æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾æ¨¡å¼ ï¼Âä¾Âå¦ÂéÂÂæÂÂï¼ ã SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 3 6 4 1 7 DISC NAV IGATOR SETUP RECEIVER CTRL TV î î PAGE 5 2 DVD 1/2 DVD 2/2 ENTER CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 PLAY MODE DISP DISP ZOOM î î îÂÂî î î / îÂÂî î / îÂÂî 8 10 11 13 11 9 12 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 19 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 20 ChH æÂÂä½Âå ÂéÂÂ硬碠/DVD éÂÂ影橠1 î SOURCE å°Â硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂçÂÂ黿ºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ã 2 PAGE </> æ¶²æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢顯示å¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂé Â颿ÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂé Âé¢ã 3 TOP MENU / DISC NAVIGATOR å¦ÂæÂÂå·²è¼Âå ¥ DVD-Video æÂÂæÂÂçµÂÃ¥ÂÂç DVD-R/-RW ï¼Âè¦Âè¨Âï¼ ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示æÂÂä¸Â層é¸å®æÂ ãÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂç«é¢ã 4 MENU å¦ÂæÂÂå·²è¼Âå ¥ DVD-Video ãÂÂæÂÂçµÂÃ¥ÂÂç DVD-R/-RW æÂÂæÂÂçµÂå ç DVD R/ RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示æÂÂä¸Â層é¸å®ã 5 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Â游æ¨ÂæÂÂéÂ括Âå ENTER ç¨æÂ¼å°Â覽æÂÂæÂÂè¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½é¸å®ã æÂÂ丠ENTER 鏿ÂÂç®åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½ çÂÂé¸頠ã 6 HOME MENU æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示 Home Menu ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以å¨堶ä¸Âå°Â覽éÂÂå½±æ©Âç æÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã 7 RETURN æÂÂä¸Âå¯è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âä¸Â層çÂÂè¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½é¸å®æÂÂ顯示ç«é¢ã 液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ 8 HDD æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂç¨æÂ¼éÂÂ製åÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾çÂÂ硬ç¢Âã DVD æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂç¨æÂ¼éÂÂ製åÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾ç DVD ã 9 æÂÂæÂ¾æÂ§å¶æÂÂéµ î æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ã î æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂ¢æÂÂæÂ¾ã î æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂ¢æÂÂæÂ¾æÂÂéÂÂ製ã î / î æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂÂå¿«è½ÂæÂÂæÂÂã åÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次å¯è®ÂæÂ´éÂÂ度ã î / î æÂÂä¸Âå¯跳å°ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âî¿章ç¯Âî¿æÂ²ç®î¿ è³ÂæÂÂ夾ï¼ÂæÂÂ顯示ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸å®é Âé¢ã î / î @î / î æÂ«åÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä½Âå¯éÂÂå§Âæ ¢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ã åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂå¯以è®ÂæÂ´ æÂÂæÂ¾éÂÂ度ã æÂ«åÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¾Âå¾Âç§»åÂÂä¸Âæ ¼ã 10 CM BACK ï¼Âè¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂ廣åÂÂï¼ åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂ漸å¾Âå¾Âè·³ç¶Âè¦Âè¨ÂæÂÂæÂ¾éÂÂç¨Âã CM SKIP ï¼ÂçÂ¥éÂÂ廣åÂÂï¼ åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂ漸å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂè·³ç¶Âè¦Âè¨ÂæÂÂæÂ¾éÂÂç¨Âã SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 3 6 4 1 7 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP RECEIVER CTRL TV î î PAGE 2 5 HDD/DVR 1/2 HDD/DVR 2/2 REC î îÂÂ/î î îÂÂ/î î î î îÂÂî î STOP REC INPUT DISP CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 CH - 13 14 11 16 17 9 10 12 8 HDD DVD CM BACK CM SKIP JUKE BO X 15 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 20 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 21 ChH 11 JUKEBOX æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂçÂÂé»Â屿©Âç«é¢ï¼Âå¨æÂ¤ç«é¢ ä¸Âå¯以å°Âè¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¾çÂÂ鳿¨Âè¤Â製å°硬ç¢Âä¸Âã 12 ( AUDIO ) æÂÂä¸Âå¯è®ÂæÂ´è²é³èªÂè¨ÂæÂÂè²éÂÂã ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¢éÂÂå½±æ©ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ ä¸Âå¯è®ÂæÂ´èª¿è«§å¨é³æÂÂãÂÂï¼ ( SUBTITLE ) æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示î¿è®ÂæÂ´å¤Â誠DVD-Video ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Â堧建çÂÂå å¹Âã ( ANGLE ) æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå¤Âè§Â度場æÂ¯çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¹ÂæÂÂæÂÂè§Â度ã 13 æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµ 使ç¨æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµé¸æÂÂæÂ²ç®î¿章ç¯Âî¿æ¨Âé¡ÂæÂÂ鏿ÂÂé »éÂÂç ã CLEAR æÂÂä¸Âå¯渠é¤任ä½Â輸堥çÂÂ堧容並éÂÂæÂ°è¼¸å ¥ã 14 CH /â æÂÂä¸Âå¯è®ÂæÂ´å §å»ºé»è¦Â調諧å¨çÂÂé »éÂÂã 15 INPUT æÂÂä¸Âå¯è®ÂæÂ´ç¨æÂ¼éÂÂ製çÂÂ硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©Â輸堥ã 16 DISP 顯示î¿è®ÂæÂ´é¡¯ç¤ºçÂÂè¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½è³Âè¨Âã 17 éÂÂ製æÂ§å¶æÂÂéµ î REC æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂå§ÂéÂÂ製ã åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂå¯以 30 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂçºåÂÂ段ä¾Âè¨Âå® éÂÂ製æÂÂéÂÂã STOP REC æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂ¢éÂÂ製ã è£Âå ¥éÂÂæÂ§å¨é»池1 æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨èÂÂé¢çÂÂé»池槽èÂÂã 2 è«Âä¾Âç §é»池槽堧çÂÂ極æÂ§æÂÂ示 ï¼ î @î @ï¼Âå°Âå ©é¡ AA/LR6 é¹¼æÂ§é»池æÂ¾å ¥é»池槽ä¸Âã 3 éÂÂä¸Âé»池èÂÂã 注æÂ ä½¿ç¨é¯誤çÂÂé»池å¯è½å¼Âèµ·å±éªï¼Âå¦Âæ¼Âæ¶²åÂÂçÂÂç¸ã 諠éµå®Â以ä¸ÂäºÂ頠@⢠è«Âå¿混åÂÂæÂ°èÂÂé»池使ç¨ã â¢ è«Âå¿混åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé»池使ç¨ â éÂÂç¶å¤Âè§Âé¡Âä¼¼ï¼Âä½Âä¸Âå çÂÂé»池å¯è½å«ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé»å£Âã â¢ è«Â確å®Âé»池çÂÂæÂ£è² å ©ç«¯èÂÂé»池槽ä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂ示ç¸符ã â¢ èÂ¥è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â使ç¨çÂÂæÂÂéÂÂè¶ éÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºé»池ã â¢ èÂÂçÂÂ廢èÂÂé»池æÂÂï¼Âè«Âéµå®ÂæÂ¿åºÂæ¢Âä¾ÂæÂÂé©ç¨æÂ¼è²´åÂÂæÂ å°åÂÂçÂÂç°å¢Â堬報æÂÂ令è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂã è¦å â¢ è«Âå¿å¨é½å Âç´å°ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»ÂéÂÂç±çÂÂå°æÂ¹ä½¿ç¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¾é»池@å¦Âè»Âå §æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂæÂÂã å¦åÂÂé»池å¯è½æ¼Âæ¶² ãÂÂçÂÂç¸æÂÂèµ·ç«ã åÂÂæÂÂä¹ÂæÂÂ縮çÂÂé»池çÂÂ壽彿ÂÂæÂÂè½ã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 21 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 22 ChH 使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨ 使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ è¨Âä½Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂäºÂ頠@⢠è«Â確å®ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨èÂÂè£Âç½®ä¸ÂçÂÂéÂÂæÂ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨éÂÂç¡é»ç¤Âç©ã â¢ èÂ¥æÂÂå¼·å ÂæÂÂè¢å ÂçÂÂç §å°Âå¨è£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæÂ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨ä¸Âï¼Âå å¯è½ç¡æ³Â使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§æÂÂä½Âã â¢ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨å¯è½æÂÂäºÂç¸干æÂ¾ã è«Âé¿å Âå¨æÂ¤è£ ç½®éÂÂè¿Â使ç¨堶ä»Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ã â¢ èÂ¥ç¼ç¾éÂÂæÂ§å¨å¨æÂÂä½Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂå §ç¡æ³ÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂæÂ´æÂÂé» æ± ã â¢ è«Âå¦Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示ï¼Âå¨顯示è£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæÂ§æÂÂæÂÂ卿ÂÂä½Âç¯Âå åÂÂæÂ¹ä½¿ç¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨ã æÂÂä½ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ é¨éÂÂçÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨é¤äºÂè½æÂ§å¶æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨å¤Âï¼ÂéÂÂå¯以 æÂ§å¶å ÂéÂÂçÂÂé»漿é»è¦Âã DVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ã Blu-ray Disc æÂÂæÂ¾æ© åÂÂ硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Âç¢åÂÂã èÂ¥è¦ÂæÂÂä½ÂéÂÂäºÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示è£Âç½®ã æÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ ⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示 RECEIVER ç«é¢ã RECEIVER ç«é¢顯示å¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨çÂÂæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Âä¸Âï¼ÂèÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæÂ§ å¨åÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶ãÂÂ模å¼Âã é¸æÂÂèÂÂæÂÂä½Âä¾ÂæºÂè¨Âå 1 æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã æÂÂ鏿ÂÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¹è®Âï¼ÂèÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨çÂÂæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Âè®ÂæÂÂ該é©ç¨ è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂ§å¶ç«é¢ã â¢ èÂ¥è¦Â鏿ÂÂç¨æÂ¼ Digital 1 ã Digital 2 ã Analog ã Front Audio In æÂ iPod çÂÂ輸堥ï¼Âè«ÂæÂ LINE æÂÂéµ@ç´å°æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½顯示å¨顯示è£Âç½®ä¸ÂçºæÂ¢ã 2 é¸æÂ HDMI 1 è³ HDMI 3 æÂ LINE æÂÂï¼Âé¸åÂÂæÂ¨æÂ£å¨使 ç¨çÂÂ輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂã 液æÂ¶è¢å¹Âè®ÂæÂÂæÂÂ鏿ÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂ§å¶ç«é¢ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ¨å¯以æÂÂä½ æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ æÂ¾ä¸Âå°æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂ鳿ºÂï¼ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ¯å ÂéÂÂ製é çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼ æÂÂ丠RCV è®ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨é²堥 ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶ãÂÂ模å¼Âã æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂ輸堥 ä¿ÂæÂÂä¸Âè®Âã åÂÂ註 èÂ¥è¦Âå¨éÂÂéÂÂæÂ¬æ©ÂèÂÂè½ä¾Âèªé£æÂ¥è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂæÂÂæÂ«æÂÂæÂ§ å¶æÂ¥æÂ¶ï¼Âè«ÂæÂ RCV ã æÂÂ鏿ÂÂçÂÂ輸堥ä¸ÂæÂÂæÂ¹è®Âï¼Âä½Âé æÂ§å¨è®ÂæÂ´çº ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶ãÂÂ模å¼Âã èÂ¥è¦Âè¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä½Â模 å¼Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次 RCV ã 使ç¨液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ æ¶²æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢æÂ¯å¦æÂÂå¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂè³Âè¨Âé Âé¢è¦ÂæÂ¨æÂÂä½ÂçÂÂé£æÂ¥è¨Âå é¡Âå ï¼Âä¾Â妠DVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ï¼ÂèÂÂå®Âã æÂ¨è¦ÂæÂ§å¶çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂªé¡¯ 示æÂÂï¼ÂæÂ PAGE æÂ²åÂÂè³æÂ¨è¦ÂæÂ§å¶çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¨çÂÂé Âé¢ã â¢ è¶ é 10 ç§Âæ²ÂæÂÂå·è¡Âä»»ä½ÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂï¼Â顯示å¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨ä¸Âç 液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢æÂÂèªåÂÂéÂÂéÂÂã èÂ¥è¦Â使æÂ¤ç«é¢åÂÂ次顯示@è«Â觸碰éÂÂæÂ§å¨çÂÂæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹ÂæÂÂæÂÂä»»ä½ÂæÂÂéµã 7 m 30 30 RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR HDMI 12 3 TV FM /AM LINE EXIT BD DVD HDD/ DVR EXIT BD DVD HDD/ DVR TV HDMI 輸堥 LINE 輸堥 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 22 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂä½ 04 23 ChH 第 4 ç« éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂä½ éÂÂ覠⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨è¨Âå®ÂçºæÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ çÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æÂ§å¶模张ï¼Â確å®Âæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Â顯示以ä¸ÂæÂÂ示ç RECEIVER ç«é¢@ã 使ç¨ ãÂÂèªå MCACC ãÂÂè¨Âå®Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ç° ç¹Âé³æÂ å¤Âè²éÂÂé³場èªåÂÂè£ÂæÂ£ ï¼ MCACC ï¼Â系統å¯測éÂÂèÂÂè½åÂÂå 堧çÂÂé³場ç¹æÂ§ï¼Âå°Âé±éÂÂç°å¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂé³ç´Âå ¥èÂÂéÂÂï¼Â並測試è² éÂÂå»¶é²èÂÂè²éÂÂé³éÂÂã å®ÂæÂÂ系統éÂÂè´ÂçÂÂ麥å Â風è¨Âå®Âå¾Âï¼Âç³» çµ±å°ÂæÂÂå©ç¨ä¸Âç³»åÂÂçÂÂ測試é³è³Âè¨Â測éÂÂé§Âæ³¢èÂÂè¿´é¿ï¼Â使ç¹ å®ÂæÂ¿éÂÂå §çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®Âå¼èÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂ ï¼ MCACC æÂÂæÂÂï¼ éÂÂæÂÂä½³åÂÂã 1 éÂÂ覠â¢ ç¨æÂ¼èªå MCACC è¨Âå®ÂçÂÂ測試é³é³éÂÂ極大 ï¼ ä½Âè«Âå¿å¨ è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂå°Âé³éÂÂè½Âå°Âï¼Âå¦åÂÂå¯è½ç¡æ³ÂéÂÂå°æÂÂä½³è¨Âå® çÂÂæ Âã â¢ è«Âå¿å¨ MCACC è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂç§»åÂÂ麥å Â風èÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ã 1 å°Â麥å Â風é£æÂ¥è³顯示è£Âç½®èÂÂé¢ç MCACC SETUP MIC æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 è«Âå°Â麥å Â風置æÂ¼æÂ£å¸¸çÂÂèÂÂè½ä½Âç½®ã è«ÂæÂ¾å¨è³æÂ悮Â度ï¼Â並使ç¨æ¡Â椠確ä¿Â麥å Â風ä¿ÂæÂÂ水平你置ã è«Â確å®Â麥å Â風èÂÂæÂÂè²å¨éÂÂç¡éÂÂç¤Âç©ã 3 èÂ¥æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨éÂÂéÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂ丠î RECEIVER å°Â堶黿ºÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 4 æÂÂ丠MCACC ã æÂÂ丠MCACC å¾Âï¼Âè«Âç¡å¯è½ä¿ÂæÂÂå®ÂéÂÂã é³éÂÂå°ÂæÂÂèªåÂÂ讠大ï¼Â系統æÂÂ輸åºä¸Âé£串çÂÂ測試é³ã â¢ èÂ¥è¦Âå¨å®ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âèªå MCACC è¨Âå® ï¼ æÂÂ丠MCACC ã è£Âç½®å°ÂæÂÂç¹¼çºÂ使ç¨ä¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ã â¢ èÂ¥é±éÂÂçÂÂéÂÂé³éÂÂå¤Âï¼ Noisy! ï¼ÂéÂÂé³太大@å°ÂæÂÂå¨顯 示å¹Âä¸ÂæÂÂçºÂéÂÂçÂÂäºÂç§Âã èÂ¥è¦ÂçµÂæÂÂ並檢æÂ¥éÂÂé³çÂÂç´ 2 ï¼ æÂÂ丠MCACC æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ試ä¸Â次ï¼Â顯示å¹Âä¸Â顯示 Retry æÂÂï¼ æÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ è¥顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ Error MIC! ï¼Â麥å Â風ç¼çÂÂé¯誤ï¼Âï¼ æÂ Error Speaker! ï¼ÂæÂÂè²å¨ç¼çÂÂé¯誤ï¼Âï¼ è¨ÂæÂ¯ï¼Âå 表示麥å Â風æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂé£æÂ¥å¯è½åºç¾åÂÂé¡Âã èÂ¥è¦Âé 試ï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 3 ã MCACC è¨Âå®Âå®ÂæÂÂå¾Âï¼Âé³éÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæÂ¢å¾©çºæÂ£å¸¸é³éÂÂï¼Â顯示 å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ Complete 4 並åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé³場èªåÂÂè£ÂæÂ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã 5 ⢠å®ÂæÂ ãÂÂèªå MCACC ãÂÂè¨Âå®ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ å°Â麥å Â風å¾ÂæÂ¬æ© ä¸ÂæÂÂä¸Âã éÂÂ註 1 æÂ¨åªéÂÂé²è¡Âä¸Â次èªå MCACC è¨Âå® ï¼Âé¤éÂÂæÂ¨è®ÂæÂ´æÂÂè²å¨æÂºè¨ÂæÂÂæÂ¿éÂÂä½Â置@ã RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR 2 ⢠èÂ¥æÂ¿éÂÂçÂÂç°å¢Âä¸Âé©åÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂèªå MCACC è¨Âå® ï¼Âé±éÂÂéÂÂé³éÂÂå¤ÂãÂÂçÂÂå£Âè¿´é³ãÂÂå«é»ç¤ÂæÂÂè²å¨èÂÂ麥å Â風çÂÂç©é«Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¾ÂçÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼å¯è½æÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯ 誤ã è«Â檢æÂ¥å¯è½影é¿室堧ç°å¢ÂçÂÂå®¶éÂȍ¨å ï¼Âå·氣æ©ÂãÂÂå°箱ãÂÂéÂȾÂÂçÂÂï¼Âï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂå¿ è¦Âï¼Âè«ÂéÂÂéÂÂ堶黿ºÂã â¢ é¨åÂÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âå¯è½æÂÂèÂÂ麥å Â風äºÂç¸ç¢çÂÂå¹²æÂ¾ã èÂ¥ç¼çÂÂæÂ¤æÂ å½¢ï¼Âè«Âå¨èªå MCACC è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã 3 èÂ¥ä»Âç¡æ³Â解決åÂÂé¡Âï¼ÂæÂÂ丠MCACC ãÂÂéÂÂéÂÂ黿ºÂï¼Â並根æÂ Error è¨ÂæÂ¯æª¢æÂ¥åÂÂé¡Âï¼Âç¶å¾ÂéÂÂ試èªå MCACC è¨Âå®Âã 4 èÂ¥æÂªé¡¯ç¤º Complete ï¼Âå¾Âå¯è½å¨è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯誤ã è«Â檢æÂ¥æÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·Â並åÂÂ試ä¸Â次ã 5 è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 27 é Âä¸ÂçÂʊȴ MCACC æÂÂæÂÂèÂÂè½ 以éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿éÂÂé MCACC æÂÂæÂÂã RECEIVER î MCACC HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 23 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
èÂÂè½æÂ¨çÂÂ系統輸åºçÂÂé³æÂ 05 24 ChH 第 5 ç« èÂÂè½æÂ¨çÂÂ系統輸åºçÂÂé³æÂ éÂÂ覠⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨è¨Âå®ÂçºæÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ çÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æÂ§å¶模张ï¼Â確å®Âæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Â顯示以ä¸ÂæÂÂ示ç RECEIVER ç«é¢@ã æÂÂæÂÂè²é³ ï¼Âé©ç¨æÂ¼æÂÂä½³è²é³@æÂÂæÂÂè²é³模å¼ÂèÂÂç±æÂ¬æ©ÂæÂÂä¾ÂçÂÂç¹æ®Âå½¢çÂÂé«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ質æÂÂè²å¨@帶ä¾Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå°Â極è´çÂÂå½±çÂÂèÂÂ鳿¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé³é«Âé©ÂèÂÂè¨Âè¨ÂçÂÂå Âé ç¨家å°ÂæÂÂ鳿ÂÂæÂÂè¡Âã å¨ä¸Âè¾ æ³Âä¸ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²é³模å¼Âï¼Â使æÂ¬æ©Âç¼æÂ®æÂÂ大çÂÂå è½ã â¢ å°Â話å¢Âå¼· å½±çÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂ渠æÂ°å°Â話ï¼ÂèÂÂèÂÂæÂ¯è²é³ç¸è¼Âä¹Âä¸ÂæÂ´é¡¯çªÂåºã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂå£Â縮 éÂÂç¾æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨éÂÂéÂÂé³影é¿çÂÂç´°é¨è²é³ï¼Â建ç«Âè®ÂæÂ¨æÂÂ覺 身æÂ·å ¶å¢ÂçÂÂè²é³ç°å¢Âã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè²éÂÂ平衡èÂÂè²éÂÂæ··å ç±æÂ¼é¨éÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂæÂ¹åÂÂç¶ÂéÂÂç¹åÂ¥è¨Âè¨Âï¼Âå æÂ¤ä»¥ç¹殠æÂ¹å¼Â縮混åÂÂ平衡è²éÂÂã æÂ¤å¤Âï¼ÂæÂ¬æ©Âä¹Âæ ¹æÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾çÂÂå § 容éÂÂå°æÂÂ佳平衡ã â¢ é »çÂÂç¹æÂ§ä¿®æÂ£ é¤äºÂé¨éÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂæÂ°å¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½å¤Âï¼Â實ç¾çºäºÂé·æÂÂéÂÂè è½èÂÂæÂÂä½³åÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾ç¹æÂ§ã â¢ 以ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæÂ¾çÂÂç«Âé«Âè² ç±åÂÂè²éÂÂ輸åº人è²æÂÂï¼Âå¾Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨輸åºé³æÂÂã æÂ¨å¯以æÂÂæÂ¾ä¾Â妠CD çÂÂç¡縫ãÂÂèÂÂé©çÂÂç°ç¹Âç«Âé«Âè²é³ æºÂãÂÂå¨èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ç«Âé«Âè²ç«ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼Âå¯使ç¨ æÂ¤æÂÂæÂ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ說æÂÂï¼ ã ä¾Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä½Âå¯以éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²é³模张ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç´æÂ¥æ¨¡å¼Â@@⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂç´æÂ¥è²é³ã ã æÂÂä¸ÂæÂ¤æÂÂéµåÂÂæÂ ãÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²é³ãÂÂå ãÂÂç´æÂ¥è²é³ã ã â¢ é¸æÂ ãÂÂç´æÂ¥è²é³ãÂÂæÂÂï¼ DIRECT æÂÂ示çÂÂ亮起ã èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模张èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼ÂæÂ¯èÂÂè½系統æÂ§å¶任ä½Âä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂæÂÂç°¡å®æÂ¹å¼Âï¼ æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂ輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ åºä¾ÂæºÂè³ÂæÂÂçÂÂè²éÂÂã èÂ¥æÂ¨å°Â系統è¨Âå®ÂçºåÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ï¼Â第 6 é Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå ´åÂÂç°繠è²模å¼Âå°ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂ輸åºçµÂæÂ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 26 é Âï¼ ã â¢ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂ Auto èÂÂè½模å¼Âã 以ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂèÂÂè½ æÂ¨å¯以å¨ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂä¸Âï¼ÂèÂÂè½ç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂã ç°繠鳿ÂÂæÂ¯ä»¥åÂÂèª使ç¨堶ä¸Âä¸Â種 Dolby Pro Logic æÂ DTS Neo:6 解碼模å¼ÂçÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é³æºÂæÂÂç¢çÂÂã 1 èÂ¥æÂ¨å°Â系統è¨Âå®ÂçºåÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ï¼Â第 6 é Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå ´åÂÂç°繠è²模å¼Âå°ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂ輸åºçµÂæÂ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 26 é Âï¼ ã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂä»»ä¸ÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âã 顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾çÂÂé¸頠è¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¾çÂÂä¾ÂæºÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR éÂÂ註 1 å¨é©ç¶解碼ç± DTS-ES Ã¥ÂÂç¾ç 6.1/7.1 è²éÂÂ鳿ÂÂå¾Âç°ç¹Âè²è¨ÂèÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå§ÂèÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°ç¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½輸åºçµÂÃ¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè²è¨ÂèÂÂçÂÂå¾Âç°ç¹Âè²è¨ÂèÂÂã 2 æÂÂæÂ¾ DTS-HD ã DTS-Express æÂ Dolby TrueHD ï¼ 176.4 kHz/192 kHz ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âç¡æ³Â鏿ÂÂèªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç«Âé«Âè²以å¤ÂçÂÂ模å¼Âã æÂ¤å¤Âï¼ÂæÂ¨ç¡æ³Â鏿ÂÂ使ç¨æÂ¼ Dolby Digital Plus æÂ Dolby TrueHD ï¼Âä½ÂæÂ¼ 96 kHz ï¼Âç DTS Neo:6 ã DIRECT SURR SURR HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 24 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
èÂÂè½æÂ¨çÂÂ系統輸åºçÂÂé³æÂ 05 25 ChH æÂÂé ÂéÂÂè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¨å¯以鏿ÂÂ@⢠Auto ï¼ÂèªåÂÂèÂÂè½模张ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 24 é Â@⢠2 PL II Movie ï¼ Dolby Pro Logic II Movie ï¼Âï¼ 5.1 è²é ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂï¼Âç¹åÂ¥é©åÂÂå½±çÂÂä¾Â溠⢠2 PL II Music ï¼ Dolby Pro Logic II Music ï¼Âï¼ 5.1 è²é ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂï¼Âç¹åÂ¥é©åÂÂ鳿¨Âä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± ä¸ÂæÂÂç Dolby Pro Logic II Music è¨Âå®Âå¼ â¢ 2 PL II Game ï¼ Dolby Pro Logic II Game ï¼Âï¼ 5.1 è²é ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂï¼Âç¹åÂ¥é©åÂÂé»è¦ÂéÂÂæÂ² ⢠2 Pro Logic ï¼ Dolby Pro Logic ï¼Âï¼ 4.1 è²éÂÂç°ç¹Âé³ æÂÂï¼Âé©ç¨æÂ¼éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾Â溠⢠Neo:6 Cinema ï¼ 6.1 è²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âç¹åÂ¥é©åÂÂå½±çÂÂä¾Â溠⢠Neo:6 Music ï¼ 6.1 è²éÂÂé³æÂ ï¼ ç¹åÂ¥é©åÂÂ鳿¨ÂçÂÂä¾Â溠@è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± ä¸ÂæÂÂç ä¸Â央影åÂÂè¨Â宠⢠Stereo ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 26 é Âä¸Âç 以ç«Âé«Âè²èÂÂè½ æÂÂé Âå¤Âè²éÂÂ鳿ºÂæÂ ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以é¸æÂ ï¼Âä¾Âæ ¼å¼Â@@⢠Auto ï¼ÂèªåÂÂèÂÂè½模张ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 24 é Â@⢠StandardDecode ï¼Â以 Dolby Digital æÂ DTS ç°ç¹Âè²解 碼èÂÂè½ã æÂÂæÂ¾æÂÂæÂÂæ¨ÂæºÂ解碼å¨ç Dolby Digital ã DTS å¤Âè²é PCM çÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂ鳿ºÂã â¢ Stereo ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 26 é Âä¸Âç 以ç«Âé«Âè²èÂÂè½ Dolby Pro Logic II Music è¨Âå®Âå¼ 以 Dolby Pro Logic II Music 模张ï¼Âå¦Âä¸Âè¿°ï¼ÂèÂÂè½æÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨ å¯調æÂ´ä¸Â種è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âä¸Â置寬度ãÂÂ尺寸åÂÂå ¨æÂ¯ã 1 å¨åÂÂç¨ Dolby Pro Logic II Music 模å¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸Âã 2 é¸æÂ ã Center Width ã ã ã Dimension ãÂÂæÂ ã Panorama ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ Center Width 1 ï¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂæ··é³æÂÂæÂÂï¼Âå° å³åÂÂèÂÂå·¦åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂä¸Â央è²éÂÂæÂ´æÂ£åºä¾Âï¼Âé³åÂÂè½起 ä¾ÂæÂ´å»£ ï¼Âè¼Âé«Âè¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂ´çª ï¼Âè¼Âä½Âè¨Âå®Âå¼@ã â¢ Dimension ï¼Âç±åÂÂèÂÂå¾Â調æÂ´ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂ平衡çÂÂ深度@使è²é³è½起ä¾ÂæÂ´é ï¼Âè² è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂ´è¿ ï¼ÂæÂ£è¨Âå® å¼@ã â¢ Panorama ï¼Âå¯å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®ç«Âé«Âè²é³åÂÂ延伸 ï¼Â使ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè² å¨ç¢çÂÂæÂ´ ãÂÂå ¨é¢ãÂÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂã 3 調æÂ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã ä¸Â央影åÂÂè¨Âå® å¨ Neo:6 Music 模å¼Âä¸ÂèÂÂè½éÂÂè²éÂÂ鳿ºÂæÂ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 24 é Âï¼ ï¼ÂæÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以調æÂ´ä¸Â央影åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂã 調æÂ´ä¸Â央影åÂÂï¼Â以人è²建ç«ÂæÂ´å¯¬å»£çÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂæÂÂã 2 1 å¨åÂÂç¨ Neo:6 Music 模å¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸Âã 2 é¸æÂ ã Center Image ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 調æÂ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ 調æÂ´å¾ 0 ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂå³éÂÂå°å³åÂÂç½®èÂÂå·¦åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂä¸Â央 è²éÂÂï¼Âå° 10 ï¼Âå å³éÂÂå°ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂä¸Â央è²éÂÂï¼Âç æÂÂæÂÂã 使ç¨ ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé©ç¨æÂ¼ä»»ä½Âå¤Âè²éÂÂæÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é³æºÂï¼ æÂÂä¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂ種å¤Â樣çÂÂç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã éÂÂäºÂ模å¼ÂæÂ¯ä»¥ä½¿ç¨第 6 é Â丠æÂÂè¿°çÂÂæ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âå®ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³èÂÂè½æÂÂæÂÂèÂÂè¨Âè¨Âã â¢ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂ ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂ模å¼Âã é¸æÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ模å¼ÂæÂÂï¼ ADV.SURR. æÂÂ示çÂÂ亮起ã æÂ¨ç¡泠åÂÂæÂÂé©ç¨æÂ¼æÂÂäºÂé³è¨ÂæµÂçÂÂ模å¼Âã 3 Ã¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂ@⢠Action ï¼ÂéÂÂå°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ Âé³è»ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä½ÂçÂÂèÂÂè¨Â訠⢠Drama ï¼ÂéÂÂå°ÂæÂÂå¾Âå¤Âå°Â話çÂÂå½±çÂÂèÂÂè¨Â訠⢠Sci-Fi ï¼ÂéÂÂå°ÂæÂÂå¾Âå¤Âç¹æÂÂçÂÂç§Âå¹»çÂÂèÂÂè¨Â訠⢠Mono Film ï¼Â建ç«Âä¾Âèªå®è²éÂÂé³è»ÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè² éÂÂ註 1 ç±æÂ¼æÂÂ¢åÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂéÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨系統ï¼Âå æÂ¤æÂ£å¸¸ä¾Â說æÂ¨æÂÂ該使ç¨ C.Width 3 è¨Âå®Âã SOUND ENTER 2 ç±æÂ¼æÂÂ¢åÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂéÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨系統ï¼Âå æÂ¤æÂ£å¸¸ä¾Â說æÂ¨æÂÂ該使ç¨ C.Image 3 è¨Âå®Âã 3 æÂ¨ç¡æ³Âå°ÂæÂ¤åÂÂè½使ç¨æÂ¼ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé³è¨ÂæµÂ@⢠Dolby TrueHD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz ⢠DTS-HD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz æÂÂæÂÂæÂ 2/0 çÂÂè²éÂÂ格张⢠DTS-Express ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂ 2/0 çÂÂè²éÂÂ格张ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER ADV SURR HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 25 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
èÂÂè½æÂ¨çÂÂ系統輸åºçÂÂé³æÂ 05 26 ChH ⢠Ent.Show ï¼Âé©ç¨æÂ¼é³æ¨Âé³溠⢠Expanded ï¼Âåµé ç¹寬çÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é³場 ⢠TV Surround ï¼Âçºå®é³åÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é»è¦Âä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂä¾Âç°ç¹Âè² â¢ Advanced Game ï¼Âé©ç¨æÂ¼é»è¦ÂéÂÂæÂ² ⢠Sports ï¼Âé©åÂÂç¨æÂ¼è§Âè³Âé«Âè²ç¯Âç® â¢ Classical ï¼ÂæÂÂä¾Â大åÂÂ鳿¨Â廳çÂÂé³æÂ â¢ Rock/Pop ï¼Âåµé é©åÂÂæÂÂ滾æ¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿æÂÂæµÂè¡Âæ¨ÂçÂÂç¾場漠å¥Âé³æÂ â¢ Unplugged ï¼Âé©ç¨æÂ¼è²æ¨Âé³溠⢠Ext.Stereo ï¼Â使ç¨æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çºç«Âé«Âè²é³æºÂæÂÂä¾Âå¤Âè² éÂÂè²é³ 使ç¨åÂÂå ´åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模张å¦Â第 6 é  æÂÂ述使ç¨åÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂï¼Âå¯以使ç¨ ãÂÂå 場åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂ模å¼Âã â¢ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå ´åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âã F.S.SURR æÂÂ示çÂÂ亮起ã åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂ Focus 5.1ch ã Wide 5.1ch æÂ Extra Power ã æÂ¨ç¡æ³ÂçºæÂÂäºÂé³è¨ÂæµÂé¸æÂ ãÂÂé¡Âå¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂãÂÂ以å¤Âç 模å¼Âã 1 ⢠Focus 5.1ch ï¼Âç¨æÂ¼æÂÂä¾Âå¼Âå°Âå°左å´èÂÂå³å´æÂÂè²å¨ç è²é³æÂÂå°ÂèÂÂéÂÂä¸Â央åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè±Âå¯Âç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã â¢ Wide 5.1ch ï¼Âç¨æÂ¼æÂÂä¾Â毠Focus 5.1ch 模å¼Âé³åÂÂæÂ´å¯¬ 廣çÂÂç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã â¢ Extra Power ï¼Âå¾Âç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨輸åºç«Âé«Âè² ï¼Âå¤Âè²é é³æºÂãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âæ··åÂÂç«Âé«Âè²ï¼Â以æÂÂä¾Â強大çÂÂç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã 以ç«Âé«Âè²èÂÂè½ æÂ¨å¯以使ç¨ç«Âé«Âè²è½åÂÂä»»ä½Âä¾Â溠â ç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂã æÂ æÂ¾å¤Âè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²éÂÂç¶ÂéÂÂ縮混å¾Âå³éÂÂå°左åÂÂç½®î¿ å³åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨åÂÂéÂÂä½Âé³ä¸Âã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âï¼Âç´å°顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ STEREO ã é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂ模张åªæÂÂå¨æÂ¬æ©Âé£æÂ¥è³ HDMI Control ç¸容å ÂéÂÂ硬碠/DVD é 影æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂ使ç¨ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½æÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨æÂÂè½éÂÂç¨é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ¥ Ã¥ÂÂ模å¼Âå°ÂèÂÂè½模å¼ÂèªåÂÂè®ÂæÂ´çºæÂÂ符åÂÂéÂÂå½±æ©ÂæÂÂæÂ¾å §å®¹ä¹ é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âã â¢ å° HDMI Mode è¨Âå®Âçº AMP Mode ï¼Â第 36 é Âï¼ ã â¢ å¨èÂÂè½ä¾ÂèªéÂÂé³å¨çÂÂåªÂé«Â堧容æÂÂæÂÂä¸Âã é¸æÂÂæÂÂé©ç¶çÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼Â並顯示å¨顯示ç«é¢ä¸Âã ç¡æ³Âå¤æÂ· ç¸éÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âå¯è½顯示 No Genre æÂ CanâÂÂt use ï¼ÂèÂÂä¸Âè è½模å¼Âç¶ÂæÂÂä¸Âè®Âã æÂÂ示 ⢠主è¦ÂæÂÂé Âé»Â屿©Âå MP3 ä¾ÂæºÂ使ç¨ã â¢ èÂ¥è¦Â使ç¨æÂ¤åÂÂè½ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¿ é ÂæÂÂéÂÂé HDMI é£æÂ¥ç HDMI Control ç¸容å ÂéÂÂ硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©Âï¼Â並ä¸Âå° HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½è¨Âå®Âçº ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã ã 使ç¨ ãÂÂè²é³修æÂ£å¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ èÂ¥å¨ MP3 æÂ WMA å£Â縮éÂÂç¨Âä¸Âç§»é¤é³æÂÂè³ÂæÂÂï¼Âè²é³åÂÂ質 éÂÂ常æÂÂåºç¾ä¸Âå¹³åÂÂçÂÂé³åÂÂã ãÂÂè²é³修æÂ£å¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½æÂ¡ç¨æÂ° ç DSP æÂÂè¡Âï¼Âå¯èÂÂç±éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè²å£ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¿®æÂ´å£Â縮å¾ÂçÂÂ人工缺 é·ï¼Âå° CD çÂÂ鳿ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質æÂ¢å¾©è³å£Â縮çÂÂéÂÂè²éÂÂ鳿ÂÂã â¢ å¨èÂÂè½ç«Âé«Âè²é³æºÂæÂÂæÂÂ丠2 ã åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯å¨以ä¸Âå ©é  åÂÂè½éÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ@⢠Retriever On â éÂÂå ãÂÂè²é³修æÂ£å¨ã ã â¢ Retriever Off â éÂÂé ãÂÂè²é³修æÂ£å¨ã ã éÂÂ註 1 æÂ¨ç¡æ³Âå°ÂæÂ¤åÂÂè½使ç¨æÂ¼ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé³è¨ÂæµÂ@⢠Dolby TrueHD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz ⢠DTS-HD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz æÂÂæÂÂæÂ 2/0 çÂÂè²éÂÂ格张⢠DTS-Express ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂ 2/0 çÂÂè²éÂÂ格张F.S. SURR SURR 2 æÂ¤è¨Âå®Âç¡æ³ÂæÂÂé Âå¤Âè²éÂÂ鳿ºÂ使ç¨ã æÂ¤å¤Âï¼ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¯æÂÂé  SACD ã DTS-HD ã DTS-Express ã Dolby TrueHD ã Dolby Digital Plus å PCM ï¼ 192 kHz/176.4 kHz ï¼ ï¼ çÂÂè³ç¡æ³Â使ç¨ç«Âé«Âè²é³æºÂã GENRE SOUND RTRV HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 26 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
èÂÂè½æÂ¨çÂÂ系統輸åºçÂÂé³æÂ 05 27 ChH 以 MCACC æÂÂæÂÂèÂÂè½ 使ç¨以 MCACC Ã¥ÂÂå¾ÂçÂÂä¿®æÂ£é³場è¨Âå®ÂèÂÂè½è²é³ã 1 æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ鳿ÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã MCACC Effect ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã MCACC On ãÂÂæÂ ã MCACC Off ãÂÂï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ ç¶ MCACC Effect éÂÂéÂÂæÂ ï¼ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂè²éÂÂå»¶é²ãÂÂè²éÂÂä½ æºÂÃ¥ÂÂé§Âæ³¢ä¹ÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂã â¢ MCACC Effect éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ§å¶è²éÂÂå»¶é²å è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂï¼ MCACC Effect éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ å²åÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ã â¢ ã MCACC æÂÂæÂÂãÂÂå¨使ç¨ ãÂÂèªå MCACC è¨Âå®ÂãÂÂå¾Âèª Ã¥ÂÂè¨Âå®ÂçºéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 使ç¨ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âã ã ãÂÂé¿度ãÂÂå ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂè è½模张ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤ÂãÂÂèÂÂè½åÂÂè½å¯è®ÂæÂ¨ä»¥ä½Âé³éÂÂæÂ¶è½實éÂÂçÂÂç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã 使ç¨ ãÂÂé¿度èÂÂè½ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½å¯以å¨ä½Âé³éÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âä¾Âèªé³樠鳿ºÂçÂÂè¯好ä½Âé³èÂÂé«Âé³ã ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂèÂÂè½åÂÂè½å¯éÂÂä½Â鳿ºÂä¸ÂéÂÂéÂÂçÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂé«Âé³ã 1 æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ鳿ÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã Tone ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 1 3 é¸æÂ ã Midnight ã ãÂÂã Loudness ãÂÂæÂ ã Quiet ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ ENTER 以確èªÂã 2 ⢠èÂ¥è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âã ã ãÂÂé¿度ãÂÂå ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âï¼ è«Âé¸æÂ Bass/Treble ã 調æÂ´ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³ 使ç¨ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³æÂ§å¶調æÂ´æÂ´é«Âé³調ã 1 æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ鳿ÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã Tone ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 1 3 é¸æÂ ã Bass/Treble ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ ENTER ã â¢ é¸æÂ Bass/Treble 以åÂÂæ¶ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âã ã ãÂÂé¿度ãÂÂå ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âã æÂ¨ç¡æ³ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂäºÂ模å¼Âã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î æÂÂéµ ï¼ é¸æÂ ã Bass ãÂÂæÂÂã Treble ã ã 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î æÂÂéµ調æÂ´é³æÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³çÂÂ調æÂ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨ -6dB è³ 6dB ä¹ÂéÂÂã â¢ ä½Â鳿ÂÂé«Âé³è¨Âå®Âå¨ 0dB 以å¤ÂæÂÂï¼ TONE æÂÂ示çÂÂ亮起 ã 調æÂ´è²é³延é² æÂÂäºÂ顯示å¨å¨æÂÂæÂ¾è¦Âè¨ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂç¨Âå¾®çÂÂå»¶é²ï¼Âå æÂ¤é³è»ÂæÂ èÂÂç«é¢ç¨Âå¾®æ²ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥ã æÂ°å¢Âä¸Âé»Âå»¶é²å¯以調æÂ´è²é³ï¼Â使 è²é³çÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾ç¬¦åÂÂç«é¢çÂÂ顯示ã æÂ¨å¯以調æÂ´çÂÂéÂÂé ï¼Âä½ÂæºÂï¼Âå ±æÂ 60 Ã¥ÂÂï¼Â總ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¯ 200 msec ã 1 æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ鳿ÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã Sound Delay ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 鏿ÂÂè²é³çÂÂå»¶é²é·度ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂå¨ HDMI è¨Âå®Âä¸Âå° ãÂÂèªåÂÂå»¶é²ãÂÂè¨Âå®Âçº On ï¼ÂæÂ¤ é¸頠æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂä¸Âä¸Â顯示 ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 39 é Âä¸Âç è¨Âå®Âèª Ã¥ÂÂå»¶é² ï¼Âã éÂÂ註 1 æÂÂæÂ¾ DTS-HD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz ï¼ÂæÂ Dolby TrueHD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz ï¼Âé³è¨ÂæµÂæÂÂï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂå·²é¸æÂ Bass/Treble 以å¤ÂçÂÂ模å¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¨ç¡æ³Âé¸æÂ Tone ã 2 æÂÂæÂ¾ DTS-HD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz ï¼ÂæÂ Dolby TrueHD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz ï¼Âé³è¨ÂæµÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨ç¡æ³Âé¸æÂ Bass/Treble 以å¤ÂçÂÂ模å¼Âã SOUND ENTER ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 27 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ¶è½廣æÂ 06 28 ChH 第 6 ç« æÂ¶è½廣æÂ éÂÂ覠⢠èÂ¥è¦ÂæÂ¶è½廣æÂ ï¼ æÂÂ丠FM/AM æÂÂéµå°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨訠å®Âçº FM/AM æÂ§å¶模å¼Âã éÂÂæÂ§å¨ä¸ÂçÂÂæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ FM/AM ç«é¢ã æÂ¶è½廣æÂ èª¿è«§å¨å¯æÂ¥æÂ¶ FM è AM 廣æÂÂï¼Â並è®ÂæÂ¨è½å°ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¶è½ç éÂȌ°è¨ÂæÂ¶ä¸Âä¾Âï¼Âå¦ÂæÂ¤ä¾¿ä¸ÂéÂÂ卿¯Â次æÂ¶è½æÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調 é¸ã 1 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂè³調諧å¨ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂå¯é¸æÂ FM æÂ AM 波段ã 顯示å¹ÂæÂÂ顯示波段åÂÂé »çÂÂã 2 調é¸éÂÂè¦ÂçÂÂé »çÂÂã 報æÂÂä¸Â種調諧模å¼Âå¯ä¾Âé¸æÂ ï¼ æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂèªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé«ÂéÂÂ@⢠æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調諧 ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂ TUNE /â å¯è®ÂæÂ´é¡¯ç¤ºçÂÂé »çÂÂã â¢ èªåÂÂ調諧 ï¼ÂæÂÂä½ TUNE /â ç´å°頻çÂÂ顯示éÂÂå§Âç§»åÂÂå¾ æÂ¾éÂÂã 調諧卿ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå°Âå°çÂÂéÂȌ°ã æÂÂçºÂæÂ¤ Ã¥ÂÂä½Â便å¯繼çºÂæÂÂå°Âã â¢ é«ÂéÂÂ調諧 ï¼ÂæÂÂä½ TUNE /â ç´å°頻çÂÂ顯示éÂÂå§Âå¿«éÂÂç§» Ã¥ÂÂã 繼çºÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂéÂ括Âç´å°æÂ¾å°è¦ÂæÂ¶è½çÂÂé »çÂÂçºæÂ¢ã 忠è¦ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Â使ç¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調諧微調頻çÂÂã æÂ¹å FM æÂ¥æÂ¶ä¸Âè¯ èÂ¥æÂ¨æÂ£ä»¥ç«Âé«Âè²æÂ¶è½ FM éÂȌ°ï¼Âä½ÂæÂ¶è¨Âä¸Âä½³ï¼Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂè³ å®è²éÂÂ以便æÂ¹åÂÂ鳿ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質ã 1 調å° FM 廣æÂÂéÂȌ°å¾ÂæÂÂä¸Âã 2 é¸æÂ ã Tuner Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 鏿ÂÂã FM Auto/Mono ã @ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 é¸æÂ ã FM Mono ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 調諧å¨èÂÂæÂ¼å®è²éÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æ¨¡å¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âå®è²éÂÂæÂÂ示ç @@æÂÂ亮起ã é¸åÂÂä¸Âè¿°ç FM Auto ï¼Â便å¯åÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模张ï¼ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶ç«Âé«Âè²廣æÂÂæÂÂï¼Âç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂ示ç @ï¼ÂæÂÂ亮起@ã æÂ¹å AM 鳿ÂÂä¸Âä½³ æÂ¹å AM æÂ¶é³æ©Â鳿ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質æÂÂç°¡å®çÂÂæÂ¹å¼Âå°±æÂ¯ç¢ºå®ÂæÂ¿éÂÂå § çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂ¯å¦éÂÂæ©Âã æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以試èÂÂæÂ¹è® AM 迴路天ç·Âç ä½Âç½®èÂÂæÂ¹åÂÂã æÂ¹è®ÂéÂÂ鳿ÂÂå¶模张é²è¡Âä¸Âè¿°åÂÂä½Âå¾Âï¼ÂèÂ¥ä»Âç¡æ³ÂæÂ¹å AM é³質ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯使ç¨丠åÂÂçÂÂéÂÂ鳿ÂÂå¶模å¼Âç²å¾ÂæÂ¹åÂÂã åªè¦Â鏿ÂÂè½起ä¾ÂæÂÂ好çÂÂé³ æÂÂå³å¯ã 1 調å° AM 廣æÂÂéÂȌ°å¾ÂæÂÂä¸Âã 2 é¸æÂ ã Tuner Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã Noise Cut ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 鏿ÂÂéÂÂè¨ÂæÂÂå¶模张@1 ã 2 æÂ 3 ï¼ ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã FM /AM FM/AM 12 3 FM /AM - TUNE SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 28 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ¶è½廣æÂ 06 29 ChH è¨ÂæÂ¶éÂȌ° æÂ¨å¯以å²åÂÂé«Âé 30 Ã¥ÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ï¼Âå¦ÂæÂ¤ä¾¿å¯è¼Âé¬ÂæÂ¶è½å æÂÂçÂÂéÂȌ°ï¼Âä¸Âå¿ æ¯Â次é²è¡ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調é¸ã 1 調諧è³ FM æÂ AM 廣æÂÂéÂȌ°ã è¦ÂéÂÂè¦Â鏿ÂÂå®è²éÂÂæÂÂèªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æÂ¥æÂ¶ ï¼ FM ï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¨ÂæÂ å¶模张@AM ï¼Âã éÂÂäºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼èÂÂé Âè¨Âè¨Âå®Âä¸Âä½µå²åÂÂã 2 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 3 é¸æÂ ã Tuner Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 é¸æÂ ã ST.Memory ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 5 鏿ÂÂæÂ¨è¦ÂæÂ¶è½çÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã æÂ¶è½é Âè¨ÂéÂȌ° 1 è«Â確å®Âå·²é¸åÂÂ調諧åÂÂè½ã 2 鏿ÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ã â¢ æÂÂè 使ç¨æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµç´æÂ¥é¸åÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ã æÂ¹è®Âé »çÂÂéÂÂé èÂ¥ç¼ç¾ç¡æ³Â調諧éÂȌ°ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±çÂÂé »çÂÂéÂÂéÂÂå¯è½ä¸Âé©ç¨ æÂ¼æÂ¨æÂÂå¨çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå®¶î¿å°åÂÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 é¸æÂ ã System Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã AM9K/10K ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 鏿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 以確èªÂã â¢ AM 9K ï¼ AM çº 9 kHz éÂÂéÂÂï¼ FM çº 50 kHz éÂÂé â¢ AM 10K ï¼ AM çº 10 kHz éÂÂéÂÂï¼ FM çº 100 kHz éÂÂé SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER - ST SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 29 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 07 30 ChH 第 7 ç« ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ éÂÂ覠⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨è¨Âå®ÂçºæÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ çÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æÂ§å¶模张ï¼Â確å®Âæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Â顯示以ä¸ÂæÂÂ示ç RECEIVER ç«é¢@ã 使ç¨ ãÂÂè²é³è¨Âå®ÂãÂÂé¸å® å¾ ãÂÂè²é³è¨Âå®ÂãÂÂé¸å®ä¸Âï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以使ç¨系統堨é¨çÂÂç°ç¹Âè² è¨Âå®Âã è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂï¼Â以ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂèª代表çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çº@⢠L ï¼ å·¦åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠C ï¼ ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠R ï¼ å³åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠SR ï¼ å³ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ ⢠SL ï¼ å·¦ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ ⢠SW ï¼ éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 1 èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 23 é Âï¼ÂæÂÂè½æÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³ç ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âã ç¶èÂÂæÂ¨å¯è½æÂÂç¼ç¾ï¼ÂæÂ´é²ä¸ÂæÂ¥èª¿æÂ´è²é ä½ÂæºÂ坿ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¿éÂÂå §çÂÂç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã éÂÂ種è¨Âå®Âè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂçÂÂæÂ¹å¼Âå¯è®ÂæÂ¨æÂ¶è½ä¾ÂæºÂ並調æÂ´æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ æÂ¾è²éÂÂçÂÂä½ÂæºÂã æÂ´é²éÂÂçÂÂè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®ÂæÂ¹å¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¯ä½¿ç¨測試é³ã 詳æÂ è«Âå éÂ񇪪 32 é Âä¸Âç 使ç¨測試é³調æÂ´è²éÂÂä½Â溠ã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 é¸æÂ ã Sound Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã ChannelLevel ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î æÂÂéµé¸æÂÂè²éÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂ使ç¨ îÂÂ/î æÂ éµ調æÂ´è©²è²éÂÂçÂÂä½ÂæºÂã â¢ æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂä½ÂæºÂ調æÂ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçºñ 10 dB ã 2 5 å¨å®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸Âã â¢ èÂ¥åÂÂ次使ç¨èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ å°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ代æÂ¤èÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç è¨Âå®Âã æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢è¨Âå® 1 èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 23 é  ï¼ÂæÂÂè½æÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³ç ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âã ç¶èÂÂæÂ¨å¯è½æÂÂç¼ç¾ï¼Âé²ä¸ÂæÂ¥èª¿æÂ´æÂÂè²å¨ è·Âé¢è¨Âå®Âå¼å¯æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¿éÂÂå §çÂÂç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã å¾ÂæÂ£å¸¸çÂÂèÂÂè½ä½Âç½®è¨Âå®Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢ã 1 éÂÂå ã Sound Setup ãÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã Distance ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î æÂÂéµé¸æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ï¼ÂæÂÂ使ç¨ îÂÂ/î æÂÂéµ調æÂ´è·Âé¢ã æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢調æÂ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçº 0.1m è³ 9.0m ã 4 å®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ èÂ¥åÂÂ次使ç¨èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ å°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ代æÂ¤èÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç è¨Âå®Âã éÂÂ註 1 å¨éÂÂå MCACC Effect å¾Âè¨Âå®ÂæÂ¤åÂÂè½æÂÂï¼Â以èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½調æÂ´ä¹Âç¸åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½çÂÂ弿ÂÂéÂÂå°åÂÂ代ã éÂÂé MCACC Effect æÂÂï¼Âå¥Âç¨å¨éÂÂè£Âè¨Âå®ÂçÂÂå¼ï¼ÂèÂÂ使ç¨èªå MCACC 調æÂ´çÂÂå¼ç¡éÂÂã ï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ代èªå MCACC è¨Âå®ÂãÂÂï¼ RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR 2 é³éÂÂè¨Âå®Âè¶ é 51 æÂÂï¼Â調æÂ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå°éÂÂå¶ã SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 30 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 07 31 ChH Ã¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ§å¶ 以ä½Âé³éÂÂè§Âè³ Dolby Digital æÂ DTS è³ÂæÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯è½ç¡泠渠æ¥Âè½å°ä½Âä½ÂæºÂé³æÂ â å æÂŽÂ¨åÂÂå°Âç½ ã 使ç¨堶ä¸Âä¸Âé  å æ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ§å¶ ï¼ DRC ï¼Âè¨Âå®Âå¼便坿ÂÂé«Âä½Âä½ÂæºÂ鳿ÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ æÂ§å¶é«Âä½ÂæºÂé«Âé³ã åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ§å¶å é©ç¨æÂ¼ Dolby Digital é³è»ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¨å DTS é³ è»Âã 1 éÂÂå ã Sound Setup ãÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã D.R.C. ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 鏿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âã è«Â鏿ÂÂ以ä¸Âå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âå®Â@⢠D.R.C. Auto ï¼Âå é©ç¨æÂ¼ Dolby TrueHD è¨ÂæÂ¯ã é¸æÂ D.R.C. High æÂ D.R.C. Mid ç¨æÂ¼ Dolby TrueHD 以夠çÂÂè¨ÂèÂÂã â¢ D.R.C. High ï¼Âæ¸Âå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ Âç¯Âå ï¼ÂéÂÂä½Â大è²é³éÂÂ並æÂÂé« è¼Âå°Âè²çÂÂ鳿ÂÂ@⢠D.R.C. Mid ï¼Âä¸ÂçÂÂè¨Â宠⢠D.R.C. Off ï¼Âç¡åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂ調æÂ´ ï¼Â以è¼Âé«Âé³éÂÂèÂÂè½æÂÂ諠使ç¨æÂ¤è¨Âå®Âï¼ 4 æÂÂä¸Âå¯çµÂæÂÂã éÂÂå®è²éÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ æÂÂå®ÂéÂÂå®è²é Dolby Digital é³è»ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾æÂ¹å¼Âã æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以 使ç¨æÂ¤è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂèªÂ鳿ÂÂéÂÂ製ç DVD-RW ç¢Âç è²éÂÂã 1 éÂÂå ã Sound Setup ãÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã Dual Mono ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 鏿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âã è«Â鏿ÂÂ以ä¸Âå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âå®Â@⢠CH1 Mono ï¼Âå æÂÂæÂ¾è²é 1 ⢠CH2 Mono ï¼Âå æÂÂæÂ¾è²é 2 ⢠CH1/CH2 ï¼Âå ©åÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂç±åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂæÂ¾ 4 æÂÂä¸Âå¯çµÂæÂÂã SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 31 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 07 32 ChH 使ç¨èÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°ç¹Â模张æÂ¬æ¨¡å¼Âå¯è®ÂæÂ¨éÂÂéÂÂæÂ¨çÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨è½å°èÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°ç¹Âè² éÂÂã æÂ¨å¯以鏿ÂÂèÂÂè½æ²ÂæÂÂå¾Âç°ç¹Âè²éÂÂè³Âè¨ÂçÂÂ鳿ºÂï¼ÂæÂÂ妠æÂÂè²é³以åÂÂå§Â編碼格张ï¼Âä¾Â妠5.1 ï¼Âè½起ä¾Âè¼Âä½³ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯ 以è®ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨å°ÂæÂ¤æÂÂæÂÂå¥Âç¨å° Dolby Digital EX æÂ DTS-ES ç 6.1 編碼鳿ºÂä¸Âã 1 1 éÂÂå ã Sound Setup ãÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã Virtual SB ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 鏿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âã è«Â鏿ÂÂ以ä¸Âå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âå®Â@⢠Vir.SB On ï¼Âä¸Âå®Â使ç¨èÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°繠ï¼Âä¾Â妠5.1 編碼賠æÂÂ@⢠Vir.SB Auto ï¼ÂèÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°ç¹ÂèªåÂÂå¥Âç¨å° 6.1 編碼鳿ºÂ丠ï¼Âä¾Â妠Dolby Digital EX æÂ DTS-ES ã DTS Neo:6 æÂÂå  é²ç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Â@⢠Vir.SB Off ï¼ÂèÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°ç¹Â模å¼ÂéÂÂé 4 æÂÂä¸Âå¯çµÂæÂÂã LFE 衰渠æÂÂ亠Dolby Digital å DTS 鳿ºÂå æÂ¬æ¥µä½ÂçÂÂä½Âé³ã è¦ÂéÂÂè¦Âè¨Âå® LFE è¡°æ¸Âå¨ï¼Â以é¿å ÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂ極ä½Âé³失çÂÂã LFE è¨Âå®Âçº建è°å¼ 0dB æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå¶ã è¨Âå®Âçº -5dB ã -10dB ã -15dB æÂ -20dB æÂÂï¼ LFE Ã¥ÂÂå°åÂÂçÂÂç´ÂçÂÂéÂÂå¶ã é¸æÂ Off æÂÂï¼ LFE è²éÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂ輸åº任ä½Âè²é³ã 1 éÂÂå ã Sound Setup ãÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã LFE ATT ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 調æÂ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã 使ç¨測試é³調æÂ´è²éÂÂä½Â溠æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨測試é³ä½ÂçºåÂÂèÂÂè¨Âå®Âè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂï¼ÂèÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæÂ æÂ¾ä¾Â溠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 30 é Âä¸Âç è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ ï¼Âã æ¯Âå æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂ輪æµÂæÂÂæÂ¾æ¸¬è©¦é³ï¼Â以ä¾ÂæÂ¨å¨æÂÂæÂ¾æÂÂ調æÂ´ä½ÂæºÂã æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨測試é³ä¾Â調æÂ´ç°ç¹Âè²çÂÂè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂã 1 å·è¡Âé³調測試ã æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂÂ輪æµÂæÂÂæÂ¾æ¸¬è©¦é³ã å°Âé³éÂÂ調å° 50 以ä¸Âã 2 æÂÂæÂ¾æÂÂï¼Â調æÂ´è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂã æÂ¤ç®çÂÂå¨æÂ¼èª¿æÂ´ä½ÂæºÂï¼Â確ä¿ÂæÂ¨å¾Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è½å°çÂÂ測試 é³é³éÂÂçÂÂç¸åÂÂã æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂä½ÂæºÂ調æÂ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçºñ 10 dB ã â¢ æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨ VOL /â æÂÂéµ調æÂ´æ¸¬è©¦é³輸åºçÂÂæÂ´é«Âé³ éÂÂï¼ ä¸ÂæÂÂå½±é¿è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼@ã â¢ ç±æÂ¼éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂç¢çÂÂè¶ ä½Âé »çÂÂï¼Â堶實éÂÂ鳿ÂÂå¯è½æÂ´å¤§ è²ã æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è°èÂÂè½ä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼Â調æÂ´éÂÂä½Âé³ä½ÂæºÂã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 30 é Âä¸Âç è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ ã 3 å®ÂæÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯çµÂæÂÂ測試é³è¨Âå®Âã â¢ èÂ¥åÂÂ次使ç¨èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ å°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ代æÂ¤èÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç è¨Âå®Âã éÂÂ註 1 èÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°ç¹Âè²模å¼ÂæÂ¯å¦æÂÂæÂÂè¦Â輸堥è¨ÂæÂ¯åÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼ÂèÂÂå®Âã SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER TEST TONE ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 32 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»ÂæÂ¥ç· 08 33 ChH 第 8 ç« å ¶ä»ÂæÂ¥ç· éÂÂ覠â¢ å¨æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂå´é¢æÂ¿ä¸Âé²è¡ÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂè®ÂæÂ´æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ éÂÂéÂÂ黿ºÂï¼Â並å°Â黿ºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂèªçÂÂä¸Â黿ºÂæÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂé¤ã å®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·Âå¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°Â黿ºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂ¥ä¸Â黿ºÂæÂÂ座ã é£æÂ¥è¼Âå©è¨Âå æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以å°Âé¡Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¸ä½ÂçÂÂå¤ÂæÂ¥é³è¨Âä¾ÂæºÂé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬ç³»çµ±ã æÂ¸ä½Âé³è¨Âä¾ÂæºÂå æÂ¾Â¸ä½Âè¡ÂæÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶å¨ã CD éÂÂé³å¨çÂÂã 建è°æÂ¨ä½¿ç¨ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âä¾Âé£æÂ¥æÂ HDMI 端åÂÂçÂÂé³è¨Âä¾ æºÂã å¦ÂéÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 35 é Âä¸Âç 使ç¨ HDMI é£ æÂÂ¥ ã èÂ¥è¦ÂèÂÂè½ä¾Âèªé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂé³è¨Âé£æÂ¥ç· é£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã æÂ¸ä½Âé³è¨ÂçÂÂ飿ÂÂ¥ æÂ¬ç³»çµ±æÂÂå Âå¸æÂ¸ä½Â輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 使ç¨éÂÂäºÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ飿ÂÂ¥ MD å CD éÂÂé³å¨çÂÂå¤ÂæÂ¥è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ å°Âå´é¢æÂ¿ç OPTICAL IN 2 æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³å¤ÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¾è¨Âå çÂÂå Âå¸輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã éÂÂäºÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂå æÂ¬ MD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ãÂÂæÂ¸ä½Âè¡ÂæÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶å¨æÂÂéÂÂæÂ²æ©Âç æÂ¸ä½Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã ä¸Â使ç¨ OPTICAL IN 1 輸堥é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂè²é³æÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以使 ç¨å®Âé£æÂ¥å¤Âé¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã é£æÂ¥é¡Âæ¯Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå æÂ¨å¯以使ç¨ ANALOG AUDIO IN æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂ鳿©ÂçÂÂé¡ æ¯Â鳿ÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 使ç¨顯示è£Âç½®ç F.AUDIO 輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯è¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾æÂ¸ä½Âé³訠æÂÂæÂ¾å¨æÂ PC çÂÂ鳿ÂÂã 使ç¨ç«Âé«Âè²迷你æÂÂé Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âå°Âé³ è¨Âä¾ÂæºÂé£æÂ¥è³顯示è£Âç½®ã â¢ å°Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂ¥ä¸ F.AUDIO æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂ輸堥èªåÂÂå æÂÂè³ Front Audio In ã MD ãÂÂCD éÂÂé³å¨ç å¾ÂæÂ¸ä½Âé³訠輸åºï¼Âå Âå¸@OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 DIGIT AL å´é¢æÂ¿ æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ å¾Âé³è¨Â輸åº R L ANALOG A UDIO IN å´é¢æÂ¿ æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ æÂ¶éÂÂ鳿©Âã MD ãÂÂDA T ç F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM F.AUDIO æÂ¸ä½Âé³è¨ÂæÂÂæÂ¾å¨ç 顯示è£Âç½® å¾Âé¡Âæ¯Âé³訠輸åº ç«Âé«Âè²迷你æÂÂé Âé£æÂ¥ç· HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 33 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»ÂæÂ¥ç· 08 34 ChH 飿ÂÂ¥ iPod æÂ¨å¯以使ç¨顯示è£Âç½®ä¸Âç iPod æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾ä¾Âèª iPod æÂ³é³ æ¨Âã æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂä½Âé½å¯以éÂÂé iPod å·è¡Âã 使ç¨é¨éÂÂç iPod é£æÂ¥ç·Âå° iPod é£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©Âã â¢ 飿ÂÂ¥ iPod æÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂ輸堥èªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå° iPod ã â¢ æÂÂ亠iPod æ©Â種çÂÂæÂ¥é Âè·ÂæÂ¬æ©Âä¸Âç¸容ã iPod î æÂ¯ Apple Inc. å¨ç¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå ¶ä»ÂÃ¥ÂÂå®¶å·²ç¶Â註åÂÂä¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã èÂÂè½å¤ÂæÂ¥é³è¨Âä¾Â溠èÂ¥è¦Â使ç¨æÂ¬æ©ÂèÂÂè½ä¾ÂèªæÂÂé£æÂ¥å¤Âé¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå¨é æÂ§å¨ä¸Â鏿ÂÂ該è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½ã 使ç¨æÂ¤éÂÂæÂ§å¨å¯以æÂ§å¶ æÂÂäºÂå ÂéÂÂç¢åÂÂã 1 è¥系統å°ÂæÂªéÂÂæ©Âï¼ÂæÂÂ丠î RECEIVER 便å¯éÂÂæ©Âã åÂÂæÂÂè«Â確å®Âå¤ÂæÂ¥ä¾Â溠ï¼Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂãÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶å¨çÂÂï¼ÂçÂÂé»溠已éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 鏿ÂÂé³è¨Â輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂã 輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂ顯示é ÂåºÂå¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂ示@液æÂ¶è¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³該鏿ÂÂ輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂç«é¢ã 3 æÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂéµã é£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂªé¡¯ç¤ºå¨ç«é¢ä¸Âï¼ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ¯å ÂéÂÂ製é çÂÂ訠åÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂ丠RCV æÂÂéµ使éÂÂæÂ§å¨顯示å¨æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ æÂÂä½Âç«é¢ä¸Âã 4 å¿ è¦ÂæÂÂï¼ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæÂ¾å¤ÂæÂ¥ä¾ÂæºÂã MENU F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM iPod iPod Music > Extras > Settings > Shuffle Songs Backlight iPod iPod é£æÂ¥ç· é¡¯ç¤ºè£Âç½® R LINE Digital 2 Front Audio In iPod Analog Digital 1 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 34 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»ÂæÂ¥ç· 08 35 ChH é£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥å¤©ç· èÂ¥çºå¤ÂæÂÂ¥ AM 天ç·Âï¼Âè«Â使ç¨ 5 m è³ 6 m çÂÂä¹Âç¯åºçµÂç·£é» ç·Âï¼Â並å®Âè£ÂæÂ¼å®¤å §æÂÂ室å¤Âã è«Âä¿ÂæÂÂ迴路天ç·ÂçÂÂæÂ¥ç·Âã èÂ¥çºå¤ÂæÂÂ¥ FM 天ç·Âï¼Âè«Â使ç¨ PAL æÂ¥é Âé£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥ç FM 天 ç·Âã éÂÂæÂ¼æÂ§å¶輸åºé£æÂÂ¥ æÂÂå¤Â種å ÂéÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¯æÂ´ CONTROL é£æÂ¥ï¼Âå°ÂéÂÂäºÂé£æÂ¥è¨Âå çÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨å°ÂæºÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå¨å³å¯使ç¨ã 使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂÂï¼ÂæÂ§å¶è¨ÂèÂÂæÂÂ沿èÂÂé»路å³éÂÂè³é©ç¶çÂÂ訠åÂÂã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨é¸æÂÂ使ç¨æÂ¤åÂÂè½ï¼Âè«Â確å®Âè³å°Âå°Âä¸Âçµ HDMI æÂÂé¡ æ¯Â鳿ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³堶ä»Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âï¼Âä½ÂçºæÂ¥å°ç¨éÂÂã â¢ å¨任ä¸Âå´使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂ§å¶é£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Âå°Âå¦ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå ÂéÂÂ訠åÂÂä¸Âç CONTROL IN æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ä¸Âç CONTROL OUT æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂ顯示è£Âç½®å¯æÂ§ å¶堶ä»Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 使ç¨ HDMI 飿ÂÂ¥ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨æÂÂé Âå HDMI æÂ DVI ï¼ÂæÂ HDCP ï¼ÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯ 以使ç¨å¸Âå®ç HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âå°Âå®Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Âé³æÂ è²å¨ã 1 HDMI é£æÂ¥å³éÂÂæÂªå£Â縮çÂÂæÂ¸ä½Âè¦Âè¨Âï¼Â以åÂÂå¹¾ä¹Âæ¯Âä¸Â種 èÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¸容çÂÂæÂ¸ä½Âé³è¨Âï¼Âå æÂ¬ DVD-Video ã DVD-Audio ã SACD ã Blu-ray Disc ã VCD ãÂÂè¶ ç´ VCD ã CD å MP3 çÂÂã AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 ⦠ANTENNA å´é¢æÂ¿ æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ å¤ÂæÂÂ¥ FM 天締室å¤Â天締å¤ÂæÂÂ¥ AM 天締AM 迴路天締PA L æÂ¥é  5 m è³6 m 室堧天締ï¼Âä¹Âç¯åºå¡ÂæÂÂéÂÂ屬ç·Âï¼ éÂÂ註 1 ⢠å éÂÂ使ç¨é Âå DVI 並å DVI èÂÂé«Â頻寬æÂ¸ä½Â堧容ä¿Âè· ï¼ HDCP ï¼Âç¸容çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²衠HDMI é£æÂ¥ã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨é¸æÂÂ飿ÂÂ¥ DVI æÂ¥é Âï¼ÂæÂ¨éÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¨ç«ÂçÂÂè½ÂæÂ¥å¨ ï¼ DVI î HDMI ï¼ÂæÂÂè½é²è¡Âé£æÂ¥ã 你DVD é£æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ¯æÂ´é³è¨Âè¨ÂèÂÂã å¦ÂéÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Â洽詢ç¶å°çÂÂé³è¨Âè£Âç½®ç¶Âé·åÂÂã â¢ æÂ¬æ©Âè¨Âè¨Â符å HDMI ï¼Âé«Âå³çÂÂå¤ÂåªÂé«Âä»Âé¢@1.3a çÂÂã 使ç¨ DVI é£æÂ¥æÂ¯å¦å°Âè´å³éÂÂä¸Âå¯é çÂÂè¨ÂæÂ¯è¦ÂæÂ¨é£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂå® ã 使ç¨é Âå HDMI 1.0 çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ç è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âç¡æ³Âå¾ HDMI é£æÂ¥è¼¸åºé²çÂÂæÂ·æÂ§å¶ DVD-Audio CPPM 鳿ºÂã â¢ æÂ¬æ©ÂæÂ¯æÂ´ SACD ã Dolby Digital Plus ã Dolby TrueHD å DTS-HD Master Audio ã èÂ¥è¦ÂéÂÂç¨éÂÂäºÂæ ¼å¼Âï¼Âè«Â確å®Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¹ÂæÂ¯æÂ´ç¸æÂÂçÂÂæ ¼å¼Âã 徠HDMI輸åº HDMI T IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 å¾Âé¢æÂ¿ é Âå HDMI/DVI çÂÂè¨Âå HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 35 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»ÂæÂ¥ç· 08 36 ChH 1 使ç¨ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Âå°ÂæÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ç HDMI IN 1 è³ 3 å §é¨æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥è³ HDMI è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂç HDMI 輸 åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã å°ÂæÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥è³æÂ¨ç HDMI è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âå¨æÂ¨ è§Âè³ HDMI 堧容æÂ ï¼ é¡¯ç¤ºè£Âç½®ä¸Âç HDMI æÂÂ示çÂÂï¼Âç´ è²@亮起ã 2 使ç¨ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Âå°ÂæÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ç HDMI OUT å §é¨æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥è³ HDMI ç¸容顯示è£Âç½®ç HDMI å §é¨æÂ¥ç·Âã â¢ é£æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂ¥é Âä¸ÂçÂÂç®Âé ÂæÂÂ該æÂÂå³ï¼ÂèÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾å¨çÂÂæÂ¥é Âå° é½Âã 3 使ç¨ HDMI 1 è³ 3 æÂÂéµé¸æÂÂæÂ¨è¦Âé£æÂ¥ç HDMI 輸堥 ï¼Âä¾Â妠HDMI 2 ï¼Âã æÂ¨å¯以使ç¨顯示è£Âç½®ç INPUT SELECTOR å·è¡ÂæÂ¤æÂÂä½Âã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ³è¦Âè½å°æÂ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂé»漿é»è¦Â輸åºç HDMI é³ æÂ ï¼ÂæÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨å°Âä¸ÂæÂÂ輸åº任ä½Âè²é³@@å¨ ä¸ÂæÂÂç HDMI 模å¼Âè¨Âå® ä¸Âå° HDMI 模å¼Âè¨Âå®Âçº Through Mode ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂè¦Âè¨ÂæÂªåºç¾å¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂé»漿é»è¦Âä¸Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ試調 æÂ´æÂ¨çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ顯示å¨ä¸ÂçÂÂè§£æÂÂ度è¨Âå®Âã HDMI 模å¼Âè¨Âå® æÂÂå® HDMI é³è¨ÂçÂÂå³éÂÂè·¯å¾ÂæÂ¯ä¾ÂèªæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ÂæÂ´å¤§å¨ï¼ÂæÂÂç¶Âç±é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂé»漿é»è¦Âã HDMI 模å¼Âè¨Âå®Âçº Through Mode æÂÂï¼Âç¡æ³Â使ç¨å¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂè²é³åÂÂè½ã éÂÂ覠⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨è¨Âå®Âçºå¯æÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè² å¨çÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æÂ§å¶模张ï¼Â確å®Âæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Â顯示 RECEIVER ç«é¢@ã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 é¸æÂ ã HDMI Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã HDMI Mode ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 調æÂ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ AMP Mode ï¼Â輸åºä¾ÂèªæÂ¬æ©Âç HDMI é³è¨Âè¨ÂèÂÂã â¢ Through Mode ï¼Â輸åºä¾Âèªä¸Â莻è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂé»漿é»覠ç HDMI é³è¨Âè¨ÂèÂÂã HDMI THROUGH æÂÂ示çÂÂ亮起ã éÂÂæÂ¼ HDMI HDMI ï¼Âé«Âå³çÂÂå¤ÂåªÂé«Âä»Âé¢ï¼Âè¦Âè¨ÂæÂ¯æÂ´å®ä¸ÂæÂ¸ä½Âé£æÂ¥ç è¦Âè¨ÂèÂÂé³è¨Âï¼Â坿ÂÂé  DVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ã DTV ãÂÂæ©Âä¸ÂçÂÂèÂÂå ¶ä» å½±é³è£Â置使ç¨ã HDMI çÂÂéÂÂç¼æÂ¯çºäºÂ以å®ä¸Âè¦Âæ ¼æÂÂä¾Â髠頻寬æÂ¸ä½Â堧容ä¿Âè· ï¼ HDCP ï¼ÂèÂÂæÂ¸ä½Âå½±åÂÂä»Âé¢ ï¼ DVI ï¼ÂæÂ è¡Âã HDCP ç¨æÂ¼ä¿Âè· DVI ç¸容顯示å¨å³éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶çÂÂæÂ¸ä½ å §å®¹ã HDMI æÂÂæÂ¯æÂ´æ¨ÂæºÂãÂÂå¢Âå¼·æÂÂé«Âå³çÂÂè¦Â訠æ¨ÂæºÂå°å¤Âè²é ç°ç¹Âè²é³æÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã HDMI Ã¥ÂÂè½å æÂ¬è§£å£Â縮è¦Âè¨ÂãÂÂé«Âé æ¯Âç§ 2.2 GB çÂÂ頻寬ãÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥é  ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ代å¤Âæ¢Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂ夠åÂÂæÂ¥é Âï¼ ãÂÂå¨影é³ä¾ÂæºÂè DTV çÂÂå½±é³è£Âç½®ä¹ÂéÂÂéÂÂè¨Âã HDMI ã HDMI æ¨ÂèªÂå High-Definition Multimedia Interface Ã¥ÂÂçº HDMI Licensing LLC çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨ÂæÂÂ註åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã RCV SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 36 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
HDMI Control 09 37 ChH 第 9 ç« HDMI Control 使ç¨ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âå°ÂæÂ¬æ©Âé£æÂ¥è³ HDMI Control ç¸容å Âé é»漿é»è¦ÂæÂÂ硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©Âå¾Âï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥é» 漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂ§å¶æÂ¬æ©Âï¼Â以åÂÂè®ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂé»漿é»è¦Âèª Ã¥ÂÂè®ÂæÂ´è¼¸å ¥ä»¥åÂÂæÂÂå¨æÂ¬æ©Âä¸Âå·è¡ÂçÂÂæÂÂä½Âã å¦ÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥å¯å·è¡ÂåªäºÂæÂÂä½ÂçÂÂ詳細 è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±é»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ æÂ¨ç¡æ³Â使ç¨æÂ¤åÂÂè½æÂÂé Âä¸ÂæÂ¯æÂ´ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ç è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âä¿ÂèÂÂæÂ¬æ©Âå¯以æÂÂé ÂéÂÂå ÂéÂÂå ¬å¸製é ç HDMI Control ç¸容è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂ使ç¨ã éÂÂ覠⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨è¨Âå®ÂçºæÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ çÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æÂ§å¶模张ï¼Â確å®Âæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Â顯示以ä¸ÂæÂÂ示ç RECEIVER ç«é¢@ã é²衠HDMI Control 飿ÂÂ¥ æÂ¨å¯以å°Âé£æÂ¥çÂÂé»漿é»è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¤Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå ¶ä»Âè¨Âå ï¼Âå æÂ¾Â å¤Âå ©å°éÂÂå½±æ©ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾å¨@ã 確å®Âå°Âé»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂé³è¨Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂé³è¨Â輸堥æÂ åÂÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨ä½¿ç¨å¸Âå®ç HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Âè«Â檢æÂ¥è©²é£æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂ¯ å¦æÂ¯æÂ´ HDMI 1.3 æ¨ÂæºÂã å¦åÂÂï¼ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½å¯ è½ç¡æ³ÂæÂ£å¸¸ä½Âç¨ã RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 R L AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 ⦠OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 ANALOG AUD I O IN ANTENNA DIGIT AL å¾Âé³è¨Â輸åº æÂ å¾ÂæÂ¸ä½Âé³訠輸åºï¼Âå Âå¸@è³ HDMI 輸堥 å¾ HDMI輸åº æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ å¾Âé¢æÂ¿ å´é¢æÂ¿ è HDMI Controlç¸容ç å ÂéÂÂ硬碠/DVDéÂÂå½±æ©Âï¼ Blu-ray disc æÂÂæÂ¾æ©ÂæÂÂDVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ è HDMI Control ç¸容ç å ÂéÂÂé»漿é»覠HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 37 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
HDMI Control 09 38 ChH ⢠å°Âé»漿é»è¦Âç´æÂ¥é£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©Âã ä¸ÂæÂ·èÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂ´å¤§å¨æÂ å½±é³è½ÂæÂÂå¨ ï¼Âä¾Â妠HDMI éÂÂéÂÂï¼ÂçÂÂç´æÂ¥é£æÂ¥å¯è½尠è´æÂÂä½Âä¸ÂçÂÂé¯誤ã â¢ å éÂÂé£æÂ¥æÂ¨æÂÂç®ÂÃ¥ÂÂçºæÂ¬æ© HDMI 輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂè¨Âå ã 丠æÂ·èÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂ´å¤§å¨æÂÂå½±é³è½ÂæÂÂå¨ ï¼Âä¾Â妠HDMI éÂÂéÂÂï¼ çÂÂç´æÂ¥é£æÂ¥å¯è½å°Âè´æÂÂä½Âä¸ÂçÂÂé¯誤ã éÂÂ覠⢠å°ÂæÂ¤ç³»çµ±é²è¡ÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂè®ÂæÂ´æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ éÂÂéÂÂ黿ºÂ@並å°Â黿ºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂèªçÂÂä¸Â黿ºÂæÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂé¤ãÂÂå®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ æÂ¥ç·Âå¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°Â黿ºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂ¥ä¸Â黿ºÂæÂÂ座ã â¢ å°ÂæÂ¬æ©Âé£æÂ¥è³ AC 黿ºÂæÂÂ座徠ï¼Âé 姠15 ç§ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂ稠åºÂã åÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂä¸Âå¯以å·è¡Âä»»ä½ÂæÂÂä½Âã 顯示è£Â置丠ç HDMI æÂÂ示çÂÂå¨åÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂçÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以å¨æÂ¤æÂ ç¤ºçÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¢éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂå³éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¬æ©Â黿ºÂã â¢ èÂ¥è¦Â使æÂŒÂÂè½ç¼æÂ®æÂÂ大æÂÂç¨ ï¼Â建è°æÂ¨ä¸Âè¦Âå° HDMI 訠åÂÂé£æÂ¥è³é»漿é»è¦Âï¼ÂèÂÂæÂ¯ç´æÂ¥é£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©Âç HDMI 端åÂÂã è¨Âå® HDMI é¸頠èÂ¥è¦Âå  åÂÂéÂÂå HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¿ é Â調æÂ´æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂ訠å®Âè HDMI Control ç¸容é£æÂ¥è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã å¦ÂéÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Âå é±æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã è¨Âå® HDMI Control 模张鏿ÂÂæÂ¯å¦å°ÂæÂ¬æ©Âç HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½è¨Âå®Âçº On æÂ Off ã èÂ¥è¦Â使ç¨ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ï¼Âå¿ é Âå°Âå®Âè¨Âå®Âçº Control On ã â¢ 使ç¨éÂÂå ÂéÂÂ製é çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âå°ÂæÂ¤è¨Âå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ Control Off ã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 é¸æÂ ã HDMI Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã HDMI Ctrl ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 調æÂ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ Control On ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¨ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ã å¨æÂ¬æ©Âé»溠éÂÂéÂÂï¼Âä¸Âå¨使ç¨ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæÂ¾æÂ¯ æÂ´çÂÂä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼Âå¾Âé»漿é»è¦Â輸åºä¾Âèª HDMI é£æÂ¥çÂÂé³ è¨ÂèÂÂè¦Âè¨Âã â¢ Control Off ï¼Âå·²åÂÂç¨ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ ã ç¡æ³Â使ç¨ Ã¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂÂä½Âã æÂ¬æ©Â黿ºÂéÂÂéÂÂå¾Âï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂ輸åºéÂÂé HDMI é£æÂ¥çÂÂé³è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âè¨Âä¾ÂæºÂã HDMI é£æÂ¥ç· HDMI é£æÂ¥ç· HDMI 輸堥 HDMI 輸åº HDMI 輸堥 HDMI OUT å ¶ä»ÂæÂ´å¤§å¨ æÂÂå½±é³è½ÂæÂÂå¨ æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ è HDMI Control ç¸容ç å ÂéÂÂé»漿é»覠HDMI é£æÂ¥ç· HDMI é£æÂ¥ç· HDMI 輸堥 HDMI 輸åº HDMI IN HDMI OUT å ¶ä»ÂæÂ´å¤§å¨æÂÂå½±é³è½ÂæÂÂå¨ æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ æÂÂè²å¨ è HDMI Control ç¸容ç å ÂéÂÂé»漿é»覠SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 38 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
HDMI Control 09 39 ChH è¨Âå®ÂèªåÂÂå»¶é² æÂŒÂÂè½èªåÂÂä¿®æÂ£ä»¥ HDMI é£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¹ÂéÂÂçÂÂé³è¨Âè³è¦Â訠延é²ã é³è¨Â延鲿ÂÂéÂÂçÂÂè¨Âå®ÂæÂ¯ä»¥ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥çÂÂ顯 示卿ÂÂä½ÂçÂÂæ ÂèÂÂå®Âã æÂ¬æ©Âæ ¹æÂÂè¦Âè¨Â延鲿ÂÂéÂÂèªåÂÂ調æÂ´é³ è¨Â延鲿ÂÂéÂÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 é¸æÂ ã HDMI Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã Auto Delay ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 é¸æÂ ã A.Delay On ãÂÂæÂ ã A.Delay Off ã @ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 以確èªÂã æÂÂ示 ⢠æÂŒÂÂè½å å¨é£æÂ¥çÂÂ顯示å¨æÂ¯æÂ´é©ç¨æÂ¼ HDMI æÂ HDMI Control çÂÂèªåÂÂé³è¨Âî¿è¦Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå½¢åÂÂæÂ¥ï¼ æÂÂæÂÂè½使ç¨ã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨æÂ¾å°ä¸Âé©ç¶çÂÂèªåÂÂè¨Âå®Âå»¶é²æÂ éÂÂï¼Âå° A.Delay è¨Âå®Âçº Off ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調æÂ´è²é³延 é²è¨Âå® ï¼Â第 27 é Âï¼ ã é»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂé³è¨Â輸堥è¨Âå® ï¼ TV 輸堥@èÂ¥è¦Â使ç¨æÂ¬è£Âç½®æÂ¶è½ä¾Âèªé»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¿ é ÂæÂ¥ä¸ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Â以å¤ÂçÂÂé³è¨Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âã å¨æÂ¤é¸å®ä¸Âï¼Âå°Âé³訠輸堥è¨Âå®ÂçºæÂ¨æÂ³è¦Âé£æÂ¥çÂÂé³è¨Â輸堥ã æÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ä¸Âç TV å°ÂæÂ¬æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³å¨æÂ¤é¸æÂÂçÂÂ輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂã æÂ¤è¨Âå®Âå¼è®ÂæÂÂæÂÂé¸ æÂÂçÂÂ輸堥ï¼Â並ä¸Âå¾ÂæÂ¬è£Â置輸åºä¾Âèªé»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂã é¸æÂÂä¾Âèª Digital 1 ã Digital 2 å Analog çÂÂ輸堥ã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 é¸æÂ ã System Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã TV Input ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 調æÂ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã éÂÂ覠⢠æÂ¨å¿ é Âè¨Âå®ÂæÂ¤è¨Âå®Â弿ÂÂè½åÂÂå HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ã 使ç¨åÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂä¹Âå å®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥èÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¾Âï¼ÂæÂ¨å¿ é Âï¼ 1 使æÂÂæÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²堥徠æ©Â模å¼Âã 2 éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ黿ºÂï¼Âä½Â卿ÂÂå¾ÂæÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»漿é»è¦Âç é»æºÂã 3 鏿ÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂèÂÂæÂ¬æ©Âé£æÂ¥ç HDMI 輸堥ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ¥çÂÂä¾ èªé£æÂ¥è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè¦Âè¨Â輸åºæÂ¯å¦æÂ£å¸¸é¡¯ç¤ºå¨è¢å¹Âä¸Âã åÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模张åÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模å¼Âå¨æÂ¨å·è¡Âé»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂéÂÂå§Âã 妠éÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±é»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã åÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模å¼ÂæÂÂ你使ç¨ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âå°Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©Âå¾Âï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以使ç¨å æÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模å¼Âä¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä½Â@⢠使æÂ¬æ©ÂéÂÂ鳿ÂÂ調æÂ´æÂ¬æ©Âé³éÂÂæÂÂï¼Â顯示å¨é»漿é»è¦Âä¸Âã â¢ é£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæÂ¾æÂÂï¼ÂèªåÂÂè®ÂæÂ´æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂ輸堥ã â¢ å³使æÂ¨å°ÂæÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂçÂÂ輸堥è®ÂæÂ´çºä¸ÂæÂ¯ä»¥ HDMI é£æÂ¥çÂÂ裠置ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模å¼Âä»Âç¶æÂÂæÂÂã â¢ å¨èÂÂè½ä¾Âèª硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂçÂÂ鳿ºÂæÂÂï¼ æÂÂ丠GENRE å¯èªåÂÂ鏿ÂÂæÂÂé©åÂÂçÂÂèÂÂè½模张ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã åÂÂæ¶ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模张å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨å¨éÂÂé HDMI é£æÂ¥è³é»漿é»è¦ÂæÂÂè§Âè³Âé»è¦Âç¯Âç®æÂ åÂÂæ¶ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模å¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¬æ©Â黿ºÂéÂÂéÂÂã SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 39 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 40 ChH 第 10 ç« å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠éÂÂ覠⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨è¨Âå®ÂçºæÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ çÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æÂ§å¶模张ï¼Â確å®Âæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Â顯示以ä¸ÂæÂÂ示ç RECEIVER ç«é¢@ã 調æÂÂ顯示å¹Â亮度 èÂ¥æÂ¨è¦ºå¾Â太亮ï¼Âå¯調æÂÂ顯示è£Âç½®çÂÂ顯示亮度ã 1 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 é¸æÂ ã System Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã Dimmer ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 é¸æÂ ã Dimmer Light ãÂÂæÂ ã Dimmer Dark ã @ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 以確èªÂã è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ ç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ç¶ÂéÂÂç¹å®ÂæÂÂéÂÂå¾Âå°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ·æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂé» æºÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯æÂ¾å¿Âå ¥ç¡ã â¢ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂé¸頠ã æÂÂ以ä¸Âé¸頠å¯ä¾Â鏿ÂÂ@⢠Sleep On ï¼Âç´Âä¸Âå°ÂæÂÂå¾ÂéÂÂéÂÂé»溠⢠Sleep Off ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ é¸æÂ Sleep On å¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次 SLEEP å¯檢æÂ¥å©é¤ÂçÂÂæÂ éÂÂã æ¯Âæ¢Âç·Â代表素12 Ã¥ÂÂé ï¼Âå©é¤ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ ï¼ è¨Âå®ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨以æÂ§å¶é»è¦Âæ© æÂ¨å¯以使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂÂæÂ§é»è¦Âæ©Âã èÂ¥è¦Â使ç¨æÂ¤å è½ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¿ é Âå Â使ç¨ä¸Âé Â表ä¸ÂçÂÂæ¨Âè¨Â碼è¨Âå®ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ã 1 å°Â輸堥è¨Âå®Âçºé»è¦Âæ©Âã 2 æÂÂä½ TV æÂÂéÂ括Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠SETUP ã é»è¦Âæ©Âé Âè¨Âç«é¢顯示å¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨ä¸Âï¼ÂèÂÂç®åÂÂ製é åÂÂ代碼顯 示å¨液æÂ¶è¢å¹Âä¸Âã 3 使ç¨æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµ輸堥é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂ製é åÂÂ代碼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ ENTER ã éÂÂæÂ¼è£½é åÂÂ代碼渠å®ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±ä¸Âä¸Âé ÂçÂÂ表格ã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¾ æÂ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ以ä¸ÂçÂÂ製é åÂÂ代碼ï¼Âè«Â輸堥渠å®ä¸ÂçÂÂ第 ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ è¥表ä¸Âæ²ÂæÂÂæÂ¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂ製é åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ稱ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¡æ³Â使ç¨æÂ¤ éÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂÂæÂ§é»è¦Âæ©Âã 4 å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨å°ÂæºÂé»è¦Âæ©Âï¼ÂæÂÂ丠î SOURCE ï¼Â確èªÂéÂÂæÂ§ å¨æÂ¯å¦å¯ç¨ã èÂ¥éÂÂæÂ§å¨çÂÂè¨Âå®ÂæÂ£ç¢ºï¼Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæ©Âã èÂ¥æÂªéÂÂæ©Âï¼Â丠åºç¾堶ä»Âæ¨Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Â使ç¨æÂ°ä»£ç¢¼ä¸¦éÂÂè¤ÂæÂ¥é© 1 ã éÂÂ註 1 è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂ卿ÂÂï¼Âä¸Âè«ÂæÂ¤è¨Âå®Âå¼çºä½Âï¼Â顯示è£Âç½®çÂÂ顯示å¹Â齿ÂÂè®ÂæÂÂã RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SLEEP S l e e p --- -- TV TV PRESET 3 5 1 EXIT ENTER CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµ ENTER 製é åÂÂ代碼 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 40 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 41 ChH é»è¦Âæ©Âé Âè¨Â代碼表 è«Â注æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂå®ÂæÂ£ç¢ºé Âè¨Â代碼å¾Âï¼Âå¯è½åªæÂÂç¹å®ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½å¯ä¾ÂæÂ§å¶ï¼ÂæÂÂè 表ä¸ÂçÂÂ製é åÂÂ代碼ç¡æ³Âç¨æÂ¼æÂ¨ç®åÂÂçÂÂæ©Â種ã 製é å 代碼 製é å 代碼 Admiral 003, 004, 005 Aiwa 006, 007, 008 Akai 009, 010 Alba 011 AOC 012 Bell&Howell 013, 014 Bestar 015 Blaupunkt 016, 017 Blue sky 018 Brandt 019 Brocsonic 020, 021 Bush 022 Clatronic 023 Craig 024, 025, 026, 027 Croslex 028 Curtis Mathis 029, 030, 031 Daewoo 032, 033, 034, 035, 036, 037 Daytron 038 Dual 039, 040 Emerson 041, 042, 043, 044, 045, 046, 047 Ferguson 048, 049, 050 First line 051 Fisher 052, 053 Fraba 054 Fujitsu General 055 Funai 056, 057, 058, 059, 060 GE 061, 062, 063, 064, 065 Goldstar 066, 067, 068, 069, 070 Goodmans 071, 072, 073 Grundig 074, 075, 076 Hitachi 077, 078, 079, 080, 081, 082 HYUNDAI 083 ICE 084 Irradio 085 Itt 086, 087 JC Penny 088, 089, 090, 091 JVC 092, 093, 094, 095, 096, 097 Kendo 098 KTV 099, 100, 101 LG 102 Loewe 103, 104, 105 LXI 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111 Magnavox 112, 113, 114, 115 Mark 116 Matsui 117, 118 Medion 119 Mitsubishi 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126 Mivar 127 NEC 128, 129, 130, 131 Nokia 086, 087, 132, 133, 134 Nokia Oceanic 135, 136 Nordmende 137, 138, 139 Okano 140 Onwa 141 Orion 142 Panasonic 143, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150 Philco 151, 152, 153 Philips 154, 155, 156 Phonola 157 Portland 158, 159 Proscan 160 Quasar 161, 162 Radio 163 Radio Shack 164, 165, 166, 167 Radiola 168 RCA 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175 SABA 176, 177, 178, 179, 180 Samsung 181, 182, 183, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188 Sanyo 189, 190, 191, 192, 193, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198 Schneider 199, 200, 201, 202 Scott 203, 204 Sharp 205, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211 Siemens 212 Signature 213, 214 Sony 215, 216 Sylvania 217, 218, 219 Symphonic 220 Tatung 221 Telefunken 222, 223, 224, 225 Thomson 226, 227 Thorn 228 Toshiba 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234 Universum 235 Videch 236, 237, 238 W.Whouse 239 Wards 240, 241, 242, 243 Watson 244 Yamaha 245, 246, 247, 248, 249 Zenith 250, 251 PIONEER 001, 002 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 41 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 42 ChH éÂÂè¨Â系統 使ç¨æÂ¤ç¨ÂåºÂå¯å°ÂæÂÂæÂÂ系統è¨Âå®Âå¼æÂ¢å¾©è³åº廠è¨Âå®Âã 1 éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ系統黿ºÂã 2 æÂÂä½ INPUT SELECTOR ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂä¸Â顯示è£Âç½®ä¸Âç î STANDBY/ON æÂÂéµã ä¸Â次éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ黿ºÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂ系統çÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼é½æÂÂéÂÂæÂ°è¨Âå®Âã å®Âè£ÂèÂÂç¶Âè· å®Âè£ÂæÂÂ示 æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¸ÂæÂÂæÂ¨è½夠å¨æÂ¥å¾Â享åÂÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±æÂÂ帶ä¾ÂçÂÂæ¨Âè¶£ï¼Âå æÂ¤ 鏿ÂÂå®Âè£Âå°é»ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Âè¨Âä½Â以ä¸Âè¦Âé»Âï¼ è«Â⦠î å¨éÂÂ風è¯好çÂÂæÂ¿éÂÂ堧使ç¨æÂ¬ç³»çµ±ã î å°ÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±æÂ¾å¨穩åºãÂÂå¹³å¦çÂÂæ°´å¹³é¢ï¼Âå¦Âæ¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂç½®ç©æ«ÂæÂÂé³ é¿æÂ¶ä¸ ã è«Âå¿â¦ î æÂ¼é«Â溫æÂÂæ¿Âæ°£éÂÂçÂÂå°æÂ¹ä½¿ç¨æÂ¬ç³»çµ±ï¼Âå æÂ¾Â¾å°Âç©åÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂ ç¢çÂÂç±æºÂçÂÂéÂȌ¨ç¢åÂÂã î å°ÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±æÂ¾å¨çªÂå°æÂÂå ¶ä»Âå¯è½åÂÂé½å Âç´å°Âä¹ÂèÂÂã î å¨ç°塵éÂÂå¤ÂæÂÂéÂÂæÂ¼æ½®æ¿ÂçÂÂç°å¢Âä¸Â使ç¨æÂ¬ç³»çµ±ã î å°ÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±ç´æÂ¥æÂ¾å¨æÂ´å¤§å¨ä¸ÂæÂ¹ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂ¾å¨堶ä»Â使ç¨æÂÂæÂÂè®Âç± çÂÂç«Âé«Âè²系統è£Âç½®ä¸Âã î å¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂ顯示å¨éÂÂè¿Â使ç¨æÂ¬ç³»çµ±ï¼Âå¦åÂÂå¯è½æÂÂç¢çÂÂå¹²æÂ¾ ï¼Â尤堶æÂ¯ä½¿ç¨室堧天ç·ÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã î å¨å»ÂæÂ¿æÂÂå ¶ä»Âå¯è½使系統æÂ´é²æÂ¼æ²¹ç ÂæÂÂè¸氣çÂÂå°æÂ¹ä½¿ç¨æÂ¬ 系統ã î å°ÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±æÂ¾å¨åÂÂéÂÂçÂÂå°毯ä¸ÂæÂÂç¨å¸ÂèÂÂä½Âï¼Â以å Âé»ç¤Â系統ç æÂ£ç±ã î å°Â系統æÂ¾å¨ä¸Â平穩çÂÂ表é¢ï¼ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»Âé¢ç©Âç¡æ³ÂæÂ¯æÂÂ系統åÂÂå 蠳æÂ¶çÂÂ表é¢ä¸Âã ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂ格张以ä¸ÂæÂ¯æÂ¨å¨ DVD ä¸Âå¯以æÂ¾å°çÂÂæÂÂé DVD ãÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶å¨ã é£æÂ¥ç·ÂãÂÂé¸å°廣æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂ影帶çÂÂ主è¦Âç°ç¹Âè²格å¼Âç°¡è¦Â說æÂ ã Dolby Dolby æÂÂè¡ÂçÂÂ說æÂÂå¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂ示ã å¦ÂéÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Âé 訪 www.dolby.com ã Dolby Digital Dolby Digital çºé»影é¢åÂÂå®¶ä¸ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ DVD èÂÂæÂ¸ä½Â廣æÂÂé³軠常ç¨çÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂæÂ¸ä½Âé³è¨Â編碼æÂÂè¡Âã å®ÂæÂÂä¾Âå ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¨ç«ÂçÂÂè² éÂÂï¼Âç±äºÂÃ¥ÂÂå ¨é³åÂÂè²éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ主è¦Âä¾Âæ·±æ²ÂãÂÂéÂÂéÂÂçÂÂé³æÂ ä½¿ç¨çÂÂç¹殠LFE ï¼Âä½Âé »çÂÂæÂÂæÂÂï¼Âè²éÂÂæÂÂçµÂæÂÂï¼Âå æÂ¤æÂÂçº Dolby Digital ã 5.1 è²éÂÂãÂÂä¸Âè©ÂçÂÂç±ä¾Âã é¤äºÂä¸Âè¿°çÂÂæ ¼å¼Âç¹é»Âä¹Âå¤Âï¼ Dolby Digital 解碼卿ÂÂä¾Âè å®é³ãÂÂç«Âé«Âè²åÂÂä¾Âèªå¤Â種ä½Âå ÂçÂÂèÂÂè²éÂÂç Dolby Pro Logic é³è¨Âç¸容çÂÂ縮混åÂÂè½ã å¦ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¹é»Â稱çº Dialog Normalization ï¼Âå°Â話æÂ£å¸¸åÂÂï¼ ï¼ÂæÂÂ¹é»Âæ ¹æÂÂç¸å°ÂæÂ¼å ¶å³° å¼ä½ÂæºÂçÂÂç¯Âç®ä¸Âä¹Âå¹³åÂÂä½ÂæºÂä¾Âæ¸Âå°Âç¯Âç®çÂÂè²é³ï¼Â以便é å°ä¸Âè´çÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾ä½ÂæºÂã Dolby Pro Logic II å Dolby Surround Dolby Pro Logic IIx æÂ¯ Dolby Pro Logic II ï¼Âå Dolby Pro Logic @解碼 系統çÂÂæÂ¹è¯çÂÂã ç±æÂ¼æÂ¡ç¨åµæÂ°ç ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé 輯ãÂÂé»路ï¼ÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±å¯以å¾Â以ä¸ÂçÂÂä¾ÂæºÂä¸ÂæÂ·åÂÂåºç°ç¹Âé³ æÂÂ@⢠Dolby Pro Logic ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂèª任ä½Âç«Âé«Âè²ä¾ÂæºÂä¹ 4.1 è²éÂÂé³ æÂÂï¼ å®è²éÂÂ@⢠Dolby Pro Logic II ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂèª任ä½Âç«Âé«Âè²ä¾ÂæºÂä¹ 5.1 è²é é³æÂ ï¼Âç«Âé«Âç°ç¹Âè²@使ç¨éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼Âç±æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ä¸ÂçÂÂä½Âé³管ç ç¢ç ã .1 ãÂÂéÂÂä½Âé³è²é Dolby Surround æÂ¯å¨ç«Âé«Âè²é³è»Âå §åµÂå ¥ç°ç¹Âè²è³Âè¨Âç 編 碼 系統@Dolby Pro Logic 解碼å¨使ç¨æÂ¤ç³»çµ±æÂÂä¾ÂæÂ´ç´°ç·» çÂÂå¢Âå¼·ç°ç¹Âè²èÂÂè½æÂÂæÂÂã Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus æÂ¯ä½¿ç¨æÂ¼æÂÂæÂÂé«Âå³çÂÂç¯Âç®åÂÂåªÂé«ÂçÂÂ丠ä¸Â代é³è¨ÂæÂÂè¡Âã éÂÂ種æÂÂè¡ÂçµÂÃ¥ÂÂäºÂæÂÂçÂÂï¼Â以符åÂÂæÂªä¾ÂéÂÂ覠強大åÂÂè½èÂÂ使ç¨å½ÂæÂ§çÂÂ廣æÂÂéÂÂæ±Âï¼Âè½實äºÂæÂªä¾Âé«Âå³çÂÂ丠代ä¸ÂæÂÂæÂÂå¾ çÂÂå ¨æÂ¹ä½Â鳿ÂÂæ½ÂÃ¥ÂÂã Dolby Digital Plus 以堨ç ç DVD è HD 廣æÂÂçÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂæ¨Â溠Dolby Digital çº建ç«Âåº ç¤Âï¼Â並éÂÂå°Âä¸Âä¸Â代çÂÂå½±é³æÂ¥æÂ¶å¨èÂÂè¨Âè¨Âï¼Âä½Âä»Âç¶è½èÂÂç® Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂçÂÂå½±é³æÂ¥æÂ¶å¨ç¸容ã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 42 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 43 ChH Dolby Digital Plus æÂÂä¾Âå¤Âé 7.1 è²é @* ï¼ÂçÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂé³訠編åºÂè½åÂÂï¼Â並以æÂÂ大å¯è½ç 6 Mbps æ½Âå¨ä½Âå ÂçÂÂã HD DVD ä¸Âé«Âé 3 Mbps Ã¥ÂÂèÂÂå Âç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âé«Âé 1.7 Mbps BD 丠çÂÂæÂÂ大ä½Âå ÂçÂÂæÂÂè½æÂ¯æÂ´å®ä¸Â編碼ä½Âå ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂå¤Â種編åºÂ@並ä¸Âå¨ç¾æÂÂç Dolby Digital 系統ä¸Â輸åºç¨æÂ¼æÂÂæÂ¾ç Dolby Digital ä½Âå ÂæµÂã Dolby Digital Plus å¯以精æºÂå°éÂÂç¾ æÂÂæÂ®åÂÂ製ä½Â人æÂ³è¦ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé³ã å®Âä¹ÂæÂÂæÂÂå ·åÂÂç¨ç«Âè²éÂÂ輸åºçÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂ鳿ÂÂãÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂå¼Âæ··é³ èÂÂå Âé²系統ä¸ÂçÂÂ串æµÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã é«Âå³çÂÂå¤ÂåªÂé«Âä»Âé¢ ï¼ HDMI ï¼ æÂ¯æÂ´çÂÂå®ç·Âå¼ÂæÂ¸ä½Âé£æÂ¥å¯ç¨æÂ¼é«Âå³çÂÂé³è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âè¨Âã Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD æÂ¯éÂÂå°Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â代çÂÂé«Âå³çÂÂå Âç¢ÂçÂÂèÂÂéÂÂç¼ç æÂ°ä¸Â代ç¡æÂÂ失編碼æÂÂè¡Âã Dolby TrueHD 帶ä¾ÂéÂÂæÂ¼äººå¿Â丠ä½Âå ÂçÂÂç´Â媲ç¾ÂéÂÂé³室製ä½ÂçÂÂè²é³ï¼Â並以ä¸Âä¸Â代çÂÂé«Âå³ç å Âç¢ÂçÂÂå³éÂÂåºçÂÂ實çÂÂé«Âå³çÂÂå¨Âæ¨Âé«Âé©Âã çµÂÃ¥ÂÂé«Âå³çÂÂè¦Â訠æÂÂï¼ Dolby TrueHD 以令人é©Âè±ÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé«Âå³çÂÂå½±åÂÂï¼ÂæÂ ä¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂªæÂÂçÂÂå®¶åºÂé»影é¢é«Âé©Âã å®ÂæÂ¯æÂ´é«Âé 18 Mbps çÂÂä½Âå ÂçÂÂï¼ÂèÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂ製é«ÂéÂÂå «åÂÂå ¨ é³åÂÂè²é @* ï¼ ï¼Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂé½æÂ¯ 24 ä½Âå  /96 kHz é³è¨Âã å®ÂæÂÂæÂÂ廣æ³ÂçÂÂä¸Âç¹¼è³ÂæÂÂï¼Âå æÂ¬å°Â話æÂ£å¸¸åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ§ å¶ã é«Âå³çÂÂå¤ÂåªÂé«Âä»Âé¢ ï¼ HDMI ï¼ÂæÂ¯æÂ´çÂÂå®ç·Âå¼ÂæÂ¸ä½Âé£ æÂ¥å¯ç¨æÂ¼é«Âå³çÂÂé³è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âè¨Âã * HD DVD Ã¥ÂÂèÂÂå Âç¢ÂçÂÂæ¨ÂæºÂç®åÂÂå°Âå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂ大è²éÂÂæÂ¸é å¶å¨堫åÂÂï¼Âè Dolby Digital Plus å Dolby TrueHD æÂ¯æÂ´ è¶ éÂÂå «åÂÂè²éÂÂã ç± Dolby Laboratories æÂÂæ¬Â製é ã ãÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âã ã ã Dolby ãÂÂã ã Pro Logic ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé D æ¨ÂèªÂæÂ¯ Dolby Laboratories çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã DTS Dolby æÂÂè¡ÂçÂÂ說æÂÂå¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂ示ã å¦ÂéÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Âé 訪網章www.dtstech.com ã DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround æÂ¯ä¾Âèª DTS Inc. ç 5.1 è²éÂÂé³è¨Âç·¨ 碼系統ï¼Âç®åÂÂ廣æ³Â使ç¨æÂ¼ DVD-Video ã DVD-Audio ã 5.1 è²éÂÂ鳿¨Âç¢ÂçÂÂãÂÂæÂ¸ä½Â廣æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»è¦ÂéÂÂæÂ²ã å®Âå¯以æÂÂä¾Âå Âå ç¨ç«ÂçÂÂè²éÂÂï¼Âç±äºÂÃ¥ÂÂå ¨é³åÂÂè²éÂÂå ä¸Âä¸Âå LFE è²éÂÂæÂÂçµ æÂÂã 使ç¨ä½Âå£Â縮çÂÂå¾Âå°è¼Â好çÂÂé³質ï¼Â並卿ÂÂæÂ¾æÂÂ以è¼Âé« çÂÂéÂÂçÂÂå³éÂÂè²é³ã DTS-ES DTS-ES ï¼ ES 代表æÂ´å±Âç°ç¹Âè²ï¼ÂæÂ¯ä¸Â種å¯以尠DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 å DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 編碼ä¾ÂæºÂ解碼çÂÂ解碼 å¨ã DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 以å®Âå ¨åÂÂé¢ ï¼Âç¨ç«Âï¼ÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè² å¾Âè²éÂÂæÂÂä¾ ãÂÂçÂÂ實çÂÂã 6.1 è²éÂÂè²é³ã DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 æÂÂæÂÂèÂÂç°ç¹Âè²左î¿å³è²éÂÂå½¢æÂÂç©é£çÂÂç°ç¹Âè²å¾Âè²éÂÂã é 堩種鳿ºÂé½èÂÂå³統ç DTS 5.1 è²éÂÂ解碼å¨ç¸容ã DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 å¯以ç¢çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèª任ä½Âç©é£å¼Âç«Âé«Âè²é³溠ï¼Âä¾Â妠è¦Âè¨ÂæÂÂé»è¦Âï¼Âè 5.1 è²éÂÂ鳿ºÂç 6.1 è²éÂÂç°ç¹Âè²ã èÂÂ丠å®Â使ç¨已編碼å¨é³æºÂä¸ÂçÂÂè²éÂÂè³Âè¨Âï¼Â並èªè¡ÂèÂÂçÂÂ以å¤æÂ· è²éÂÂçÂÂå®Âä½ ï¼Â使ç¨éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼Âç±æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ ä¸ÂçÂÂä½Âé³管çÂÂç¢ç ã .1 ãÂÂéÂÂä½Âé³è²éÂÂï¼ ã å¦ÂæÂÂ使ç¨堩å è²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂï¼Â使ç¨ DTS Neo:6 æÂÂæÂÂä¾Âå ©åÂÂ模张ï¼Âé»影é¢è é³æ¨Âï¼ ã DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 æÂ¯åÂÂå§ DTS Digital Surround çÂÂ延伸ï¼Â使ç¨ DTS 96/24 解碼卿ÂÂä¾Âé«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ質 96 kHz/24 ä½Âå Âé³訠ã æÂ¤æ ¼ å¼Âä¹Âå®Âå ¨åÂÂå¾Âç¸容æÂ¼æÂÂæÂÂç®åÂÂçÂÂ解碼å¨ã éÂÂ表示 DVD æÂ æÂ¾å¨å¯以使ç¨å³統ç DTS 5.1 è²éÂÂ解碼卿ÂÂæÂ¾æÂ¤è»Âé«Âã DTS-EXPRESS DTS-EXPRESS æÂ¯ä¸Â種ä½Âä½Âå ÂçÂÂ解碼æÂÂè¡Âï¼ÂæÂ¯æÂ´åºå®Âè³ÂæÂ å³輸çÂÂç 5.1 è²éÂÂã æÂ¤æ ¼æ ¼è HD DVD çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé³è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂå  ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂ次è¦Âé³è¨ÂæÂ´åÂÂï¼Âå°Âå°Âä¾ÂçÂÂ廣æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨ÂæÂ¶é³è¨Â堧容æÂ åÂÂæ½Âå¨çÂÂé©ç¨æÂ§ã DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio æÂÂè¡ÂçºèÂÂè½è 帶ä¾Âå¨å°Âæ¥ÂéÂÂé³室 ä¸ÂéÂÂ製çÂÂ主è¦Â鳿ºÂï¼Âä¸Âä½ÂæÂªæÂÂ失任ä½Âè³ÂæÂÂä¸Âä¿ÂçÂÂäºÂé³ 質ã DTS-HD Master Audio æÂ¡ç¨å¯è®Âè³ÂæÂÂå³輸çÂÂï¼Â以é 趠éÂÂæ¨Â溠DVD çÂÂèÂÂå Âç¢ÂçÂÂ格张ï¼ÂæÂÂ大å³輸ç 24.5 Mbps ï¼ å HD-DVD 格张ï¼ÂæÂÂ大å³輸ç 18.0 Mbps ï¼ÂçÂÂéÂÂçÂÂå³é è³ÂæÂÂã éÂÂäºÂé«Âè³ÂæÂÂå³輸éÂÂçÂÂ卿²ÂæÂÂä»»ä½Âè³ÂæÂÂæÂÂ失çÂÂæÂ æ³ ä¸Âå³é 96 kHz/24 ä½Âå Âç 7.1 è²éÂÂ鳿ºÂï¼ÂèÂÂä¸Âå®Âå ¨ç¡æÂ åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå§ÂçÂÂé³質 ã DTS-HD Master Audio æÂ¯ä¸Â種ç¡å¯åÂÂ代ç æÂÂè¡Âï¼Âå®Âå¯以ä¾Â鳿¨ÂæÂÂå½±çÂÂÃ¥Â愫Â人çÂÂéÂÂè¦Âå®ÂæÂ´éÂÂç¾åºç 實çÂÂè²é³ã â DTS âÂÂæÂ¯ DTS, Inc. çÂÂ註åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âï¼ â DTS-HD Master Audio â æÂ¯ DTS, Inc. çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 43 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 44 ChH æÂ éÂÂæÂÂé¤ 人åÂÂç¶Â常é¯å°Âä¸ÂæÂ£ç¢ºä¹ÂæÂÂä½Âç¶æÂÂ系統æÂ éÂÂæÂÂç°常ã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨èªÂçºæÂ¬æ©ÂæÂÂä»»ä½Âç°常ä¹ÂèÂÂï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂ以ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé»Âé²è¡Â檢æÂ¥ã æÂÂæÂ åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âå¯è½åºå¨堶ä»Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âã è«Âä»Â細檢æÂ¥å ¶ä»Â使ç¨ä¸ÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂȌ¨ã å¦ÂæÂÂå¨檢æÂ¥ä»¥ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé»Âå¾Âä»Âç¡æ³ÂæÂ¹åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«Âå°± è¿Â洽詢æÂ¨çÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¾Â代çºç¶Âä¿®ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±æÂ¯å çºåÂÂå°éÂÂéÂȍÂÂå¤Âä¾ÂæÂÂæÂÂè´ç¡æ³ÂæÂ£å¸¸æÂÂä½Âï¼Âè«Âå°Â黿ºÂæÂÂé Âå¾Â輸åºæÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå»ï¼Â以åÂÂ復æÂ£å¸¸ çÂÂæÂÂä½ÂçÂÂæ Âã â¢ èÂ¥æÂ¯èÂÂ鳿ÂÂç¸éÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«Âä¹Âä¸Â併檢æÂ¥é³æÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾è£Âç½®çÂÂè¨Âå®Âã å¦ÂéÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±è£Âç½®çÂÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã ä¸Âè¬ Ã¥ÂÂ顠解決辦泠黿ºÂç¡æ³ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂçªÂç¶éÂÂæ© ï¼Âå åÂÂæÂÂå¯è½顯示ä¸Âé¯誤è¨ÂæÂ¯ï¼ ã æÂÂ顯示å¹ÂçªÂç¶çÂÂæ» ï¼ÂèÂÂä¸Âæ²ÂæÂ è¼¸åº任ä½Âè²é³ ï¼ POWER ON æÂÂ示çÂÂ亮起 ï¼ÂèÂÂè²ï¼Âå HDMI æÂÂ示çÂÂ亮起 ï¼Âç´ è²@ã â¢ æÂ¥éÂÂæÂ¬æ©Â黿ºÂï¼ÂçÂÂå¾ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾ÂéÂÂæÂ°éÂÂæ©Âã â¢ 確å®Â主æ©Âä¸ÂçÂÂç·ÂæÂÂç¡é¬Âè«çÂÂæÂ å½¢ã å¦ÂæÂÂé¬Âè«ï¼Âå¯è½æÂÂé æÂÂ系統èªåÂÂéÂÂæ©Âã â¢ 檢æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥æÂ¯å¦æÂ£ç¢ºã â¢ è«Â確å®ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Âé³å¨åÂÂæÂ¯å¦æÂÂ足夠çÂÂéÂÂ風空éÂÂã â¢ 確å®Â主黿ºÂçÂÂé»å£Â確實é©ç¨æÂ¼æÂ¬æ©Â種ã â¢ 試èÂÂéÂÂä½Âé³éÂÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂä»Âç¡æ³Â解決åÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«Âå°ÂæÂ¬æ©ÂæÂÂè³æÂÂè¿ÂçÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂæÂ¨çÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂèÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂç¶ ä¿®ã â¢ è«Âå¿堵ä½ÂåºÂé¨çÂÂé²氣å£åÂÂæÂ¬æ©ÂèÂÂé¢çÂÂæÂÂæ°£å£ã é¸æÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½å¾Âï¼Âæ²ÂæÂÂè²é³輸 åºã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨æÂ£å¨使ç¨ç·Â路輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Â確å®Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂ¹å¼ÂæÂ£ç¢ºä¸¦èª¿æÂ´å¤Âé¨è¨Âå ï¼Âä¾Âå¦Âå¯ æÂÂå¼ÂæÂÂæÂ¾å¨ï¼ÂçÂÂé³é ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 33 é Âä¸Âç é£æÂ¥è¼Âå©è¨Âå ï¼Âã â¢ 調é«Âé³éÂÂã â¢ HDMI 模å¼Âè¨Âå®Âçº Through Mode ï¼Â第 36 é Âï¼ æÂ ï¼ èÂÂæÂ¬æ©Âé£æÂ¥çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æ²ÂæÂÂ輸åº任ä½Âè² é³ã â¢ 使ç¨ HDMI 飿ÂÂ¥ DVI è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âæ²ÂæÂÂ輸åº任ä½Âè²é³ã â¢ æÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ä¸Âç MUTE 以éÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé³åÂÂè½ã ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨æÂªè¼¸åº任ä½Âè² é³ã â¢ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 30 é Âä¸Âç è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 以檢æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨ä½ÂæºÂã â¢ 檢æÂ¥æÂ¨æÂ¯å¦é¸æÂ Stereo 模张ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 24 é Âä¸Âç 以ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂèÂÂè½ ï¼ ã â¢ æÂ£ç¢ºå°å°ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¥ä¸ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 8 é Âä¸Âç æÂ¥ç· ï¼ ã â¢ 使ç¨å Âå¸æÂ¸ä½Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥å¤Âé¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Â檢æÂ¥å¤Âé¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé³è¨Â輸åºè HDMI è¨Âå®Âã ç¡æ³Â使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨é²è¡ÂæÂÂæÂ§ã â¢ æÂ´æÂÂé»池ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 21 é Âä¸Âç è£Âå ¥éÂÂæÂ§å¨é»池ï¼Âã â¢ è«Âå¨ 7 m å §çÂÂç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Â以 30 ð çÂÂè§Â度å°ÂæºÂéÂÂæÂ§æÂÂæÂÂ卿ÂÂä½ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 22 é Âä¸Âç 使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§ å¨ ï¼Âã â¢ ç§»é¤éÂÂç¤Âç©æÂÂå¾Âå ¶ä»Âä½Âç½®æÂÂä½Âã â¢ é¿å ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æÂ¿ä¸ÂçÂÂéÂÂæÂ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨åÂÂå°é½å Âç´å°Âã â¢ æÂÂä½Âé£æÂ¥è³ CONTROL OUT æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Âå ÂéÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Â確å®Âå·²æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ§å¶é£æÂ¥ç·Âå HDMI æÂÂé¡Âæ¯Âé³è¨Âé£æÂ¥ç· ï¼Â第 35 é Âï¼ ã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 44 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 45 ChH 調諧å¨ HDMI Ã¥ÂÂ顠解決辦泠æÂ¶è½éÂȌ°廣æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ顯çÂÂé é³ã â¢ è«ÂæÂ¥ä¸ AM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 8 é Âä¸Âç æÂ¥ç· ï¼ ä¸¦å 以調æÂ´æÂ¹åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä½Âç½® @以å¾Âå°æÂÂä½³çÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶ æÂÂæÂÂã æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以å¦å¤ÂæÂ¥ä¸Âæ¢Â堧鍿ÂÂå¤Âé¨ AM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 35 é Âä¸Âç é£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥å¤©ç· ï¼ ã â¢ å®Â堨伸å±Âé FM ç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天ç·Âï¼Â調æÂ´æÂÂä½³æÂ¥æÂ¶çÂÂä½Âç½®ï¼Âç¶å¾Âåºå®ÂæÂ¼çÂÂä¸Âã æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以å¦å¤ÂæÂ¥ä¸ çµÂå¤ÂæÂÂ¥ FM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 35 é Âä¸Âç é£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥å¤©ç· ï¼ ã â¢ éÂÂéÂÂå ¶ä»Âå¯è½é æÂÂéÂÂè¨ÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå°Â堶移走ã â¢ 調諧éÂÂéÂÂä¸Âé©ç¨æÂ¼æÂ¨æÂÂå¨åÂÂå®¶æÂÂå°åÂÂã èÂ¥è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ調諧éÂÂéÂÂï¼ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 29 é Âä¸Âç æÂ¹è®Âé »ç éÂÂé ã èªåÂÂ調諧åÂÂè½ç¡æ³ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶å°æÂÂ亠éÂȌ°ã â¢ éÂȌ°è¨ÂèÂÂ微弱ã èªåÂÂ調諧åÂÂè½å è½åµ測å°è¨ÂèÂÂç¼å°Âè¯好çÂÂç¡ç·ÂéÂȌ°ã èÂ¥è¦Âç²å¾ÂæÂ´å éÂÂæÂ çÂÂ調諧æ¢Âä»¶ï¼Âå¯æÂ¥ä¸Âä¸ÂçµÂ室å¤Â天ç·Âã æÂ éÂÂç¾象 解決辦泠æ²ÂæÂÂå½±åÂÂæÂÂè²é³ã â¢ æÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯ HDCP ç¸容è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 檢æÂ¥æÂ¨æÂ£å¨é£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¯å¦çº HDCP ç¸容訠åÂÂã â¢ æÂ¯å¦å¯以æÂÂé ÂæÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨使ç¨ ï¼Âå³使æÂ¯ HDCP ç¸容è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè¦Âé£æÂ¥çÂÂä¾ÂæºÂè¨Âå èÂÂå®Âã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂå° HDMI è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂç´æÂ¥é£æÂ¥è³顯示卿ÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âä»Âç¶åÂÂå¨ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ顯示å¨çÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂè¯絡製é åÂÂ以å°Âæ±ÂæÂ¯æÂ´ã æ²ÂæÂÂè²é³ï¼ÂæÂÂè²é³çªÂç¶æ¶Â失ã â¢ 檢æÂÂ¥ HDMI 模å¼ÂæÂ¯å¦è¨Âå®Âçº AMP Mode / Through Mode ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¯ DVI è£Âç½®ï¼Âè«Â使ç¨å¦å¤ÂçÂÂé£æÂ¥æÂ¹å¼Âé£æÂ¥é³è¨Âã â¢ 檢æÂ¥ä¾ÂæºÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé³è¨Â輸åºè¨Âå®Âã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 45 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 46 ChH 顯示çÂÂè¨ÂæÂ¯ è¨ÂæÂ¯ 說æÂ 192kHz PCM SACD DTS-HD DTS Express Dolby T rueHD Dolby D éÂÂäºÂè¨ÂæÂ¯å¨æÂ¨æÂÂä½ÂèÂÂæÂ£å¨æÂÂæÂ¾çÂÂé³è¨Âä¾ÂæºÂä¸Âç¸容çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½æÂÂ顯示ã No MIC æÂªæÂ¥ä¸ MCACC è¨Âå®Â麥å Â風æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂ丠MCACC æÂÂ顯示æÂ¬è¨ÂæÂ¯ã Muting æÂ¬æ©ÂéÂÂ鳿ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂ丠TEST TONE æÂ MCACC æÂÂ顯示æÂ¬è¨ÂæÂ¯ã 2ch Only æÂÂä½Âå é©ç¨æÂ¼éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âå ç®åÂÂä¾ÂæºÂçºå¤Âè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂèÂÂç¡æ³Âé²è¡Âã Exit æÂ¤è¨ÂæÂ¯æÂÂå¨é¸å®éÂÂç½®ä¸Â段æÂÂéÂÂå¾ÂèªåÂÂéÂÂåºæÂÂåºç¾ã HDMI Through ç¶ HDMI 模å¼Âè®Âçºç´éÂÂ模å¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âè®ÂæÂ´èÂÂè²模å¼ÂãÂÂé³éÂÂæÂÂæÂÂäºÂè²é³è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂ顯示æÂ¬è¨ÂæÂ¯ã Unknow ç¡æ³ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Â硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂæÂ£å¨æÂÂæÂ¾å §å®¹çÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂè³Âè¨Âã No Genre æÂªè¨Âå®Â硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂæÂ£å¨æÂÂæÂ¾å §å®¹çÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂã HDMI C.ERR 2C* é£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂ模å¼Âä¸Âç¸容ã CanâÂÂt use ⢠æÂ¨åÂÂ試å°Âä¸ÂæÂ¯æÂ´çÂÂæÂ¤åÂÂè½çÂÂä¾ÂæºÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂ使ç¨é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂ模å¼Âã â¢ ä¾ÂæºÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ£èÂÂæÂ¼ç¡æ³Â使ç¨é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂ模å¼ÂçÂÂæÂ æ³Âã â¢ æÂ¨åÂÂ試å¨æÂ¬æ©Â輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂæÂ¯ HDMI 以å¤ÂçÂÂä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂ使ç¨é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂ模å¼Âã â¢ æÂÂä½Âå ç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå®ÂèÂÂéÂÂå°ç¦ÂæÂ¢ã â¢ é³éÂÂè¶ é 51 æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂè½æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå°éÂÂå¶ã HDMI C.ERR 1** 檢æÂ¥é£æÂÂ¥ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂæÂ¹å¼ÂæÂ¯å¦æÂ£ç¢º ã å¦ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂæÂ¹å¼ÂæÂ£ç¢ºï¼Â表示æÂ¬æ©Âå¯è½已æÂÂ壠ã 妠æÂÂç¼çÂÂéÂÂ種æÂ æ³Âï¼Âè«Â洽詢å ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂå°±è¿ÂçÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂã Noisy! å èÂÂæÂ¯éÂÂé³太大èÂÂç¡æ³Âé Âå©å®ÂæÂ MCACC è¨Âå®Âã Error MIC! å¨ MCACC è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼Âå æÂªå°Â麥å Â風æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ£ç¢ºèÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯誤ã Error Speaker! å¨ MCACC è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼Âå æÂªå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ£ç¢ºèÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯誤ã Over T emp è«ÂéÂÂä½Âé³éÂÂã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸Â黿ºÂç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂ°æÂÂå ¥å¾Âç¡æ³Â解決éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âï¼Â表示æÂ¬æ©Âå¯è½已æÂÂå£Âã å¦ÂæÂÂç¼çÂÂéÂÂ種æÂ æ³Âï¼Âè«Â洽詢å ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂå°±è¿ÂçÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂã OC Error1 OC Error2 檢æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂ¯å¦çÂÂè·¯ã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂŽÂ¯èª¤è¨ÂæÂ¯æÂÂçºÂ顯示ï¼Âç¸éÂÂç¶Âä¿®äºÂå®Âè«Â洽詢æÂ¨çÂÂå Âé æÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂã *** BackUpERR ç¸éÂÂç¶Âä¿®äºÂå®Âè«Â洽詢æÂ¨çÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 46 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 47 ChH è¦Âæ ¼ SX-LX70W 鳿ÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ â¢ æÂ´å¤§å¨é¨å RMS Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂ輸åº ï¼ 8 è²éÂÂ輸åº@@åÂÂç½® ï¼ L/R ï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W ï¼ 50 W 50 W ï¼ ï¼ 1 kHz ï¼ 10 % T.H.D. ï¼ 8 ⦠@éÂÂéÂÂä¸Âç½® ï¼ CL/CR ï¼ . . . . . . . . . 100 W ï¼ 50 W 50 W ï¼ ï¼ 1 kHz ï¼ 10 % T.H.D. ï¼ 8 ⦠@ç°ç¹Âè² ï¼ L/R ï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W ï¼ 50 W 50 W ï¼ ï¼ 1 kHz ï¼ 10 % T.H.D. ï¼ 8 ⦠@éÂÂéÂÂä½Âé³ ï¼ÂéÂÂè²éÂÂï¼ . . . . . . . . . 100 W ï¼ 50 W 50 W ï¼ ï¼ 100 Hz ï¼ 10 % T.H.D. ï¼ 8 ⦠@⢠FM 調諧å¨é¨å 頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz è³ 108 MHz 天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ⦠ï¼Âä¸Â平衡张⢠AM 調諧å¨é¨å 頻çÂÂç¯ÂÃ¥Âʊȴ 9 kHz éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz è³ 1602 kHz 以 10 kHz éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz è³ 1700 kHz 天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 迴路天締⢠éÂÂä½Âé³é¨å é³箱 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ä½Âé³åÂÂå°Âè½å°å ï¼Âé²ç£Â@系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cm ï¼Âå®åÂÂ系統 æÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cm Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå x2 éÂȾ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz è³ 500 Hz æÂÂ大輸堥åÂÂç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W x2 ⢠輸堥î¿輸åºé¨å HDMI 端å 輸堥 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 æÂ¥è ³ x3 輸åº . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 æÂ¥è ³ ï¼ 5 V ï¼ 100 mA ï¼ å ¶ä»ÂæÂ¥é  ç³»çµ±æÂ¥é  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 æÂ¥è ³ é³è¨Â輸堥 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . å Âå¸ x2 ï¼ÂæÂ¸ä½Âï¼ RCA ï¼ 2 æÂ¥è ³ï¼ ï¼Âé¡Âæ¯Âï¼ æÂ§å¶輸åº . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . è¿·ä½ æÂÂå x2 顯示è£Âç½® 系統æÂ¥é  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 æÂ¥è ³ Ã¥ÂÂé³è¨Â輸åº . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . è¿·ä½ æÂÂå MCACC 輸堥 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . è¿·ä½ æÂÂå iPod 輸堥 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 æÂ¥è ³ ï¼ 12 V ï¼ 420 mA ï¼ â¢ å ¶ä» é»æºÂéÂÂæ± . . . . . . . . . . AC 110 V è³ 240 V ï¼ 50 Hz/60 Hz æ¶ÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 W å¾ æ©ÂçÂÂæ ÂçÂÂæ¶ÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.39 W ï¼ HDMI Control éÂÂï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.29 W ï¼ HDMI Control éÂÂ@尺寸 . . . 245 mm ï¼Â寬@x409 mm ï¼Âé«Âï¼ x600 mm ï¼Â深@éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.8 kg SSP-LX70ST è¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ x2 ï¼Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ x2 @⢠åÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ é³箱 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . å°ÂéÂÂå¼ÂæÂ¸æÂ¶å ï¼Âé²ç£Â@系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm ï¼Âå®åÂÂ系統 æÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå x3 éÂȾ åÂÂè²é . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠ä¸Â央è²é . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Hz è³ 20 kHz æÂÂ大輸堥åÂÂç åÂÂè²é . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W ä¸Â央è²é . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W 尺寸 . . . .122.5 mm ï¼Â寬@x89.5 mm ï¼Âé«Âï¼ x104 mm ï¼Â深@éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 kg ⢠ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ é³箱 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . å°ÂéÂÂå¼ÂæÂ¸æÂ¶å ï¼Âé²ç£Â@系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm ï¼Âå®åÂÂ系統 æÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå x2 éÂȾ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Hz è³ 20 kHz æÂÂ大輸堥åÂÂç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W 尺寸 . . . .122.5 mm ï¼Â寬@x89.5 mm ï¼Âé«Âï¼ x104 mm ï¼Â深@éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.44 kg é Âä»¶ ⢠é Âä»¶ç @AS-LX70 ï¼Âï¼ éÂÂæÂ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 AA/LR6 é¹¼æÂ§é»池. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 黿ºÂç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 顯示è£Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 AM 迴路天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 FM ç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 麥å Â風 ï¼Âç¨æÂ¼èªå MCACC è¨Âå®Âï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 HDMI é£æÂ¥ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 æÂ§å¶é£æÂ¥ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 顯示é£æÂ¥ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 å Âå¸æÂ¸ä½Âé£æÂ¥ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 iPod é£æÂ¥ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 æÂ¾ÂÂä½ÂæÂÂå â¢ æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ SX-LX70W ï¼Âå è£Â箱@渠æ½Â帠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 ⢠è¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ SSP-LX70ST ï¼Âå è£Â箱@æÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 æÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 鲿»Â墠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 èº絲 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Ã¥ÂÂ註 ⢠å ç¢åÂÂæÂ¹è¯ï¼Âè¦Âæ ¼èÂÂè¨Âè¨Âå¦ÂæÂÂè®ÂæÂ´ï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¦è¡ÂéÂÂçÂ¥ã æÂ¥æÂ¬å ÂéÂÂå ¬å¸åºçÂÂã çÂÂ欠é 2007 æÂ¥æÂ¬å ÂéÂÂå ¬å¸ã çÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂæÂÂã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 47 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
Printed in <ARC7765-A> Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2007 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, T okyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway , Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-441 1 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.1 1 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY . L TD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V . Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 50 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fir e or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_B_En W ARNING To prevent a fir e hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC to 35 úC ( 41 úF to 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference. HTP-LX70_En.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En CAUTION The î ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En W ARNING To prevent injur y , the receiver subwoofer must be securely attached to the floor in accordance with this operating instructions. HTP-LX70_En.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
4 En Contents Contents WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 01 Speaker Setup Guide Safety precautions when setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Home theater sound setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Standard surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Front surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Preparing the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Using the supplied speaker bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 When not using the supplied speaker bases . . . . . . 7 Connect the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Additional notes on speaker placement . . . . . . . . . . . 7 02 Connecting up Receiver subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Back of display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 03 Controls and displays Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Operating the receiver subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Operating the built-in FM/AM tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Operating Pioneer plasma televisions and TVs . . . . 17 Operating a Pioneer Blu-ray Disc player . . . . . . . . . 18 Operating a Pioneer DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Operating a Pioneer HDD/DVD Recorder . . . . . . . . 20 Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . 21 Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Operating the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Using the LCD touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 04 Getting started Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 05 Listening to your system Effective Sound (for optimum sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Center image setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using Advanced Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Genre Sync Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Using the Sound Retriever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Listening with MCACC Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using Midnight, Loudness and Quiet listening modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adjusting the bass and treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adjusting sound delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 06 Listening to the radio Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Improving poor FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Improving poor AM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Changing the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Memorizing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Changing the frequency step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 07 Surround sound settings Using the Sound Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Channel level setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Speaker distance setting1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Dynamic Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Dual mono setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . 32 LFE Attenuate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone . . . . 32 08 Other connections Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Connecting for digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Connecting an analog audio component . . . . . . . . 33 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Listening to an external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 About control out connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 HDMI mode setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 HTP-LX70_En.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En Contents 09 HDMI Control Making the HDMI Control connections . . . . . . . . . . 37 Setting the HDMI options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Setting the HDMI Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Setting the Auto Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Audio input settings from plasma televisions (TV Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Synchronized amp mode operations . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 10 Additional information Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Setting the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . 40 TV Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Displayed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 WhatâÂÂs in the box Please confirm that the following items are all supplied. Accessory box (AS-LX70): ⢠Remote control (page 15) ⢠AA/LR6 alkaline batteries x4 (page 21) ⢠Power cords x3 (page 12) ⢠Display unit (page 13) ⢠AM loop antenna (page 11) ⢠FM wire antenna (page 11) ⢠Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) (page 23) ⢠HDMI cable ⢠Control cable (page 35) ⢠Display cable (page 11) ⢠Optical digital cable (page 12) ⢠iPod cable (page 34) ⢠This operating instructions Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX70W) box: ⢠Cleaning cloth Speakers (SSP-LX70ST) box: ⢠Speakers (front/center x2, surround x2) ( page 6, 11) ⢠Speaker cables x6 (page 11) ⢠Speaker bases x4 (page 6) ⢠Non-skid pads x16 ( page 6, 7) ⢠Screws x4 (page 7) HTP-LX70_En.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Speaker Setup Guide 01 6 En Chapter 1 Speaker Setup Guide Safety precautions when setting up When assembling the speakers, lay them down flat on their side to avoid accidents or injury. Make sure to use a stable surface when assembling, setting up, and placing the speakers. Home theater sound setup Depending on the size and characteristics of your room, you can place your speakers in one of two ways using this system. Standard surround setup This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound. Front surround setup This setup is ideal when rear surround speaker placement isnâÂÂt possible or you want to avoid running long speaker cables in your listening area. Use this setup together with the Front Stage Surround Advance modes in page 26. Preparing the speakers This unit comes with speaker bases that can be used to adjust the speakers to the design of the room in which they are placed. Using the supplied speaker bases 1 Attach the non-skid pads to the speaker bases, as shown below. Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base of each speaker base. Surround (L) Surround (R) Front/center (L) Front/center (R) Listening position Listening position Receiver subwoofer Surround (L) Surround (R) Front/center (L) Front/center (R) Listening position Listening position Receiver subwoofer Each speaker base Non-skid pads x 16 HTP-LX70_En.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Speaker Setup Guide 01 7 En 2 Attach the speaker bases. Place the speaker atop a supplied speaker base, and fix the base in place by using one of the supplied screws. ⢠The supplied speaker bases come in two different shapes. You can determine the correct base for a speaker by checking if the screwâÂÂs location lines up correctly when the speaker is placed atop the base. (There are specific bases for the front/center (L) and surround speaker (R), and for the front/center (R) and surround speaker (L), with two of each type included.) When not using the supplied speaker bases ⢠Attach the non-skid pads to the base of each of the front/center and surround speakers (as shown). Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base of each speaker. Connect the speaker system Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly. After connecting everything, place the speakers as shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound. After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup (page 23) to complete your surround sound setup. Additional notes on speaker placement ⢠Install the main front left and right speakers at an equal distance from the TV. ⢠When using the Standard surround setup, install the surround speakers slightly above ear level for optimum effect. ⢠When using the Front surround setup, separate the left and right speakers by about 1.5 m for optimum effect. Precautions: ⢠Do not place the speaker on an unstable surface, as doing so may cause the speaker to fall and cause damage or bodily injury. ⢠All speakers supplied with this system are magnetically shielded. However, depending on the installation location, color distortion may occur if a speaker is installed extremely close to the screen of a television set. If this happens, turn the power switch of the television set OFF, and turn it ON after 15 min to 30 min. If the problem persists, place the speaker system away from the television set. ⢠For safety, make sure that there is no exposed bare speaker wire outside of the speaker terminals. ⢠Do not connect the supplied speakers with any other amplifier. This may result in malfunction or fire. ⢠Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system. ⢠The speaker system grill cannot be removed. Do not try to forcibly remove it since doing so may damage the grille. ⢠When cleaning the cabinet, use the provided cleaning cloth. Do not allow alcohol, thinner, benzene, or insecticides to come into contact with the surface, since finish discoloration may occur. Also, when using chemically impregnated cleaning cloths, follow their precautions carefully. Speaker Screw Sp eaker base Front/center and surround speakers Non-skid pads x 16 HTP-LX70_En.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 8 En Chapter 2 Connecting up Receiver subwoofer Side panel ⢠There is a cover over the connectors on the side panel. A. When making connections, lift the two hooks and remove the cover. B. Once connections are finished, line up the three positions and place the cover back in its original position. 1 CONTROL OUT jacks (x2) Connect other Pioneer components with the supplied control cable . 2 DIGITAL OPTICAL IN jacks (x2) To listen to optical digital audio, change the input to Digital 1 or Digital 2 . When the digital output jacks of your TV are connected to these jacks, set â TV Input â (see page 39). 3 AM LOOP antenna terminal 4 FM antenna socket 5 ANALOG AUDIO IN jacks Handle sound from an external component by using stereo audio code. To listen to analog audio, change the input to Analog . When the analog output jacks of your TV are connected to these jacks, set â TV Input â (see page 39). 6 SPEAKERS terminals Match the colors of the speaker cords to their respective connectors. 7 AC IN â Power inlet FRONT R R L RL LR L AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 ⦠FRONT CENTER SURROUND SUBWOOFER OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 OUT 1 OUT 2 SPEAKERS ( 8 ⦠) ANALOG AUDIO IN ANTENNA DIGIT AL CONTROL 1 2 5 6 7 4 3 AC IN A B HTP-LX70_En.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 9 En Rear panel 8 HDMI OUT connector Connect to a television that has an HDMI terminal. 9 HDMI IN connectors (x3) Use high-quality audio/video connection with compatible HDMI devices. To select this input, choose HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 . 10 SYSTEM connector Connect to the display unit. Back of display unit 1 SYSTEM connector Connect to the receiver subwoofer. 2 F.AUDIO input To listen to audio from an external component, connect with a stereo mini-plug cable. Once connected, the input automatically changes to Front Audio In . 3 iPod input terminal Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio source. When you connect an iPod, the input automatically changes to iPod . 4 MCACC SETUP MIC jack Use to connect the supplied microphone for the Auto MCACC setup (see page 23). HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 89 10 F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM 1 2 3 4 HTP-LX70_En.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 10 En Basic connections Important ⢠When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket. WARNING ⢠Pioneer bears no responsibility for accidents resulting from faulty assembly or installation, insufficient mounting strength of walls, mounting fixtures (or other building fixtures), misuse or natural disasters. HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 2 SYSTEM F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT INPUT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM 1 FL CL FR CR SR SL Listening position Listening position AM loop antenna FM antenna Rear panel Display unit Receiver subwoofer Display cable Front/center speaker (R) Front/center speaker (L) Surround speaker (R) Surround speaker (L) Side panel FRONT R R L RL LR L AM LOOP FRONT CENTER SURROUND SUB ANALOG AUDIO IN ANTENNA 3 4 HTP-LX70_En.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 11 En 1 Connect the display unit to the receiver subwoofer. Plug the display cable into the connector on the rear of the display unit, then plug the other end of the display cable into SYSTEM connector on the receiver subwoofer. Caution ⢠Do not attempt to attach the display unit to the wall. 2 Assemble the AM loop antenna. a. Bend the stand in the direction indicated by the arrow. b. Clip the loop onto the stand. c. If you want to fix to a wall or other surface, perform step b after first securing the stand with screws. It is recommended that you determine the reception strength before securing the stand with the screws. 3 Connect the AM and FM antennas 1 . a. Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM antenna terminal 2 . For each terminal, press down on the tab to open; insert the wire, then release to secure. b. Push the FM antenna 3 plug onto the center pin of the FM antenna socket. 4 Connect each speaker. ⢠Each speaker cable has a color-coded connector at one end and two wires at the other end. ⢠Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire. ⢠Connect the wires to the speaker. Each speaker in the illustration can be identified by means of the color- coded indicator provided on the rear-surface model label. Match the color-coded wire with the color indicator on the model label, then insert the color- coded wire into the red ( ) side and the other wire into the black ( â ) side. ⢠Connect the other end to the color-coded speaker terminals on the side of the receiver subwoofer. Make sure to insert completely. Be careful when inserting the speaker plug, as it must be inserted in the proper direction when being plugged into one of the terminals. Please make sure to connect correctly. Note 1⢠Keep antenna cables away from other cables, the display unit and receiver subwoofer. ⢠If reception with the supplied antenna is poor, see Improving poor FM reception and Improving poor AM sound on page 28 or Connecting external antennas on page 35. ⢠Do not attach any antenna other than the provided loop antenna, or an external antenna as described on page 35. 2⢠DonâÂÂt let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances. ⢠If radio reception is poor, you may be able improve it by re-inserting each antenna wire into the opposite terminal. ⢠For best reception, do not untwist the AM loop antenna wires or wrap them around the loop antenna. 3 To ensure optimum reception, make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit. a b c 1 2 3 Color-coded wire (Connect to speaker) Co lor-coded connector (Connect to receiver subwoof er) Black (âÂÂ) Red ( ) Color-coded wire HTP-LX70_En.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 12 En Caution ⢠These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage . To prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts. ⢠Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system. ⢠Do not connect the supplied speakers to any amplifier other than the one supplied with this system. Connection to any other amplifier may result in malfunction or fire. ⢠After connecting the plugs, pull lightly on the cables to make sure that the ends of the cables are securely connected to the terminals. Poor connections can create noise and interruptions in the sound. ⢠If the cablesâ wires happen to be pushed out of the terminals, allowing the wires to come into contact with each other, it places an excessive additional load on the amp. This may cause the amp to stop functioning, and may even damage the amp. 5 If you have a DVD player or other source 1 component you want to connect, connect it now before connecting the power cord in the next step. See page 33 for how to connect a digital source component. 6 Connect the receiver subwoofer to your TV. ⢠Connect the HDMI OUT jack on receiver subwoofer to an HDMI input on your TV. 7 Connect an audio cable from your TV to the receiver subwoofer. ⢠To listen to TV audio on this unit, you must connect the TVâÂÂs audio output to an audio input jack on this unit. You can connect by either a digital (optical) or analog audio cable. For digital audio, connect to DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 on the receiver subwoofer. To use the HDMI Control function when you are connected to a supported Pioneer plasma television, you must connect via HDMI. ⢠You must first set â TV Input â to switch the audio from a plasma television with the HDMI Control function or to switch the input source of this unit to TV audio and operate your TV with the supplied remote control. For more information, see Operating Pioneer plasma televisions and TVs on page 17 and Audio input settings from plasma televisions (TV Input) on page 39. 8 Connect the power cord. 2 ⢠Connect each power cord to the AC inlet on the receiver subwoofer. Connect each power cord to a wall socket in the following order. 1. Receiver subwoofer 2. TV ⢠Run the cords that are connected to the side panel of the receiver subwoofer over the back side of the unit, and replace the cover on the side panel. HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 R L AM LOOP OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 ANALOG AUDIO IN ANTENNA DIGIT AL TV 7 6 From Audio output or From digital audio output (optical) To HDMI input Receiver subwoof er Rear panel Side panel Note 1 Make sure to connect a TV or monitor (for video sources) to take advantage of this systemâÂÂs home theater potential. Please refer to the instruction manual supplied with your TV or monitor for connection details. 2⢠Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system. ⢠Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system. ⢠After connecting this unit to an AC outlet, a 15-second initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during initialization. The HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during initialization, and you can turn this unit on once it has stopped blinking. HTP-LX70_En.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 13 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Display unit 1 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the receiver subwoofer on/into standby. 2 INPUT SELECTOR (page 33) Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio inputs ( HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 , Digital 1 , Digital 2 , Analog , iPod or Front Audio In ). 3 VOL /â buttons Use to adjust the volume. 4 POWER ON indicator (Blue) 5 Front panel display See page 14 for details. 6 IR remote sensor (page 22) 7 HDMI indicator (Red) Lights when this receiver subwoofer is connected to HDMI (HDCP) compatible component. Also lights during initialization, after you plug this unit into an AC outlet. T op buttons 1 2 3 4 7 5 6 HTP-LX70_En.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 14 En Display 1 DIRECT Lights when Direct Sound is selected (i.e. Effective Sound is off)(page 24). 2 Listening mode indicators STEREO Lights when the Stereo mode is selected or when a stereo source is being played back in the Auto listening mode (page 26). F.S.SURR. Lights when one of the Front Stage Surround Advance listening modes is selected (page 26). ADV.SURR. Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening modes is selected (page 25). 3 2 PRO LOGIC II Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding (page 25). 4 Sound processing indicators Lights when any of the Loudness, Midnight, Quiet or tone controls feature is selected (page 27) 5 S.RTRV Lights when Sound Retriever is active (page 26). 6 HDMI THROUGH Lights when HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode . 7 MCACC Lights when MCACC Effect is switched on (page 27). Blinks during Auto MCACC Setup (page 23). 8 Digital format indicators 2 DIGITAL Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source (page 24). DTS Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 24). DTS 96/24 Lights during playback of a DTS 96/24 decoding (page 24). DSD î PCM Lights during DSD (Direct Stream Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs. PCM Lights during playback of PCM signals. 9 Character display 10 Tuner indicators Lights when a broadcast is being received. Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode. Lights when FM mono reception is selected. 11 Lights when sleep timer is active (page 40). 2 DIGIT AL DTS 96/24 DIRECT STEREO F .S.SURR. LO UDNESS MIDNIGHT DNR DIAL OG HDMI THROUGH QUIET TONE S.RTRV MCACC ADV .SURR. 2 PRO L OGIC DSD PCM 2 1 4 6 5 89 10 11 3 7 HTP-LX70_En.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 15 En Remote control ⢠For more information on using the remote control, see Operating the remote control on page 22. Operating the receiver subwoofer This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver subwoofer. Note that the controls change when you have chosen the input function for separate connected devices. 1 î RECEIVER Switches the receiver subwoofer to On/Standby. 2 î TV Switches the TV to On/Standby. TV CTRL Switches the remote control to the TV operating mode (no effect on the current input source of this unit). 3 î SOURCE Switches the power for the selected component to On/ Standby (page 22). 4 Input select buttons Change the input for this unit. You will also need to press one of these buttons when operating another connected component via this remote control. HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 Switch input from HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 . TV Switches to the input selected at TV Input setup (page 39). FM/AM (page 28) Switches between FM and AM bands. LINE (page 34) Press repeatedly to select one of the receiver subwooferâÂÂs audio inputs ( Digital 1 , Digital 2 , Analog , iPod or Front Audio In ). 5 LCD touch screen Displays the buttons used to control external components such as a receiver subwoofer, plasma television, DVD player, Blu-ray disc player, and HDD/DVD recorder. The current operating mode is displayed at the top of the remote controlâÂÂs screen. Although the LCD touch screen disappears if you do not perform any operations for a while, it appears when the screen is touched or a button on the remote control is pressed. 6 Other component button Use to operate an HDD/DVD recorder or other connected component. 7 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Use to control receiver functions. 8 SETUP Use to access the menu system for surround sound setup, tuner settings and so on (page 28, 30 , 38 , 40 ). 9 RETURN Use to cancel settings. 10 RCV Use to switch to the receiver subwoofer operating mode when this unit is in the other operating modes. Press again to return to the previous operating mode. 11 VOL /â Use to adjust the volume of the receiver subwoofer. RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 123 CTRL TV LINE FM/AM TV TOP MENU DISC NAVIGATOR HOME MENU MENU PAGE RETURN RECEIVER RCV VOL M UT E SETUP î î î 1 5 8 10 11 7 4 2 3 9 12 6 6 HTP-LX70_En.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 16 En 12 MUTE Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound). LCD touch screen 13 SURR Use to select a Surround mode (page 24). ADV.SURR Use to change the audio setting to PioneerâÂÂs original Advanced Surround mode (page 25). F.S.SURR Use to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode (page 26). 14 GENRE Use to listen to audio in Genre Sync mode (page 26). (This button is displayed only when the RECEIVER screen is shown during HDD/DVD recorder operation.) 15 SOUND RTRV Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed audio sources (page 26). 16 DIRECT Use to switch on/off the Effective Sound mode (page 24). 17 MCACC Starts the Auto MCACC setup (page 23). 18 TEST TONE Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup) (page 32). 19 SOUND Press to access the sound menu, from which you can adjust bass and treble, etc. 20 SLEEP Press to set the sleep timer (page 40). 21 EXIT Cancel settings and exit the RECEIVER screen. Operating the built-in FM/AM tuner 1 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Use to control FM/AM tuner functions. 2 SETUP Use to access the menu system or tuner settings. 3 RETURN Use to cancel settings. LCD touch screen 4 Number buttons Use to directly choose a preset radio station. CLEAR Press to clear an entry and start again. 5 TUNE /â Use to find radio frequencies. 6 ST /â Use to select a station preset. RECEIVER SURR GENRE SLEEP EXIT MC ACC SOUND DIRECT ADV . SURR TEST TONE SOUND RTRV F .S. SURR 16 19 21 18 15 13 14 17 20 TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN 2 3 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP 1 FM/AM - TUNE - ST CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 4 5 6 HTP-LX70_En.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 17 En Operating Pioneer plasma televisions and TVs First, refer to Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 40 for information about setting up your TVâÂÂs presets. Note that certain buttons may not work with some TVs. 1 î TV Switches the TV to On/Standby. TV CTRL Switches the remote control to the TV operating mode (no effect on the current input source of this unit). 2 î SOURCE Switches the power for the TV to On/Standby. 3 PAGE </> Switches pages on the LCD touch screen. 4 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Use to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option. 5 HOME MENU Display the HOME MENU screen. 6 RETURN Restores the previous menu screen. 7 Color (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) buttons Selects a page. LCD touch screen 8 Number buttons Selects a channel. 9 CH RTN Returns to the previously selected channel. 10 CH ENTER Executes a channel number. 11 P /â Selects the channel. 12 INPUT Selects an input source of the TV. 13 MUTE Mutes the sound. 14 TV VOL /â Sets the volume. SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 5 7 2 6 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP CTRL TV î RECEIVER î PAGE 4 1 3 PDP MUTE INPUT 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 P - TV V O L - 12 10 9 14 11 13 TV 12 3 8 Shown when not set to a Pioneer plasma television. CH ENTER CH RTN HTP-LX70_En.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 18 En Operating a Pioneer Blu-ray Disc player 1 î SOURCE Switches the power for a Blu-ray disc player to On/Standby. 2 PAGE </> Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when multiple pages are present. 3 TOP MENU / DISC NAVIGATOR Press to display the top menu of a BD-ROM or DVD-Video disc. When playing a DVD-R/-RW disc, press to display/exit the Disc Navigator. 4 MENU BD-ROM: Press to display/hide the pop-up menu. DVD-Video: Press to display the disc menu (if there is one). 5 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Use to navigate on-screen displays and menus. Press ENTER to select an option or execute a command. 6 HOME MENU Press to display the playerâÂÂs Home Menu, access most of the playerâÂÂs functions. 7 RETURN Press to return to a previous screen. 8 Color (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) buttons Use to navigate BD-ROM menus. LCD touch screen 9 ( AUDIO ) Press to select the audio channel or language. ( SUBTITLE ) Press to select a subtitle display. ( ANGLE ) Press to change the camera angle during BD-ROM or DVD-Video movie multi-angle scene playback. 10 Playback controls î Press to start or resume playback. î Press to stop playback (you can resume playback by pressing î ). î Press to pause playback; press again to restart. î , î Press to start reverse/forward scanning. î , î Press to jump to the start of the previous/next chapter/track. î / î , î / î Use for slow motion and step frame. 11 ZOOM Press to zoom the screen when displaying a still image. 12 DISP Press to display information. 13 Number buttons Use to enter title, chapter or track numbers, etc. ENTER Press to select an option or execute a command. CLEAR Press to clear a numeric entry, etc. 14 PLAY MODE Press to change the Play Mode (repeat play, for example). 15 VIDEO ADJ Press to display the Video Adjust screen. SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 3 6 8 4 1 7 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP RECEIVER CTRL TV î î PAGE 5 2 BD 1/2 BD 2/2 ENTER CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 PLAY MODE VIDEO ADJ DISP DISP ZOOM î î î î îÂÂî îÂÂ/î îÂÂ/î î 9 10 13 11 12 14 15 12 HTP-LX70_En.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 19 En Operating a Pioneer DVD player 1 î SOURCE Switches the power for a DVD player to On/Standby. 2 PAGE </> Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when multiple pages are present. 3 TOP MENU Press to display the top menu of a DVD-Video disc. 4 MENU Displays a DVD disc menu â this varies with the disc and may be the same as the âÂÂtop menuâÂÂ. 5 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Moves the cursor around the screen. Press ENTER to select the current menu option. 6 HOME MENU Display/exit the on-screen display. 7 RETURN Returns to the previously displayed menu screen. LCD touch screen 8 ( AUDIO ) Press to select the audio channel or language. ( SUBTITLE ) Press to select a subtitle display. ( ANGLE ) Press to change the camera angle during DVD-Video movie multi-angle scene playback. 9 Playback controls î Press to start or resume playback. î Press to stop playback (you can resume playback by pressing î ). î Press to pause playback; press again to restart. î / î î , î / î î Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed. While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. î / î Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/ track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu page. 10 ZOOM Press to zoom the screen when displaying a still image. 11 DISP Press to display information. 12 Number buttons Use to enter title, chapter or track numbers, etc. ENTER Press to select an option or execute a command. CLEAR Press to clear a numeric entry, etc. 13 PLAY MODE Press to change the Play Mode (repeat play, for example). SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 3 6 4 1 7 DISC NAV IGATOR SETUP RECEIVER CTRL TV î î PAGE 5 2 DVD 1/2 DVD 2/2 ENTER CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 PLAY MODE DISP DISP ZOOM î î îÂÂî î î / îÂÂî î / îÂÂî 8 10 11 13 11 9 12 HTP-LX70_En.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 20 En Operating a Pioneer HDD/DVD Recorder 1 î SOURCE Switches the power for a HDD/DVD recorder to On/Standby. 2 PAGE </> Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when multiple pages are present. 3 TOP MENU / DISC NAVIGATOR Press to display the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded, or the Disc Navigator screen. 4 MENU Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video, finalized DVD-R/-RW or finalized DVD R/ RW disc is loaded. 5 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Use to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option. 6 HOME MENU Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can navigate all the functions of the recorder. 7 RETURN Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or display. LCD touch screen 8 HDD Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording and playback. DVD Press to select the DVD for recording and playback. 9 Playback controls î Press to start playback. î Press to stop playback. î Press to pause playback or recording. î / î Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed. î / î Press to skip to the previous or next title/ chapter/ track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu page. î / î , î / î While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. 10 CM BACK (commercial back) Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward through the video playing. CM SKIP (commercial skip) Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward through the video playing. SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 3 6 4 1 7 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP RECEIVER CTRL TV î î PAGE 2 5 HDD/DVR 1/2 HDD/DVR 2/2 REC î îÂÂ/î î îÂÂ/î î î î îÂÂî î STOP REC INPUT DISP CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 CH - 13 14 11 16 17 9 10 12 8 HDD DVD CM BACK CM SKIP JUKE BO X 15 HTP-LX70_En.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 21 En 11 JUKEBOX Press to display the Jukebox screen of a HDD/DVD recorder, from which you can copy music to the HDD for playback. 12 ( AUDIO ) Press to change the audio language or channel. (When the recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner audio.) ( SUBTITLE ) Press to display/change the subtitles included in multilingual DVD-Video discs. ( ANGLE ) Press to switch camera angles on discs with multi- angle scenes. 13 Number buttons Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection; channel selection, and so on. CLEAR Press to clear an entry and start again. 14 CH /â Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. 15 INPUT Press to change a HDD/DVD recorder input to use for recording. 16 DISP Displays/changes the on-screen information displays. 17 Recording controls î REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins. STOP REC Press to stop recording. Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the battery compartment cover on the back of the remote control. 2 Insert four AA/LR6 alkaline batteries into the battery compartment following the indications ( î , î ) inside the compartment. 3 Close the cover. Caution Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and old batteries together. ⢠DonâÂÂt use different kinds of battery together â although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. ⢠Remove batteries from equipment that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country /area. WARNING ⢠Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries. HTP-LX70_En.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 22 En Using the remote control Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unitâÂÂs remote sensor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote. ⢠Use within the operating range in front of the remote control sensor on the display unit, as shown. Operating the remote control The supplied remote control can control not only the receiver subwoofer, but also other Pioneer products such as a plasma television, DVD player, Blu-ray disc player, and HDD/DVD recorder. To operate these components, orient the remote control toward the display unit. Operating the receiver subwoofer ⢠Press to display the RECEIVER screen. The RECEIVER screen is shown on the remote controlâÂÂs LCD screen, and the remote is switched to Receiver mode. Choosing and operating a source component 1 Press to cycle through connected components. The selected component changes, and the LCD screen on the remote control changes to that of the appropriate component. ⢠To select input for Digital 1 , Digital 2 , Analog , Front Audio In , or iPod , press the LINE button until the desired input function is shown on the display unit. 2 Choose the input source you are using when you have selected HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 or LINE. The LCD screen changes to that for the selected component, and you can then operate the desired component. ⢠When the desired source cannot be found, or when you have a component not manufactured by Pioneer connected, press RCV to put the remote control into Receiver mode. The input for this unit remains unchanged. Note To temporarily control the receiver while listening to audio from a connected component on this unit, press RCV . The selected input will not change, and the remote changes to Receiver mode. To return to the previous operating mode, press RCV once more. Using the LCD touch screen Depending on the type of connected component you are operating (such as DVD player), there may be multiple pages of information for the LCD touch screen. When the component you would like to control is not displayed, press PAGE to scroll to the page where the component you would like to control is located. ⢠When no operations are carried out for over 10 seconds, the display on the LCD touch screen of the remote control is automatically turned off. To have the display shown once again, either touch the LCD or press a button on the remote control. 7 m 30 30 RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR HDMI 12 3 TV FM /AM LINE EXIT BD DVD HDD/ DVR EXIT BD DVD HDD/ DVR TV HDMI input LINE input HTP-LX70_En.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 23 En Chapter 4 Getting started Important ⢠Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen, as shown below). Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound The Multichannel Acoustic Calibration (MCACC) system measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account ambient noise, and testing for channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided, the system uses the information from a series of test tones to measure standing wave and reverb, optimizing the speaker settings and equalization (MCACC Effect) for your particular room. 1 Important ⢠The test tones used for Auto MCACC setup are loud; however, do not turn the volume down during setup as this may result in a sub-optimal setup. ⢠Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the MCACC setup. 1 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on back of the display unit. 2 Place the microphone at your normal listening position. Place it about ear height, and make sure it is level by using a table or chair. Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone. 3 If the receiver subwoofer is off, press î RECEIVER to turn the power on. 4 Press MCACC. Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing MCACC . The volume increases automatically and the system outputs a series of test tones. ⢠To cancel Auto MCACC setup before it has finished, press MCACC . The unit will continue to use the previous settings. ⢠If the ambient noise level is too high, Noisy! blinks in the display for five seconds. To exit and check the noise levels 2 , press MCACC , or to try again, press ENTER when Retry shows in the display. ⢠If you see an Error MIC! or Error Speaker! message in the display, there may be a problem with your mic or the speaker connections. To try again, press ENTER 3 . When the MCACC setup is complete, the volume level returns to normal, Complete 4 shows in the display, and MCACC Effect is activated. 5 ⢠Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this unit upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup. Note 1 You only need to use the Auto MCACC setup once (unless you change the placement of your speakers or your room layout). RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR 2⢠If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC setup (too much ambient noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speak- ers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. ⢠Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the mic. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV during Auto MCACC setup. 3 If this doesnâÂÂt work, press MCACC , turn off the power, and check the problem indicated by the Error message, then try the Auto MCACC setup again. 4 If Complete doesnâÂÂt appear, it is likely an error occurred during the setup. Please check all connections and try again. 5 See Listening with MCACC Effect on page 27 to switch on/off MCACC Effect. RECEIVER î MCACC HTP-LX70_En.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 05 24 En Chapter 5 Listening to your system Important ⢠Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen, as shown below). Effective Sound (for optimum sound) With the uniquely shaped high-quality speakers supplied with this unit, the Effective Sound mode enables the following Pioneer exclusive audio technologies designed to maximize the real experience of sound originally inherent in movies and music. Turn on the Effective Sound mode under normal circumstances to maximize the capabilities of this unit. ⢠Dialogue Enhancement Clarifies dialogue in movies to make it stand out from other background sounds. ⢠Dynamic Range Compression Resuscitates detailed sound susceptible to ambient noise to create an acoustic environment where you feel as if you are right in the action. ⢠Original Channel Balance & Channel Mix Since the orientation of the supplied speaker units is uniquely designed, channels are mixed down and balanced in a special manner. Also, the optimum balance is automatically achieved according to the contents being played back. ⢠Frequency Characteristic Correction Realizes the playback characteristic optimized for long hours of listening in addition to the added features of the supplied speaker units. ⢠Stereo Playback in Surround Outputs audio from the surround speakers while directing vocal sound to the front channels. You can play back stereo sources like CDs in seamless, comfortable surround sound. This effect is available when you play back stereo sources in the Auto listening mode (see below). The Effective sound mode can be turned off (activating Direct mode) by doing the following: ⢠Press to switch to Direct Sound. Press this button to switch between Effective Sound and Direct Sound. ⢠When Direct Sound is selected, the DIRECT indicator lights. Auto listening mode The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to any source as it was mastered: the output from the speakers mirrors the channels in the source material. If you set up the system for Front surround (page 6), the Front Stage Surround modes will give the best results (see page 26). ⢠Press to select the Auto listening mode. Listening in surround sound You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in surround sound. Surround sound is generated from stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic or DTS Neo:6 decoding modes. 1 If you set up the system for Front surround (page 6), the Front Stage Surround modes will give the best results (see page 26). ⢠Press repeatedly to select a listening mode. The choices that appear in the display will vary according to the type of source thatâÂÂs playing. 2 RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR Note 1 After the surround back signals of the 6.1/7.1-channel audio represented by DTS-ES are properly decoded, the original virtual surround back function outputs the surround back signals in combination with surround signals. 2 You cannot select a mode other than Auto and Stereo while playing back DTS-HD, DTS-Express, or Dolby TrueHD (176.4 kHz/192 kHz). Also, you cannot select DTS Neo:6 for Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD (below 96 kHz). DIRECT SURR SURR HTP-LX70_En.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 05 25 En With two channel sources , you can select from: ⢠Auto â Auto listening mode (see page 24) ⢠2 PL II Movie (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) â 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to movie sources ⢠2 PL II Music (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) â 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to music sources; see Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings below ⢠2 PL II Game (Dolby Pro Logic II Game) â 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to video games ⢠2 Pro Logic (Dolby Pro Logic) â 4.1 channel surround sound for use with any two-channel source ⢠Neo:6 Cinema â 6.1 channel sound, especially suited to movie sources ⢠Neo:6 Music â 6.1 channel sound, especially suited to music sources; see Center image setting below ⢠Stereo â See Listening in stereo on page 26 With multichannel sources , you can select (according to format): ⢠Auto â Auto listening mode (see page 24) ⢠StandardDecode â Listening in Dolby Digital or DTS surround decoding. Plays back multichannel sources like Dolby Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM with the most standard decoder ⢠Stereo â See Listening in stereo on page 26 Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode (see above), there are three settings you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension, and Panorama. 1 Press when Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode is active. 2 Select âÂÂCenter WidthâÂÂ, âÂÂDimension â or âÂÂPanoramaâ then press ENTER. ⢠Center Width 1 â Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings). ⢠Dimension â Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings). ⢠Panorama â Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a âÂÂwraparoundâ effect. 3 Adjust the setting, then press ENTER to confirm. Center image setting When listening to two channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode (see page 24), you can also adjust the center image effect. Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect with vocals. 2 1 Press when Neo:6 Music mode is active. 2 Select âÂÂCenter Imageâ then press ENTER. 3 Adjust the setting, then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front right and left speakers) to 10 (center channel sent to the center speaker only). Using Advanced Surround The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional surround sound effects. These modes are designed to provide optimum listening effect when using the Standard surround setup described on page 6. ⢠Press to select an Advanced Surround mode. The ADV.SURR. indicator lights when one of these modes is chosen. You cannot switch between modes for some audio streams. 3 Press repeatedly to select: ⢠Action â Designed for action movies with dynamic soundtracks ⢠Drama â Designed for movies with lots of dialog ⢠Sci-Fi â Designed for science fiction with lots of special effects ⢠Mono Film â Creates surround sound from mono soundtracks Note 1 As this product uses a dual center speaker system, you should normally use the C.Width 3 setting. SOUND ENTER 2 As this product uses a dual center speaker system, you should normally use the C.Image 3 setting. 3 You cannot use this function for the following audio streams: ⢠Dolby TrueHD: over 88.2 kHz ⢠DTS-HD: over 88.2 kHz or with the channel format of 2/0 ⢠DTS-Express: with the channel format of 2/0 ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER ADV SURR HTP-LX70_En.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 05 26 En ⢠Ent.Show â Suitable for musical sources ⢠Expanded â Creates an extra wide stereo field ⢠TV Surround â Provides surround sound for both mono and stereo TV sources ⢠Advanced Game â Suitable for video games ⢠Sports â Suitable for sports programs ⢠Classical â Gives a large concert hall-type sound ⢠Rock/Pop â Creates a live concert sound for rock and/or pop music ⢠Unplugged â Suitable for acoustic music sources ⢠Ext.Stereo â Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source, using all of your speakers Using Front Stage Surround Advance The Front Stage Surround Advance modes are effective when you are using the Front surround speaker setup as described on page 6. ⢠Press to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode. The F.S.SURR indicator lights. Press repeatedly to select Focus 5.1ch , Wide 5.1ch or Extra Power . You cannot select a mode other than Extra Power for some audio streams. 1 ⢠Focus 5.1ch â Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center area where the left and right speakers sound projection converges. ⢠Wide 5.1ch â Use to provide a surround sound effect to a wider area than Focus 5.1ch mode. ⢠Extra Power â Outputs stereo sound (in the case of multi-channel sources, down-mixed stereo sound) from the surround speakers for powerful stereo effect. Listening in stereo You can listen to any source â stereo or multichannel â in stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers and the subwoofer. ⢠Press repeatedly until STEREO shows in the display. Genre Sync Mode Only when you have this unit connected to an HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder and are using the HDMI Control function, you can make use of the Genre Sync Mode to have the listening mode automatically change to that which best matches the genre of the contents playing from the recorder. ⢠Set the HDMI Mode to AMP Mode (page 36). ⢠Press when listening to media contents from a recorder. The most appropriate listening mode is selected and shown in the display. When the related genre could not be determined, No Genre or CanâÂÂt use may be displayed and the listening mode remains unchanged. Tip ⢠Mainly used with Jukebox and MP3 sources. ⢠To use this function, you must have an HDMI Control- compatible Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder connected via HDMI, and have the HDMI Control function set to On. Using the Sound Retriever When audio data is removed during the MP3 or WMA compression process, sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound image. The Sound Retriever feature employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to compressed two channel audio by restoring sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression. ⢠Press while listening to a stereo source 2 . Press repeatedly to switch between: ⢠Retriever On â Switches the Sound Retriever on. ⢠Retriever Off â Switches the Sound Retriever off. Note 1 You cannot use this function for the following audio streams: ⢠Dolby TrueHD: over 88.2 kHz ⢠DTS-HD: over 88.2 kHz or with the channel format of 2/0 ⢠DTS-Express: with the channel format of 2/0 F.S. SURR SURR 2 This setting cannot be used with multichannel sources. Also, in case of SACD, DTS-HD, DTS-Express, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, and PCM (192 kHz/176.4 kHz), even stereo sources cannot be used. GENRE SOUND RTRV HTP-LX70_En.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 05 27 En Listening with MCACC Effect Listen to sound using the corrected acoustic field settings obtained by MCACC. 1 Press to open the sound menu. 2 Select âÂÂMCACC Effectâ then press ENTER. 3 Switch âÂÂMCACC Onâ or âÂÂMCACC Off â then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠When MCACC Effect is off, equalization, channel delay, channel level and standing wave are set to off. ⢠When MCACC Effect is off, the channel delay and channel level can be adjusted manually and the settings stored separately from when MCACC Effect is on. ⢠MCACC Effect is set to on automatically after Auto MCACC setup is used. Using Midnight, Loudness and Quiet listening modes The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels. The Loudness listening feature can be used to get good bass and treble from music sources at low volume levels. The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or treble in a sound source. 1 Press to open the sound menu. 2 Select âÂÂToneâ then press ENTER. 1 3 S elect â Midnight âÂÂ, â Loudness â or â Quiet â then press ENTER to confirm. 2 ⢠To cancel the Midnight, Loudness or Quiet listening modes, select Bass/Treble . Adjusting the bass and treble Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone. 1 Press to open the sound menu. 2 Select âÂÂToneâ then press ENTER. 1 3 S elect âÂÂBass/Trebleâ then press ENTER . ⢠Selecting Bass/Treble cancels the Midnight, Loudness and Quiet listening modes. These modes cannot be used at the same time. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to select âÂÂBassâ or âÂÂTrebleâÂÂ; use the îÂÂ/î buttons to adjust the sound then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠Bass and Treble can be adjusted from -6dB to 6dB . ⢠When the Bass or Treble is set to something other than 0dB , the TONE indicator lights. Adjusting sound delay Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of the video. There are a total of 60 steps (levels) that you can adjust, with a total range of 200 msec. 1 Press to open the sound menu. 2 Select âÂÂSound Delayâ then press ENTER. 3 Select the length of the delay in sound, then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠This option is deactivated and not displayed if you have AutoDelay set to On in HDMI Setup (see Setting the Auto Delay on page 39). Note 1 While playing back DTS-HD (over 88.2 kHz) or Dolby TrueHD (over 88.2 kHz) audio streams, you cannot select Tone if a mode other than Bass/ Treble is selected. 2 While playing back DTS-HD (over 88.2 kHz) or Dolby TrueHD (over 88.2 kHz) audio streams, you cannot select a mode other than Bass/Treble . SOUND ENTER ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to the radio 06 28 En Chapter 6 Listening to the radio Important ⢠To listen to the radio, press the FM/AM button to set the remote control to FM/AM control mode. The LCD screen on the remote control changes to the FM/AM screen. Listening to the radio The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and lets you memorize your favorite stations so you donâÂÂt have to manually tune in every time you want to listen. 1 Switch to the tuner, then press repeatedly to select the FM or AM band. The display shows the band and frequency. 2 Tune to a frequency. There are three tuning modes â manual, auto, and high- speed: ⢠Manual tuning â Press TUNE /â repeatedly to change the displayed frequency. ⢠Auto tuning â Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move, then release. The tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to keep searching. ⢠High-speed tuning â Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the button held down until you reach the frequency you want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the manual tuning method. Improving poor FM reception If youâÂÂre listening to an FM station in stereo but the reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by switching to mono. 1 Press after tuning to an FM radio station. 2 Select âÂÂTuner Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Choose âÂÂFM Auto/Monoâ then press ENTER. 4 Select âÂÂFM Monoâ then press ENTER. The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono reception mode. Select FM Auto above to switch back to auto-stereo mode (the stereo indicator ( ) lights when receiving a stereo broadcast). Improving poor AM sound The simplest way to improve the sound quality of AM radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched off. Also try changing the position and direction of the AM loop antenna. Changing the noise cut mode If you find that the AM sound quality is bad even after trying the above, you may be able to improve it using a different noise cut mode. Just choose the one that sounds best. 1 Press after tuning to an AM radio station. 2 Select âÂÂTuner Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 C hoose âÂÂNoise Cutâ then press ENTER . 4 S elect a Noise cut mode (1, 2 or 3) then press ENTER. FM /AM FM/AM 12 3 FM /AM - TUNE SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to the radio 06 29 En Memorizing stations You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always have easy access to your favorite stations without having to tune in manually each time. 1 Tune to an FM or AM radio station. Select mono or auto-stereo reception (FM) or the Noise Cut mode (AM) as necessary. These settings are saved along with the preset. 2 Press SETUP . 3 Select âÂÂTuner Setupâ then press ENTER. 4 Choose â ST.Memory â then press ENTER . 5 Select the station preset you want then press ENTER . Listening to station presets 1M ake sure the tuner function is selected. 2 Select a station preset. ⢠Alternatively, use the number buttons to select a preset directly. Changing the frequency step If you find that you canâÂÂt tune into stations successfully, the frequency step may not be suitable for your country/ region. 1 Press SETUP. 2 Select âÂÂSystem Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂAM9K/10KâÂÂ, then press ENTER . 4 Select a setting then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠AM 9K â 9 kHz step for AM; 50 kHz step for FM ⢠AM 10K â 10 kHz step for AM; 100 kHz step for FM SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER - ST SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound settings 07 30 En Chapter 7 Surround sound settings Important ⢠Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen, as shown below). Using the Sound Setup menu From the Sound Setup menu you can access all the surround sound settings of the system. During setup, the speakers are represented by the following letters: ⢠L â Front left speaker ⢠C â Center speaker ⢠R â Front right speaker ⢠SR â Surround right speaker ⢠SL â Surround left speaker ⢠SW â Subwoofer Channel level setting 1 The Auto MCACC feature (see page 23) should give you the best surround sound setup. However you may find that by further adjustment of the channel levels you can improve the surround sound in your listening room. This method of setting the channel levels allows you to listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback channel. A further method of setting the channel levels is to use the test tone method. See Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone on page 32 for more on this. 1 Press SETUP. 2 Select âÂÂSound Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂChannelLevelâÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to select a channel or the îÂÂ/î buttons to adjust the level of that channel. ⢠You can adjust the level of each channel by ñ10 dB. 2 5 Press once when youâÂÂre finished. ⢠If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. Speaker distance setting 1 The Auto MCACC feature (see page 23) should give you the best surround sound setup. However you may find that by further adjustment of the speaker distance settings you can improve the surround sound in your listening room. Set the distance of each speaker from your normal listening position. 1 Open the âÂÂSound Setupâ menu. 2 Select âÂÂDistanceâ then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to select a speaker or the îÂÂ/î buttons to adjust the distance. Each speaker can be adjusted from 0.1m to 9.0m . 4 Press ENTER when youâÂÂre finished. ⢠If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. Note 1 When this function is set while MCACC Effect is on, the value for the same function adjusted with the Auto MCACC feature is overwritten. When MCACC Effect is off, the value set here is applied, regardless of the value adjusted with the Auto MCACC feature. (The Auto MCACC setting is not overwritten.) RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR 2 The range of adjustment is limited when the volume level is set over 51. SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound settings 07 31 En Dynamic Range Control When watching Dolby Digital or DTS material at low volume, low level sounds â including some of the dialog â can be difficult to hear properly. Using one of the Dynamic Range Control (DRC) settings can help by bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high level peaks. Dynamic Range Control works only with Dolby Digital soundtracks and some DTS soundtracks. 1 Open the âÂÂSound Setupâ menu. 2 Select âÂÂD.R.C.âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 3 Select a setting. Select one of the following: ⢠D.R.C. Auto â Only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select D.R.C. High or D.R.C. Mid for signals other than Dolby TrueHD. ⢠D.R.C. High â Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are increased) ⢠D.R.C. Mid â Mid setting ⢠D.R.C. Off â No dynamic range adjustment (use when listening at higher volume) 4 Press to exit. Dual mono setting Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should be played. You can also use this setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs recorded with bilingual audio. 1 Open the âÂÂSound Setupâ menu. 2 Select âÂÂDual MonoâÂÂ, then press ENTER. 3 Select a setting. Select one of the following: ⢠CH1 Mono â Only channel 1 is played ⢠CH2 Mono â Only channel 2 is played ⢠CH1/CH2 â Both channels are played through the front speakers 4 Press to exit. SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound settings 07 32 En Using the Virtual Surround Back mode This mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information, or if the material sounds better in the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES. 1 1 Open the âÂÂSound Setupâ menu. 2 Select âÂÂVirtual SBâÂÂ, then press ENTER. 3 Select a setting. Select one of the following: ⢠Vir.SB On â Virtual Surround Back is always used (for example, on 5.1 encoded material) ⢠Vir.SB Auto â Virtual Surround Back is automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES), DTS Neo:6 or Advanced Surround mode ⢠Vir.SB Off â Virtual Surround Back mode is switched off 4 Press to exit. LFE Attenuate Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra- low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra- low bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers. The LFE is not limited when set to 0dB , which is the recommended value. When set to -5dB , -10dB , -15dB or -20dB , the LFE is limited by the respective degree. When Off is selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel. 1 Open the âÂÂSound Setupâ menu. 2 Select âÂÂLFE ATTâÂÂ, then press ENTER . 3 Adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm. Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone If you prefer, you can set the channel levels using a test tone as a reference, rather than playing a source (see Channel level setting on page 30). A test tone is played through each speaker in turn, allowing you to adjust the level as it plays. You can also adjust the channel levels for surround sound using test tone. 1 Carry out tone testing. The test tone is output from each speaker in turn. Adjust the volume level below 50. 2 Adjust the channel level of a tune while it is playing. The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test tone at the same volume from each speaker. You can adjust the level of each channel by ñ10 dB. ⢠You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output using the VOL /â buttons (this does not affect the channel level settings). ⢠Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer produces, it may sound quieter than it really is. We suggest adjusting the subwoofer level while listening to a source. See the method described in Channel level setting on page 30. 3 Press to exit test tone setup once you have finished. ⢠If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. Note 1 Depending on the input signal and the listening mode, the Virtual Surround Back mode may not be effective. SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER TEST TONE ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 08 33 En Chapter 8 Other connections Important ⢠When making or changing connections on the side panel of this unit, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cord to the wall socket. Connecting auxiliary components You can connect both analog and digital external audio sources to this system. Digital audio sources include digital satellite receivers, CD recorders, etc. We recommend using an HDMI cable to connect sources that have HDMI terminals. For more information see Connecting using HDMI on page 35. To listen to audio from a TV, connect the TVâÂÂs audio cable to one of the inputs on this unit. Connecting for digital audio This system has optical-type digital inputs. Use these to connect external components, such as your MD or CD recorder. ⢠Connect the OPTICAL IN 2 jack on the side panel to the optical output of an external playback component. These include digital components such as an MD player, digital satellite, or a game system. You can also use the OPTICAL IN 1 jack to connect external components when not using it for sound input from a TV. Connecting an analog audio component You can use the ANALOG AUDIO IN jacks to connect an analog audio component, such as a tape player. You can use the F.AUDIO input jack on the display unit to easily playback audio from a digital audio player or PC. Use a stereo mini-plug cable to connect a source to the display unit. ⢠When you connect a cable to the F.AUDIO jack, this unitâÂÂs input automatically switches to Front Audio In . MD , CD Recorder , et c. From digital audio output (optical) OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 DIGIT AL Side panel Receiver subwoofer From Audio output R L ANALOG AUDIO IN Side panel Receiver subwoofer T ape play er , MD , DA T , et c. F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM F.AUDIO Digital audio player , etc. Display unit From analog audio output St ereo mini-plug cable HTP-LX70_En.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 08 34 En Connecting an iPod You can use the iPod jack on the display unit to playback music from an iPod. All operations can be carried out via the iPod. Use the supplied iPod cable to connect an iPod to this unit. ⢠When you connect an iPod, this unitâÂÂs input automatically switches to iPod . ⢠Certain iPod models have connectors that are not compatible with this unit. iPod î is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Listening to an external audio source To listen to audio from a connected external component on this unit, choose its input function on the remote control. Some Pioneer products can be controlled via this remote. 1 If the system isnâÂÂt already on, press î RECEIVER to switch on. Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite receiver, etc.) is switched on. 2 Select an audio input source. Input sources are cycled through as shown below: The LCD screen changes to that of the selected input source. 3 Press the button for the appropriate connected component. When a connected component is not displayed on the screen, or when you have connected a component not manufactured by Pioneer, press RCV button to put the remote control on the receiver subwoofer operation screen. 4 If necessary, start playback of the external source. MENU F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM iPod iPod Music > Extras > Settings > Shuffle Songs Backlight iPod iPod cable Display unit R LINE Digital 2 Front Audio In iPod Analog Digital 1 HTP-LX70_En.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 08 35 En Connecting external antennas For an external AM antenna, use 5 to 6 meters of vinyl- insulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors. Leave the loop antenna connected. For an external FM antenna, use a PAL connector to hook up an external FM antenna. About control out connections Many Pioneer components support CONTROL connections, by which you can use the remote controls of any connected components by aiming them at the sensor of just one component. When you use a remote control, the control signal is passed along the chain to the appropriate component. If you choose to use this feature, you must make sure that you also have at least one set of HDMI or analog audio jacks connected to another component for grounding purposes. ⢠Using the supplied control cable on either side, connect the CONTROL IN jack on another Pioneer component to the CONTROL OUT jack on the receiver subwoofer. This will allow you to control the other component by pointing its remote at the display unit supplied with this receiver subwoofer. Connecting using HDMI If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component, you can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable. 1 The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the connected component is compatible with, including DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Blu-ray Disc, Video CD/ Super VCD, CD and MP3, etc. AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 ⦠ANTENNA Side panel Receiver subwoofer ex te rnal FM antenna Outdoor antenna ext ernal AM antenna AM Loop antenna PA L connector 5 m to 6 m Indoor antenna (vinyl-coated Wire) Note 1⢠An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVI î HDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information. ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) Version 1.3a. Depending on the c omponent you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. Also, when using a component with HDMI version 1.0, it is not possible to output copy-controlled DVD-Audio CPPM sources from the HDMI connection. ⢠This unit supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this unit also supports the corresponding format. From HDMI output HDMI T IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 Receiver subwoofer HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 Rear panel HDMI/DVI-equipped component HTP-LX70_En.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 08 36 En 1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI IN 1 to 3 interconnect on this receiver subwoofer to an HDMI output on your HDMI component. Once this receiver subwoofer is properly connected to your HDMI component, the HDMI indicator (red) lights up on the display unit when you watch HDMI contents. 2 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT interconnect on this receiver subwoofer to an HDMI interconnect on a HDMI-compatible display. ⢠The arrow on the cable connector body should be facing right for correct alignment with the connector on the player. 3 Use the HDMI 1 to 3 button to select the HDMI input youâÂÂve connected to (for example, HDMI 2). You can also use the display unit INPUT SELECTOR to carry out this operation. ⢠Set the HDMI Mode in HDMI mode setting below to Through Mode if you want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV or plasma television (no sound will be heard from this receiver subwoofer). ⢠If the video signal does not appear on your TV or plasma television, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. HDMI mode setting Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver subwoofer (amp) or through to a TV or plasma television. You cannot use a number of sound functions of this unit when HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode . Important ⢠Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen). 1 Press SETUP. 2 Select âÂÂHDMI Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂHDMI ModeâÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠AMP Mode â Output an HDMI audio signal from this unit. ⢠Through Mode â Output an HDMI audio signal from a TV or plasma television. The HDMI THROUGH indicator lights. About HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays. HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncom- pressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 2.2 gigabytes per second (with HDTV signals), one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. RCV SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
HDMI Control 09 37 En Chapter 9 HDMI Control By connecting this unit to an HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma television or the HDD/DVD recorder with an HDMI cable, you can control this unit from the remote control of a connected plasma television, as well as have the connected plasma television automatically change inputs in response to operations carried out on this unit. Refer to the operating instructions for your plasma television for more information about which operations can be carried out by connecting via HDMI cable. ⢠You cannot use this function with components that do not support HDMI Control. ⢠We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI Control-compatible components other than those made by Pioneer. Important ⢠Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen, as shown below). Making the HDMI Control connections You can use synchronized operation for a connected plasma television and up to three other components (including a maximum of two recorders or players). Be sure to connect the plasma televisionâÂÂs audio cable to the audio input of this unit. ⢠If you use a commercially available HDMI cable, check whether the cable supports the HDMI 1.3 standard. Otherwise, the HDMI Control function may not operate properly. RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 R L AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 ⦠OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 ANALOG AUDIO IN ANTENNA DIGIT AL From Audio output or From digital audio output (optical) To HDMI input From HDMI outut Receiver subw oofer Rear panel Si de panel HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder , Blu-ray disc pla yer or DVD play er HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma television HTP-LX70_En.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
HDMI Control 09 38 En ⢠Connect the plasma television directly to this unit. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors. ⢠Only connect components you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this unit. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors. Important ⢠When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket. ⢠After connecting this unit to an AC outlet, a 15-second initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during initialization. The HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during initialization, and you can turn this unit on once it has stopped blinking. ⢠To get the most out of this function, we recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a plasma television but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this unit. Setting the HDMI options You must adjust the settings of this unit as well as HDMI Control-compatible connected components in order to make use of the HDMI Control function. For more information see the operating instructions for each component. Setting the HDMI Control mode Choose whether to set this unitâÂÂs HDMI Control function On or Off . You will need to set it to Control On to use the HDMI Control function. ⢠When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer, put this setting to Control Off . 1 Press SETUP. 2 Select âÂÂHDMI Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂHDMI CtrlâÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠Control On â Enables the HDMI Control function. When this unitâÂÂs power is turned off and you have a supported source begin playback while using the HDMI Control function, the audio and video output from the HDMI connection are output from the plasma television. ⢠Control Off â The HDMI Control is disabled. Synchronized operations cannot be used. When this unitâÂÂs power is turned off, audio and video of sources connected via HDMI are not output. HDMI cable HDMI cable HDMI input HDMI output HDMI input HDMI OUT Other amps or AV conv erter Receiver subwoof er HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma television HDMI cable HDMI cable HDMI input HDMI output HDMI IN HDMI OUT Other amps or AV converter Receiver subwoof er HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma television SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
HDMI Control 09 39 En Setting the Auto Delay This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay between components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is automatically adjusted according to the video delay time. 1 Press SETUP. 2 Select âÂÂHDMI Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂAuto DelayâÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Select âÂÂA.Delay Onâ or âÂÂA.Delay Off â then press ENTER to confirm. Tip ⢠This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (âÂÂlip-syncâÂÂ) for HDMI or HDMI Control. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.Delay to Off and adjust the sound delay settings manually (page 27). Audio input settings from plasma televisions (TV Input) To listen to audio from a plasma television on this device, you will need to connect an audio cable other than an HDMI cable. From this menu, set the audio input to that which you would like to connect. Press TV on the remote control to switch this unit to the input source selected here. This setting is changed to the selected input and the audio from the plasma television is output from this device. Select from inputs Digital 1 , Digital 2 and Analog . 1 Press SETUP. 2 Select âÂÂSystem Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂTV InputâÂÂ, then press ENTER . 4 Adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm. Important ⢠You must set this setting to activate the HDMI Control function. Before using synchronization Once you have finished all connections and settings, you must: 1 Put all components into standby mode. 2 Turn the power ON for all components, with the power for the plasma television being turned on last. 3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this unit, and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen on not. Synchronized amp mode Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an operation for the plasma television. For more information, see the operating instructions of your plasma television. Synchronized amp mode operations By connecting a component to this unit with an HDMI cable you can use synchronized amp mode, which allows you to synchronize the following operations: ⢠Displays on the plasma television when you mute or adjust the volume of this unit. ⢠The input of this unit is automatically changed when playback occurs on a connected component. ⢠Even if you change this unitâÂÂs input to a device that is not connected by HDMI, the synchronized amp mode remains in effect. ⢠By pressing GENRE when listening to a source from an HDD/DVD recorder, the most appropriate listening mode is automatically selected (page 26). Canceling synchronized amp mode If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected via HDMI to a plasma television or while you are watching a TV programme, the power for this unit is turned off. SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_En.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 40 En Chapter 10 Additional information Important ⢠Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen, as shown below). Dimming the display You can choose to dim the display of the display unit if you find it too bright. 1 1 Press SETUP. 2 Select âÂÂSystem Setupâ then press ENTER. 3 Select âÂÂDimmerâ then press ENTER . 4 Select âÂÂDimmer Lightâ or âÂÂDimmer Dark â then press ENTER to confirm. Setting the sleep timer The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying about it. ⢠Press to select an option. Choose between the following options: ⢠Sleep On â Switches off after about an hour ⢠Sleep Off â Cancels the sleep timer After selecting Sleep On , you can press SLEEP again to check how much time is left. Each line indicates approximately 12 minutes (remaining): Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table on the following page. 1 Set the input to TV. 2 Press and hold the TV button and press SETUP. The TV preset screen is shown on the remote control, and the current maker code is displayed on the LCD screen. 3 Use the number buttons to input the maker code for your TV, and press ENTER. See the table on the next page for the list of maker codes. If there is more than one code given for your make, input the first one in the list. ⢠If the makerâÂÂs name of your TV doesnâÂÂt appear in the table, you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV. 4 Point the remote towards your TV and press î SOURCE to check that the remote works with your TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch off. If it doesnâÂÂt and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 1 with a new code. Note 1 The display of the display unit dims when the sleep timer is set, regardless of this setting. RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SLEEP S l e e p --- -- TV TV PRESET 3 5 1 EXIT ENTER CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 Number buttons ENTER Maker code HTP-LX70_En.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 41 En TV Preset code list Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. Manufacturer Code(s) Manufacturer Code(s) Admiral 003, 004, 005 Aiwa 006, 007, 008 Akai 009, 010 Alba 011 AOC 012 Bell&Howell 013, 014 Bestar 015 Blaupunkt 016, 017 Blue sky 018 Brandt 019 Brocsonic 020, 021 Bush 022 Clatronic 023 Craig 024, 025, 026, 027 Croslex 028 Curtis Mathis 029, 030, 031 Daewoo 032, 033, 034, 035, 036, 037 Daytron 038 Dual 039, 040 Emerson 041, 042, 043, 044, 045, 046, 047 Ferguson 048, 049, 050 First line 051 Fisher 052, 053 Fraba 054 Fujitsu General 055 Funai 056, 057, 058, 059, 060 GE 061, 062, 063, 064, 065 Goldstar 066, 067, 068, 069, 070 Goodmans 071, 072, 073 Grundig 074, 075, 076 Hitachi 077, 078, 079, 080, 081, 082 HYUNDAI 083 ICE 084 Irradio 085 Itt 086, 087 JC Penny 088, 089, 090, 091 JVC 092, 093, 094, 095, 096, 097 Kendo 098 KTV 099, 100, 101 LG 102 Loewe 103, 104, 105 LXI 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111 Magnavox 112, 113, 114, 115 Mark 116 Matsui 117, 118 Medion 119 Mitsubishi 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126 Mivar 127 NEC 128, 129, 130, 131 Nokia 086, 087, 132, 133, 134 Nokia Oceanic 135, 136 Nordmende 137, 138, 139 Okano 140 Onwa 141 Orion 142 Panasonic 143, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150 Philco 151, 152, 153 Philips 154, 155, 156 Phonola 157 Portland 158, 159 Proscan 160 Quasar 161, 162 Radio 163 Radio Shack 164, 165, 166, 167 Radiola 168 RCA 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175 SABA 176, 177, 178, 179, 180 Samsung 181, 182, 183, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188 Sanyo 189, 190, 191, 192, 193, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198 Schneider 199, 200, 201, 202 Scott 203, 204 Sharp 205, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211 Siemens 212 Signature 213, 214 Sony 215, 216 Sylvania 217, 218, 219 Symphonic 220 Tatung 221 Telefunken 222, 223, 224, 225 Thomson 226, 227 Thorn 228 Toshiba 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234 Universum 235 Videch 236, 237, 238 W.Whouse 239 Wards 240, 241, 242, 243 Watson 244 Yamaha 245, 246, 247, 248, 249 Zenith 250, 251 PIONEER 001, 002 HTP-LX70_En.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 42 En Resetting the system Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the factory default. 1S witch the system on. 2 Press and hold INPUT SELECTOR then press the î STANDBY/ON button on the display unit. The next time you switch on, all the system settings should be reset. Installation and maintenance Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a location: Do... î Use in a well-ventilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack . DonâÂÂt... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the system will be exposed to direct sunlight. î Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment. î Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference â especially if the television uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be exposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth â this may prevent proper cooling of the system unit. î Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the system unitâÂÂs feet. Surround sound formats Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats youâÂÂll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes. Dolby The Dolby technologies are explained below. See www.dolby.com for more detailed information. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full range channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects) channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects; hence the term âÂÂ5.1-channelâ Dolby Digital. In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono, stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit rates and channels. Another feature, called Dialog Normalization, attenuates programs based on the average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve uniform playback level. Dolby Pro Logic II and Dolby Surround Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using the innovative âÂÂsteering logicâ circuit, this system extracts surround sound from sources as follows: ⢠Dolby Pro Logic â 4.1 channel sound (mono surround) from any stereo source ⢠Dolby Pro Logic II â 5.1 channel sound (stereo surround) from any stereo source With two channel sources, the âÂÂ.1â subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver. Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack, which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio technology for all high-definition programming and media. It combines the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming high-definition era. Built on Dolby Digital, the multi-channel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the next-generation A/V receivers but remains fully compatible with all current A/V receivers. HTP-LX70_En.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 43 En Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs of up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs in a single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps on Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby Digital Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended by directors and producers. It also features multi-channel sound with discrete channel output, interactive mixing and streaming capability in advanced systems. Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and video. Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, unlocking the true high-definition entertainment experience on high-definition optical discs in the next generation. When coupled with high-definition video, Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater experience with stunning sound and high-definition picture. It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8 full- range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz audio. It also features extensive metadata including dialogue normalization and dynamic range control. Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and video. * HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than eight audio channels. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâÂÂ, âÂÂPro Logicâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS The DTS technologies are explained below. See www.dtstech.com for more detailed information. DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full range channels, including an LFE channel. Higher sound quality is achieved through the use of a low compression rate, and high rates of transmittance during playback. DTS-ES DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives âÂÂtrueâ 6.1 channel sound, with a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel. DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed into the surround left/right channels. Both sources are also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder. DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel information already encoded into the source, as well as its own processing to determine channel localization (with two channel sources, the âÂÂ.1â subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver). Two modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS Neo:6 with two channel sources. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully backward compatible with all existing decoders. This means that DVD players can play this software using a conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder. DTS-EXPRESS DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and memory audio contents. DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio quality. DTS-HD Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates, facilitating data transfer to the maximum rate of 24.5 Mbps in the Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in the HD-DVD format, which by far exceeds that of a standard DVD. These high data transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96 kHz/24-bit 7.1-channel audio sources without deteriorating the quality of the original sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is an irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound faithfully as intended by the creator of music or movies. âÂÂDTSâ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and âÂÂDTS-HD Master Audioâ is a trademark of DTS, Inc. HTP-LX70_En.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 44 En Troubleshooting Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. ⢠If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. ⢠For audio-related problems, please also check the settings of the audio playback device. See the operating instructions for the device for detailed information. General Problem Remedy The power does not turn on, or switches off suddenly (an error message may be displayed at startup). Or, the display disappears suddenly and no sound is output (with the POWER ON indicator (Blue) and the HDMI indicator (Red) lit up). ⢠Leave the unit plugged in, wait for one minute, then switch back on. ⢠Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit. This could cause the system to shut off automatically. ⢠Check that the speakers are connected correctly. ⢠Make sure there is enough space for ventilation around the receiver subwoofer. ⢠Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model. ⢠Try reducing the volume level. ⢠If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. ⢠Do not block the air intake opening on the bottom as well as the air exhaust opening on the back of this unit. No sound is output when an input function is selected. ⢠If youâÂÂre using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly and the volume level of your external component (i.e. a portable player, etc.) is adjusted (see Connecting auxiliary components on page 33). ⢠Turn up the volume. ⢠No audio is output from the speakers connected to this unit if HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode (page 36). ⢠No audio is output if a DVI component is connected via HDMI. ⢠Press MUTE on the remote control to turn muting off. No sound from surround speaker. ⢠Refer to Channel level setting on page 30 to check the speaker levels. ⢠Check that you havenâÂÂt selected the Stereo mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 24). ⢠Connect the speakers properly (refer to Connecting up on page 8). ⢠Verify the audio output and HDMI settings of your external component when connecting an external component via an optical digital cable or HDMI cable. CanâÂÂt operate using the remote control. ⢠Replace the batteries ( Putting the batteries in the remote control on page 21). ⢠Operate within 7 m, 30ð of the remote sensor ( Using the remote control on page 22). ⢠Remove any obstacles or operate from another position. ⢠Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light. ⢠For operating the other Pioneer component connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of this receiver subwoofer , make sure that the control cable and either an HDMI or analog audio cable are connected (page 35). HTP-LX70_En.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 45 En Tuner HDMI Problem Remedy Considerable noise in radio broadcasts. ⢠Connect the AM antenna (refer to Connecting up on page 8) and adjust the direction and position for best reception. You may also connect an additional internal or external AM antenna (refer to Connecting external antennas on page 35). ⢠Fully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. You may also connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 35). ⢠Turn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away. ⢠The tuning inter val is incorrect for your country or region. See Changing the frequency step on page 29 to switch the tuning inter val. Auto tuning does not pick up some stations. ⢠The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal. For more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna. Symptom Remedy No picture or sound. ⢠This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-compatible. ⢠Depending on the connected source component, itâÂÂs possible that it will not work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). ⢠If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support. No sound, or sound suddenly ceases. ⢠Check that the HDMI Mode setting is set to AMP Mode / Through Mode . ⢠If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio. ⢠Check the audio output settings of the source component. HTP-LX70_En.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 46 En Displayed Messages Message Description 192kHz PCM SACD DTS-HD DTS Express Dolby T rueHD Dolby D These messages are displayed when you operate a function incompatible with the audio source being played back. No MIC Displays when you press MCACC when the MCACC setup mic is not connected. Muting Displays when you press TEST TONE or MCACC while this unit is muted. 2ch Only An operation is prohibited because it is only applicable to 2 channel sources, while the current source is a multichannel source. Exit Appears when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity. HDMI Through Displays when you change the Listening Mode, the volume level, or some sound settings when the HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode. Unknown The genre information for contents being played back on the HDD/DVD recorder cannot be obtained. No Genre There is no genre set for contents being played back on the HDD/DVD recorder. HDMI C.ERR 2C* The connected component is not compatible with synchronized genre mode. CanâÂÂt use ⢠You tried to use Genre Sync Mode for a source component that does not support this function. ⢠The source component is in a situation where Genre Sync Mode cannot be used. ⢠You tried to use Genre Sync Mode when the input source of this unit is a source other than HDMI. ⢠The operation is forbidden due to the surround settings. ⢠When the volume level is over 51, some functions are restricted. HDMI C.ERR 1** Check if the HDMI cable is properly connected. If the cable is properly connected, this unit may be damaged. In such an event, please contact a Pioneer-authorized service center or your nearest dealer. Noisy! Background noise is too high to complete MCACC setup successfully. Error MIC! An error occurred during MCACC setup because the microphone is not connected or is not connected properly. Error Speaker! An error occurred during MCACC setup because the speakers are not connected or are not connected properly. Over T emp Try lowering the volume. If this problem is not fixed by removing and inserting the power cable, this unit may be damaged. In such an event, please contact a Pioneer-authorized service center or your nearest dealer. OC Error1 OC Error2 Check whether the speaker cables are short-circuited. If the error message continues to be displayed, contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. *** BackUpERR Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. HTP-LX70_En.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 10 47 En Specifications SX-LX70W Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer ⢠Amplifier section RMS Power Output (8 channel output): Front (L/R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W (50 W 50 W) (1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 8 ⦠) Dual Center (CL/CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 W (50 W 50 W) (1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 8 ⦠) Surround (L/R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W (50 W 50 W) (1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 8 ⦠) Double Subwoofer (2 channel) . . . . . 100 W (50 W 50 W) (100 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 8 ⦠) â¢F M tuner section Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ⦠, unbalanced â¢A M tuner section Frequency range With 9 kHz step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz With 10 kHz step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz to 1700 kHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna ⢠Subwoofer section Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bass-reflex floor type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cm 1-way system Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cm cone type x2 Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz to 500 Hz Maximum Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W x2 ⢠Input/Output section HDMI terminal input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin x3 output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin (5 V, 100 mA) Other connector System connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 pin Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical x2 (Digital) RCA (2 pin) (Analog) Control output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack x2 Display unit System connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 pin Front Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack MCACC input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack iPod input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 pin (12 V, 420 mA) â¢M iscellaneous Power requirements . . . . . . . AC 110 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 W Power consumption in standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.39 W (HDMI Control ON) 0.29 W (HDMI Control OFF) Dimensions . . . . . . 245 mm (W) x 409 mm (H) x 600 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.8 kg SSP-LX70ST Satellite Speaker (Front/center speakers x2, Surround speakers x2) ⢠Front/center speakers Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm 1-way system Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm cone type x3 Impedance Front channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠Center channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power Front channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W Center channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W Dimensions . . . . 122.5 mm (W) x 89.5 mm (H) x 104 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 kg ⢠Surround speakers Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm 1-way system Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm cone type x2 Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W Dimensions . . . . 122.5 mm (W) x 89.5 mm (H) x 104 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.44 kg Accessories ⢠Accessory box (AS-LX70): Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AA/LR6 alkaline batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 HDMI cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Display cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Optical digital cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 iPod cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 This operating instructions ⢠Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX70W) box: Cleaning cloth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ⢠Satellite Speakers (SSP-LX70ST) box: Speaker cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Speaker bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Non-skid pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Note ⢠Specifications and design subject to possible modification without notice, due to improvements. Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2007 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. HTP-LX70_En.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_ChH HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 2 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 3 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
4 ChH ç®é ç®é å è£Â箱堧容ç© . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 01 æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂå è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂæÂÂ注æÂÂçÂÂå®Âå ¨æÂªæÂ½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 å®¶åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢é³æÂÂè¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 æ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Ã¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 æºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ä¸Â使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§æÂ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 æÂÂè²å¨系統æÂ¥ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 éÂÂæÂ¼æÂÂè²å¨æÂºè¨ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Â注æÂÂäºÂé  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 02 æÂ¥ç· æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 å´é¢æÂ¿ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 å¾Âé¢æÂ¿ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 顯示è£Âç½®èÂÂé¢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 åºæÂŽÂ£æÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 03 æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 顯示è£Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 顯示幠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 éÂÂæÂ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 æÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 æÂÂä½Â堧建ç FM/AM 調諧å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 æÂÂä½Âå ÂéÂÂé»漿é»è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â莻è¦Âæ© . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 æÂÂä½Âå Âé Blu-ray Disc æÂÂæÂ¾æ© . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 æÂÂä½Âå Âé DVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 æÂÂä½Âå ÂéÂÂ硬碠/DVD éÂÂ影橠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 è£Âå ¥éÂÂæÂ§å¨é»池. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 æÂÂä½ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 使ç¨液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 04 éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂ你使ç¨ ãÂÂèªå MCACC ãÂÂè¨Âå®Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ç°ç¹Âé³æÂ . . . . . 23 05 èÂÂè½æÂ¨çÂÂ系統輸åºçÂÂé³æÂ æÂÂæÂÂè²é³ ï¼Âé©ç¨æÂ¼æÂÂä½³è²é³@. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 以ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂèÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Dolby Pro Logic II Music è¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ä¸Â央影åÂÂè¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 使ç¨ ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 使ç¨åÂÂå ´åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 以ç«Âé«Âè²èÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂ模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 使ç¨ ãÂÂè²é³修æÂ£å¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 以 MCACC æÂÂæÂÂèÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 使ç¨ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âã ã ãÂÂé¿度ãÂÂå ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂèÂÂè½模张. . . . . 27 調æÂ´ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 調æÂ´è²é³延é² . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 06 æÂ¶è½廣æÂ æÂ¶è½廣æÂ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 æÂ¹å FM æÂ¥æÂ¶ä¸Âè¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 æÂ¹å AM 鳿ÂÂä¸Âä½³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 æÂ¹è®ÂéÂÂ鳿ÂÂå¶模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 è¨ÂæÂ¶éÂȌ° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 æÂ¶è½é Âè¨ÂéÂȌ° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 æÂ¹è®Âé »çÂÂéÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 07 ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 使ç¨ ãÂÂè²é³è¨Âå®ÂãÂÂé¸å® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢è¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Ã¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ§å¶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 éÂÂå®è²éÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 使ç¨èÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°ç¹Â模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 LFE 衰渠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 使ç¨測試é³調æÂ´è²éÂÂä½Â溠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 08 å ¶ä»ÂæÂ¥ç· é£æÂ¥è¼Âå©è¨Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 æÂ¸ä½Âé³è¨ÂçÂÂ飿ÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 é£æÂ¥é¡Âæ¯Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 飿ÂÂ¥ iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 èÂÂè½å¤ÂæÂ¥é³è¨Âä¾Â溠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 é£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥å¤©ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 éÂÂæÂ¼æÂ§å¶輸åºé£æÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 使ç¨ HDMI 飿ÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 HDMI 模å¼Âè¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 éÂÂæÂ¼ HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 4 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
5 ChH ç®é 09 HDMI Control é²衠HDMI Control 飿ÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 è¨Âå® HDMI é¸頠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 è¨Âå® HDMI Control 模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 è¨Âå®ÂèªåÂÂå»¶é² . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 é»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂé³è¨Â輸堥è¨Âå® ï¼ TV 輸堥@. . . . . . . . . . 39 使ç¨åÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂä¹Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Ã¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Ã¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模å¼ÂæÂÂä½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Ã¥ÂÂæ¶ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 10 å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠調æÂÂ顯示å¹Â亮度 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 è¨Âå®ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨以æÂ§å¶é»è¦Âæ© . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 é»è¦Âæ©Âé Âè¨Â代碼表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 éÂÂè¨Â系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 å®Âè£ÂèÂÂç¶Âè· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 å®Âè£ÂæÂÂ示 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂ格张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 æÂ éÂÂæÂÂé¤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 ä¸Âè¬ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 調諧å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 顯示çÂÂè¨ÂæÂ¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 è¦Âæ ¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 å è£Â箱堧容ç© è«Â確èªÂå è£Â箱堧æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé  ç®çÂÂç©åÂÂã é Âä»¶ç @AS-LX70 ï¼Â@⢠éÂÂæÂ§å¨ ï¼Â第 15 é Â@⢠AA/LR6 é¹¼æÂ§é»池x4 ï¼Â第 21 é Âï¼ â¢ é»æºÂç· x3 ï¼Â第 12 é Â@⢠顯示è£Âç½® ï¼Â第 13 é Â@⢠AM 迴路天締ï¼Â第 11 é Â@⢠FM ç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天締ï¼Â第 11 é Â@⢠麥å Â風 ï¼Âç¨æÂ¼èªå MCACC è¨Âå®Âï¼ ï¼Â第 23 é Â@⢠HDMI é£æÂ¥ç· â¢ æÂ§å¶é£æÂ¥ç· ï¼Â第 35 é Â@⢠顯示é£æÂ¥ç· ï¼Â第 11 é Â@⢠å Âå¸æÂ¸ä½Âé£æÂ¥ç· ï¼Â第 12 é Â@⢠iPod é£æÂ¥ç· ï¼Â第 34 é Â@⢠æÂ¾ÂÂä½ÂæÂÂå æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ SX-LX70W ï¼Âå è£Â箱@⢠渠æ½Â帠æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ SSP-LX70ST ï¼Âå è£Â箱@⢠æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½® x2 ãÂÂç°繠x2 ï¼Â@第 6 ï¼ 11 é Â@⢠æÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥ç· x6 ï¼Â第 11 é Â@⢠æÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ x4 ï¼Â第 6 é Âï¼ â¢ é²æ»Â墠x16 ï¼Â第 6 ï¼ 7 é Â@⢠èº絲 x4 ï¼Â第 7 é Âï¼ HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 5 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂå 01 6 ChH 第 1 ç« æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂå è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂæÂÂ注æÂÂçÂÂå®Âå ¨æÂªæÂ½ çµÂè£ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨平æÂ¾ä»¥å Âç¼çÂÂæÂÂå¤ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå·ã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ å¨平穩çÂÂ表é¢ä¸Âé²è¡ÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂçµÂè£ÂãÂÂè¨Âå®ÂèÂÂæÂº æÂ¾ã 家åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢é³æÂÂè¨Âå® æÂ¨å¯è¦ÂæÂ¿éÂÂ大å°ÂèÂÂç¹æÂ§ï¼Â決å®Â使ç¨éÂÂå¥Â系統ä¸Âé©ç¨çÂÂæÂ è²å¨å®Âç½®æÂ¹å¼Âã æ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âå® æÂ¤çºæ¨ÂæºÂå¤Âè²éÂÂç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®Âï¼Âé©ç¨æÂ¼ 5.1 è²é çÂÂå®¶åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢é³æÂÂã åÂÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âå® æÂ¤è¨Âå®ÂæÂ¹å¼ÂæÂÂé©åÂÂå¨ç¡æ³ÂæÂ¾ç½®å¾Âç°ç¹ÂçÂÂæÂ æ³Âä¸Âï¼ÂæÂÂè 丠å¸ÂæÂÂå¨èÂÂè½åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå §æÂºè¨ÂéÂÂé·çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é»ç·ÂæÂÂ使ç¨ã 使ç¨ æÂ¤è¨Âå®ÂçµÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨第 26 é Âä¸ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå ´åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âã æºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ æÂ¬æ©Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§å¯ç¨æÂ¼éÂÂå°Âå¨æÂ¿éÂÂå §çÂÂæÂºæÂ¾ä½Âç½® èÂÂé²è¡Â調æÂ´ã 使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ 1 å¦Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示ï¼Âå°Â鲿»Âå¢Âè²¼å¨æÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ä¸Âã è«Â使ç¨é²æ»Âå¢ÂæÂÂé»ÂæÂ§çÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂè²¼ä¸Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§çÂÂ庠é¨ã ç°ç¹Âè²ï¼Âå·¦å´@ç°ç¹Âè²ï¼Âå³å´@åÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½®ï¼Âå·¦å´@åÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½®ï¼Âå³å´@èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ ç°ç¹Âè²ï¼Âå·¦å´@ç°ç¹Âè²ï¼Âå³å´@èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ Ã¥ÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½® ï¼Âå·¦å´@åÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½® ï¼Âå³å´@æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ 鲿»Â墠x 16 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 6 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂå 01 7 ChH 2 è£Âä¸ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ã å°ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¾å¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ä¸Âï¼Âç¶å¾Â使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂèº çµ²å°ÂæÂ¯åº§åºå®Âã â¢ é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§æÂÂ堩種形çÂÂã æÂ¨å¯以å¨å°ÂæÂÂè²å¨ æÂ¾å¨æÂ¯åº§ä¸Âå¾Âï¼Â檢æÂ¥èº絲çÂÂä½Âç½®æÂ¯å¦æÂ£ç¢ºå°Âé½Âä¾Âå¤ æÂ·æÂ¯å¦使ç¨æÂ£ç¢ºçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ã ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½® ï¼Âå·¦å´ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âå³å´@ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½® ï¼Âå³å´ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âå·¦å´ï¼Â使ç¨ç¹å®ÂçÂÂæÂ¯åº§ï¼ ä¸¦é¨éÂÂæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂ堩種é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¯åº§ãÂÂï¼ ä¸Â使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§æÂ â¢ å°Â鲿»Âå¢Âé»Âè²¼æÂ¼æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½®èÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂ庠é¨ ï¼Âå¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示@ã è«Â使ç¨é²æ»Âå¢ÂæÂÂé»ÂæÂ§çÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂè²¼ä¸Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂåºÂé¨ã æÂÂè²å¨系統æÂ¥ç· è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± æÂ¥ç· ä»¥ä¾¿æÂ£ç¢ºé£æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨ã å®ÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·Âå¾Âï¼Âè«Âä¾Âç § ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示å®Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ï¼Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã å®Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ å¾Âï¼Âè«Âå·è¡Âèªå MCACC è¨Âå® ï¼Â第 23 é Âï¼ ï¼Âå®ÂæÂÂç°繠鳿ÂÂçÂÂè¨Âå®Âã éÂÂæÂ¼æÂÂè²å¨æÂºè¨ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Â注æÂÂäºÂ頠⢠å°Â主è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂ左峿ÂÂè²å¨å®Âè£Âå¨èÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂè·Âä¹ÂèÂÂã â¢ 使ç¨æ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âå®ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°Âç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨å®Âè£Âå¨ç¨Âå¾® é«ÂæÂ¼è³æÂµçÂÂä½Â置以å¾Âå°æÂÂä½³æÂÂæÂÂã â¢ 使ç¨åÂÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âå®ÂæÂÂï¼Â使左å´èÂÂå³å´æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢素1.5 m 以å¾Âå°æÂÂä½³æÂÂæÂÂã å®Âå ¨é Âç¥@⢠è«Âå¿å°ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¾ç½®æÂ¼ä¸Âç©©å®ÂçÂÂå¹³é¢ä¸Âï¼ÂéÂÂ樣å¯è½尠è´æÂÂè²å¨å¾åÂÂï¼Âé æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂÂå£ÂæÂÂ人å¡åÂÂå·ã â¢ æÂ¬ç³»çµ±é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é½æÂ¯é²ç£ÂæÂÂè²å¨ã ç¶èÂÂï¼ è¦Âå®Âè£Âä½Âç½®ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂèÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨å®Âè£Âä½Âç½®éÂÂæÂ¼æÂ¥è¿Âé»覠æ©Âè¢å¹Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯è½æÂÂç¼çÂÂè²彩失çÂÂçÂÂæÂ æ³Âã èÂ¥ç¼çÂÂæÂ¤ æÂ æ³Âï¼Âè«Âå ÂéÂÂéÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â黿ºÂï¼ 15 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂè³ 30 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå¾ åÂÂéÂÂæÂ°éÂÂæ©ÂãÂÂèÂ¥æÂ æ³Âä»ÂæÂªæÂ¹åÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨系統é é¢é»è¦Âæ©Âã â¢ çºå®Â堨起è¦Âï¼Âè«Â確å®ÂæÂÂè²å¨端åÂÂå¤Âæ²ÂæÂÂä»»ä½ÂæÂªå 覠çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é»ç·Âã â¢ è«Âå¿å°Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥å ¶ä»ÂæÂ´å¤§å¨ã å¦åÂÂå¯è½é æÂÂæÂ éÂÂæÂÂå¼Âèµ·ç«ç½ã â¢ è«Âå¿é£æÂ¥æÂ¤ç³»çµ±å¤ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂÂè²å¨ã â¢ æÂÂè²å¨系統è·網èÂÂç¡æ³ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âã è«Âå¿試åÂÂå¼·è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå®Âï¼ å¦åÂÂå¯è½å°Âè´è·網èÂÂæÂÂå£Âã â¢ è«Â使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂ渠æ½Âå¸Â渠æ½Âé³箱ãÂÂè«Âå¿è®Âé Âç²¾ãÂÂç¨Âé åÂÂãÂÂç²è¯æÂÂ殺è²åÂÂæÂ¥è§¸å°æÂ¬æ©Â表é¢ï¼Âå¦åÂÂ表é¢å¯è½ æÂÂè®Âè²ãÂÂæÂ¤å¤Âï¼Â使ç¨沾æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¸èÂ¥åÂÂçÂÂ渠æ½Âå¸ÂæÂÂï¼Âè« å°Âå¿Âéµå®Â堶注æÂÂäºÂé  ã æÂÂè²å¨ èº絲 æÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ Ã¥ÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½®èÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ 鲿»Â墠x 16 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 7 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ¥ç· 02 8 ChH 第 2 ç« æÂ¥ç· æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ å´é¢æÂ¿ ⢠å´é¢æÂ¿çÂÂæÂ¥é Âä¸ÂæÂÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã A. æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂèµ·é¤åÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸ÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã B. å®ÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼Âå°ÂæºÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂä½Âç½®ï¼Âç¶å¾Âå°ÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¾åÂÂå å§Âä½Âç½®ã 1 CONTROL OUT æÂÂå @x2 @使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂ§å¶é£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥å ¶ä»Âå ÂéÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 DIGITAL OPTICAL IN æÂÂå @x2 ï¼ è¦ÂæÂ¶è½å Âå¸æÂ¸ä½Â鳿ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°Â輸堥è®ÂæÂ´çº Digital 1 æÂ Digital 2 ã ç¶æÂ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂæÂ¸ä½Â輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥å°éÂÂäºÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âè¨Âå® ã TV Input ã ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 39 é Âï¼ ã 3 AM LOOP 天ç·Â端å 4F M 天ç·ÂæÂÂ座 5 ANALOG AUDIO IN æÂÂå 使ç¨ç«Âé«Âè²é³æÂÂ代碼èÂÂçÂÂä¾Âèªå¤Âé¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè²é³ã èÂ¥è¦ÂæÂ¶ è½é¡Âæ¯Â鳿ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°Â輸堥è®ÂæÂ´çº Analog ã ç¶æÂ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂé¡Âæ¯Â輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥å°éÂÂäºÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âè¨Âå® ã TV Input ã ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 39 é Âï¼ ã 6 SPEAKERS 端å æ¯Âå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂé¡Âè²èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèªçÂÂæÂ¥é Âé¡Âè²ã 7 AC IN ï¼Â黿ºÂæÂÂå FRONT R R L RL LR L AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 ⦠FRONT CENTER SURROUND SUBWOOFER OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 OUT 1 OUT 2 SPEAKERS ( 8 ⦠) ANALOG AUDIO IN ANTENNA DIGIT AL CONTROL 1 2 5 6 7 4 3 AC IN A B HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 8 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ¥ç· 02 9 ChH å¾Âé¢æÂ¿ 8 HDMI OUT æÂ¥é  é£æÂ¥è³æÂ HDMI 端åÂÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã 9 HDMI IN æÂ¥é  ï¼ x3 @使ç¨é«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ質é³è¨Âî¿è¦Âè¨Âé£æÂ¥æÂ¹å¼Âé£æÂ¥ç¸容ç HDMI è£Âç½® ã èÂ¥è¦Â鏿ÂÂæÂ¤è¼¸å ¥ï¼Âè«Âé¸æÂ HDMI 1 è³ HDMI 3 ã 10 SYSTEM æÂ¥é  é£æÂ¥è³顯示è£Âç½®ã 顯示è£Âç½®èÂÂé¢ 1 SYSTEM æÂ¥é  é£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ 2 F.AUDIO 輸堥æÂÂå èÂ¥è¦ÂèÂÂè½ä¾Âèªå¤Âé¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂï¼Âè«Â使ç¨ç«Âé«Âè²迷你æÂÂé  é£æÂ¥ç·Â飿ÂÂ¥ ã é£æÂ¥å¾Âï¼Â輸堥èªåÂÂè®ÂæÂ´çº Front Audio In ã 3 iPod 輸堥端å ç¨æÂ¼é£æÂ¥æÂ¨ç Apple iPod Ã¥ÂÂçºé³æºÂã é£æÂÂ¥ iPod æÂÂï¼Â輸堥èªåÂÂè®ÂæÂ´çº iPod ã 4 MCACC SETUP MIC æÂÂå ç¨æÂ¼é£æÂ¥ä¾Âèªå MCACC è¨Âå®Â使ç¨çÂÂé¨éÂÂ麥å Â風 ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 23 é Âï¼ ã HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 89 10 F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM 1 2 3 4 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 9 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ¥ç· 02 10 ChH åºæÂŽÂ£æÂÂ¥ éÂÂ覠⢠å°ÂæÂ¤ç³»çµ±é²è¡ÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂè®ÂæÂ´æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ éÂÂéÂÂ黿ºÂ@並å°Â黿ºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂèªçÂÂä¸Â黿ºÂæÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂé¤ãÂÂå®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ æÂ¥ç·Âå¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°Â黿ºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂ¥ä¸Â黿ºÂæÂÂ座ã è¦å â¢ å ÂéÂÂå°ÂæÂ¼ä»»ä½Âå é¯誤çµÂè£ÂæÂÂå®Âè£ÂãÂÂçÂÂå£Âåºå®Â強度丠足ãÂÂåºå®Âè£Âå ï¼ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»Â建æÂÂï¼ ãÂÂä¸Âç¶使ç¨æÂÂ天ç½æÂ é æÂÂä¹ÂæÂÂå¤Âï¼Âæ¦Âä¸Â負責ã HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 2 SYSTEM F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT INPUT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM 1 FL CL FR CR SR SL èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® AM 迴路天締FM 天締å¾Âé¢æÂ¿ 顯示è£Âç½® æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ 顯示é£æÂ¥ç· åÂÂç½®î¿ ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âå³å´@åÂÂç½®î¿ ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âå·¦å´@ç°ç¹Âè² æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âå³å´@ç°ç¹Âè² æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âå·¦å´@å´é¢æÂ¿ FRONT R R L RL LR L AM LOOP FRONT CENTER SURROUND SUB ANALOG AU DI O IN ANTENNA 3 4 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 10 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ¥ç· 02 11 ChH 1 é£æÂ¥é¡¯ç¤ºè£Âç½®èÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ã å°Â顯示å¹Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂ堥顯示è£Âç½®å¾ÂæÂ¹çÂÂæÂ¥é Âï¼Âç¶å¾Âå°Â顯示 å¹Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂå¦ä¸Â端æÂÂå ¥æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ç SYSTEM æÂ¥é Âã 注æÂ â¢ è«Âå¿åÂÂ試å°Â顯示è£Âç½®å®Âè£Âå¨çÂÂä¸Âã 2 çµÂ裠AM 迴路天ç·Âã a. ä¾Âç®Âé ÂæÂÂ示æÂ¹åÂÂå½ÂæÂ²æÂ¯æÂ¶ã b. å°Â迴路天ç·Â夾å¨æÂ¯æÂ¶ä¸Âã c. èÂ¥è¦Âåºå®Âå¨çÂÂå£ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»Â表é¢ä¸Âï¼Âå Â以èº絲åºå®ÂæÂ¯æÂ¶ å¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå·è¡ÂæÂ¥é© b ã æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è°æÂ¨ä»¥èº絲åºå®ÂæÂ¯æÂ¶åÂÂï¼Âå Â確èªÂæÂ¥æÂ¶å¼·åº¦ã 3 飿ÂÂ¥ AM å FM 天締1 ã a. å° AM 迴路天ç·ÂçÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Âæ¢Âé»ç·Âé£æÂ¥å°æ¯Âå AM 天締端åÂÂ丠2 ã æÂÂä¸Âå¡èÂÂ便å¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ端åÂÂï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾ÂæÂÂå ¥é»ç·Âï¼Âé¬ÂéÂÂå¡ èÂÂ便å¯å°Âé»ç·Â夾ä½Âåºå®Âã b. å° FM 天締3 æÂÂé ÂæÂ¨å ¥ FM 天ç·ÂæÂÂæ§½çÂÂä¸Â央æÂ¥è ³ã 4 é£æÂ¥æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ã â¢ æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Â端齿ÂÂå«é¡Âè²代碼çÂÂæÂÂ¥ é Âï¼Âå¦ä¸Â端åÂÂæÂÂå ©æ¢Âé»ç·Âã â¢ æÂÂéÂÂ並æÂÂåºæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂé»ç·ÂçÂÂä¿Âè·層ã â¢ å°Âé»ç·Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂÂè²å¨ä¸Âã 使ç¨å¾Â表é¢åÂÂèÂÂæ¨Â籤ä¸ÂæÂ ä¾ÂçÂÂé¡Âè²代碼æÂÂ示å¯以èÂÂå¥åÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæ¯Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ã æ¯Âå°Âé¡Âè²代碼ç·ÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂæ¨Â籤ä¸Âé¡Âè²æÂÂ示ï¼Âç¶å¾Âå° é¡Âè²代碼ç·ÂæÂÂ堥素è² ï¼ ï¼Â端ï¼Âå¦ä¸Âæ¢Âç·ÂæÂÂå ¥ é»Âè² ï¼ â ï¼Â端ã â¢ å°Âå¦ä¸Â端æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨å´é¢æÂÂé¡Âè²代碼ç æÂÂè²å¨端åÂÂã è«Â確å®Âå°Âé»ç·Âå®Âå ¨æÂÂå ¥ã è«Âå°Âå¿ÂæÂÂå ¥æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂé Âï¼Âå æÂ¤å¨æÂÂ堥堶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ端å æÂÂå¿ é ÂæÂÂæÂ£ç¢ºæÂ¹åÂÂæÂÂå ¥ã è«Â確å®ÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂ£ç¢ºã éÂÂ註 1 ⢠è«Âå°Â天ç·Âé é¢堶ä»Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂãÂÂ顯示è£Â置以åÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ã â¢ èÂ¥é¨éÂÂ天ç·ÂçÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶è¨ÂèÂÂä¸Âè¯ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 28 é Âä¸Âç æÂ¹å FM æÂ¥æÂ¶ä¸Âè¯ 以å æÂ¹å AM 鳿ÂÂä¸Âä½³ ï¼ÂæÂÂ第 35 é Âä¸Âç é£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥å¤©ç· ã â¢ ä¸Âå¯å®Âè£Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂ迴路天ç·Â以å¤ÂçÂÂ天ç·Âï¼ÂæÂÂ妠第 35 é  æÂÂè¿°çÂÂå¤ÂæÂ¥å¤©ç·Âã 2 ⢠è«Âå¿使天ç·ÂæÂ¥è§¸éÂÂ屬ç©é«Âï¼Â並é¿å Âå°Âå ¶å®Âç½®å¨é»蠦ãÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»ÂéÂȌ¨ç¨åÂÂéÂÂè¿Âã â¢ èÂ¥ç¡ç·ÂéÂȾ¶è¨Âä¸Âè¯ï¼Âå¯éÂÂæÂ°å°Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天ç·Âé»ç·Âè£Âè³ç¸åÂÂçÂÂ端åÂÂ以æ±ÂæÂ¹åÂÂã â¢ çºéÂÂæÂÂä½³æÂ¶è¨Âï¼Âè«Âå¿尠AM 迴路天ç·Âé»ç·ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¹åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂå°Âå ¶ç¹Âå¨迴路天ç·Âå¨åÂÂã 3 çº確ä¿ÂæÂÂä½³æÂ¶è¨Âï¼Âè«Â確宠FM 天ç·Âå®Âå ¨å±ÂéÂÂï¼Âä¸ÂæÂªçºÂç¹ÂæÂÂæÂ¸æÂÂæÂ¼è£Âç½®å¾ÂæÂ¹ã a b c 1 2 3 é¡Âè²代碼締ï¼Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂÂè²å¨@é¡Âè²代碼çÂÂæÂ¥é  ï¼Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨@é»Âè² (âÂÂ) ç´ è² ( ) é¡Âè²代碼締HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 11 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ¥ç· 02 12 ChH 注æÂ â¢ éÂÂäºÂæÂÂè²å¨端åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ帶æÂ å±éªé»å£Âã çºé¿å Âå¨é£æÂ¥æÂ è«é¢æÂÂè²å¨ç·ÂæÂÂç¼çÂÂéÂȾÂÂå±éªï¼Âå¨觸æÂ¸ä»»ä½ÂæÂªçµÂç·£ é¨åÂÂä¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå Âå°Â黿ºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂÂé¢ã â¢ è«Âå¿é£æÂ¥æÂ¤ç³»çµ±å¤ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂÂè²å¨ã â¢ è«Âå¿å°Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥æÂ¤ç³»çµ±ä»¥å¤ÂçÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨ã èÂÂ¥ é£æÂ¥å ¶ä»ÂæÂ´å¤§å¨å¯è½å°Âè´æÂ éÂÂæÂÂå¼Âèµ·ç«ç½ã â¢ é£æÂ¥æÂÂé Âå¾Âï¼Âè¼Âè¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Â以確å®Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂ締端已ç¶ÂèÂÂ端åÂÂç¢ç¢å°é£æÂ¥ã é£æÂ¥ä¸Âè¯å¯è½ç¢çÂÂåªé³ 並é æÂÂè²é³ä¸ÂæÂ·ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂçºÂç·ÂçÂÂè¯ç·ÂæÂÂå¤Â被æÂÂåº端åÂÂå¤Â並å°Âè´è¯ç·ÂäºÂç¸ æÂ¥è§¸ï¼Âå°ÂæÂÂå°ÂæÂ¾å¤§å¨ç¢çÂÂéÂÂéÂÂçÂÂé¡Âå¤Âè² è¼Âã éÂÂ樣å¯ è½é æÂÂæÂ¾å¤§å¨åÂÂæÂ¢ä½Âç¨ï¼ÂçÂÂè³æÂÂå£ÂæÂ¾å¤§å¨ã 5 èÂ¥æÂÂå ¶ä»Âè¦Âé£æÂ¥ç DVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨æÂÂå½±é³ä¾Â溠1 è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ è«Âå Âé²è¡Âé£æÂ¥ï¼Âç¨Âå¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Â黿ºÂã éÂÂæÂ¼é£æÂ¥æÂ¸ä½Âä¾ÂæºÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂ¹å¼Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 33 é Âã 6 å°ÂéÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥è³é»è¦Âæ©Âã â¢ å°ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ç HDMI OUT æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³é»覠æ©Âç HDMI 輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 7 å°Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂé³è¨Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ã â¢ èÂ¥è¦Â使ç¨æÂ¬æ©ÂèÂÂè½é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂè²é³ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¿ é Âå°Âé»è¦Âæ© çÂÂé³è¨Â輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂé³è¨Â輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã æÂ¨å¯ 以使ç¨æÂ¸ä½ ï¼Âå Âå¸ï¼ÂæÂÂé¡Âæ¯Âé³è¨Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥ã å¦Â覠èÂÂè½æÂ¸ä½Â鳿ÂÂï¼Âè«Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ä¸Âç DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 ãÂÂèÂ¥è¦Âå¨é£æÂ¥è³æÂ¯æÂ´çÂÂå Âé é»漿é»è¦ÂæÂÂ使ç¨ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¿ é ÂéÂÂé HDMI é£æÂ¥ã â¢ æÂ¨å¿ é Âå Âè¨Âå® ã TV Input ãÂÂ以åÂÂæÂÂä¾Âèªé»漿é»覠ï¼Âå ·æÂ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ï¼ÂçÂÂé³è¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂå°ÂæÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂ輸 å ¥ä¾ÂæºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³é»è¦Âæ©Âé³è¨Âï¼Âç¶å¾Â使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ æÂÂä½ÂæÂ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã å¦ÂéÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 17 é Â丠ç æÂÂä½Âå ÂéÂÂé»漿é»è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â莻è¦Âæ© åÂÂ第 39 é Âä¸Âç é» 漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂé³è¨Â輸堥è¨Âå® ï¼ TV 輸堥@ã 8 æÂ¥ä¸Â黿ºÂç·Âã 2 ⢠å°Â黿ºÂç·Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ç AC 黿ºÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã ä¾Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé ÂåºÂå°Âæ¯Âæ¢Â黿ºÂç·Âé£æÂ¥è³çÂÂä¸Â黿ºÂæÂÂ座ã 1. æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ 2. é»è¦Â橠⢠å°Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨å´é¢æÂ¿çÂÂ黿ºÂç·Âç¹ÂéÂÂæÂ¬ æ©ÂèÂÂé¢ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ´æÂÂå´é¢æÂ¿çÂÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 R L AM LOOP OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 ANALOG AUD I O IN ANTENNA DIGIT AL é»è¦Âæ© 7 6 å¾Âé³è¨Â輸åº æÂ å¾ÂæÂ¸ä½Âé³訠輸åºï¼Âå Âå¸@è³ HDMI 輸堥 å¾Âé¢æÂ¿ å´é¢æÂ¿ æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ éÂÂ註 1 è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ é£æÂ¥é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂ顯示å¨ ï¼ÂèÂ¥æÂÂè¦Âè¨Âä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âï¼Â以便ç¼æÂ®æÂ¤ç³»çµ±çÂÂå®¶åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢åÂÂè½ã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂ顯示å¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Â以äºÂè§£é£æÂ¥çÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âã 2 ⢠è«Âå¿使ç¨æÂ¬ç³»çµ±é¨éÂÂ以å¤ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Â黿ºÂç·Âã â¢ é¤é£æÂ¥æÂ¬ç³»çµ±å¤Âï¼Âè«Âå¿å°Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂ黿ºÂç·Âä½Âçº堶ä»Âç¨éÂÂ使ç¨ã â¢ å°ÂæÂ¬æ©Âé£æÂ¥è³ AC 黿ºÂæÂÂ座å¾Âï¼ÂéÂÂå§ 15 ç§ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¨ÂåºÂã åÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂä¸Âå¯以å·è¡Âä»»ä½ÂæÂÂä½Âã 顯示è£Âç½®ä¸Âç HDMI æÂÂ示çÂÂå¨åÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂçÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯ 以å¨æÂ¤ HDMI æÂÂ示çÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¢éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂå³éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¬æ©Â黿ºÂã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 12 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 13 ChH 第 3 ç« æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 顯示è£Âç½® 1 î STANDBY/ON æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨é»æºÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 INPUT SELECTOR ï¼Â第 33 é Âï¼ åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âé¨é³è¨Â輸堥æÂÂå @HDMI 1 è³ HDMI 3 ã Digital 1 ã Digital 2 ã Analog ã iPod æÂ Front Audio In ï¼ ã 3 VOL /â æÂÂéµ ç¨æÂ¼èª¿æÂ´é³éÂÂã 4 POWER ON æÂÂ示ç ï¼ÂèÂÂè²@5 Ã¥ÂÂé¢æÂ¿é¡¯ç¤º 詳æÂ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 14 é Âã 6 ç´ å¤Âç·ÂéÂÂæÂ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨ ï¼Â第 22 é Âï¼ 7 HDMI æÂÂ示ç ï¼Âç´ è²@ç¶æÂ¤æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥è³ HDMI ï¼ HDCP ï¼Âç¸容è¨Âå æÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã å¨å°ÂæÂ¬æ©Â黿ºÂæÂÂé ÂæÂÂå ¥ AC 黿ºÂæÂÂ座å¾ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæÂ ç¤ºçÂÂä¹ÂæÂÂ亮起ã é Â鍿ÂÂé 1 2 3 4 7 5 6 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 13 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 14 ChH 顯示幠1 DIRECT 鏿ÂÂç´æÂ¥è²é³æÂ ï¼Âå³éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²é³æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 24 é Âï¼ ã 2 èÂÂè½模å¼ÂæÂÂ示ç STEREO 鏿ÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模å¼ÂæÂÂå¨ ãÂÂèªåÂÂèÂÂè½ãÂÂ模å¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ç«Âé« è²é³æºÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã F.S.SURR. 鏿ÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Â種åÂÂå ´åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²èÂÂè½模å¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮 起@第 26 é Âï¼ ã ADV.SURR. 鏿ÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Â種å Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²èÂÂè½模å¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 25 é Âï¼ ã 3 2 PRO LOGIC II å¨ Dolby Pro Logic II 解碼æÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 25 é Âï¼ ã 4 è²é³èÂÂçÂÂæÂÂ示ç å¨é¸æÂ ãÂÂé¿度ã ã ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âã ã ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂæÂÂé³調æÂ§å¶åÂÂè½æÂ æÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 27 é Âï¼ ã 5 S.RTRV è²é³修æÂ£å¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã 6 HDMI THROUGH HDMI Mode è¨Âå®Âçº Through Mode æÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã 7 MCACC MCACC ç¹æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 27 é Âï¼ ã èªå MCACC è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂç ï¼Â第 23 é Âï¼ ã 8 æÂ¸ä½Âæ ¼å¼ÂæÂÂ示ç 2 DIGITAL æÂÂæÂ¾ Dolby Digital ä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ï¼Â第 24 é Âï¼ ã DTS æÂÂæÂ¾ DTS ä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 24 é Âï¼ ã DTS 96/24 æÂÂæÂ¾ DTS 96/24 解碼æÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 24 é Âï¼ ã DSD î PCM 以 SACD å° DSD ï¼ Direct Stream Digital ï¼Âç´æÂ¥æµÂæÂ¸ ä½Âï¼Âè½ÂæÂÂçº PCM æÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã PCM æÂÂæÂ¾ PCM è¨ÂèÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã 9 Ã¥ÂÂå Â顯示幠10 調諧卿ÂÂ示ç æÂ¥æÂ¶å»£æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã å¨èªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模å¼Âä¸ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶ç«Âé«Âè² FM 廣æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂ äº®èµ·ã é¸æÂ FM å®è²éÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã 11 ç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 40 é Âï¼ ã 2 DIGIT AL DTS 96/24 DIRECT STEREO F .S.SURR. LO UDNESS MIDNIGHT DNR DIAL OG HDMI THROUGH QUIET TONE S.RTRV MCACC ADV .SURR. 2 PRO L OGIC DSD PCM 2 1 4 6 5 89 10 11 3 7 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 14 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 15 ChH éÂÂæÂ§å¨ â¢ å¦ÂéÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨çÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 22 é Âä¸Âç æÂ ä½ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ ã æÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ æÂ¬ç¯Â說æÂÂå¦Âä½ÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨çÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ã è«Â注 æÂÂï¼Âç¶æÂ¨çºåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂè£Âç½®é¸æÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½æÂÂï¼ÂæÂ§å¶æÂÂéµ æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 1 î RECEIVER å°ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨åÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ã 2 î TV å°Âé»è¦Âæ©Â黿ºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ã TV CTRL å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨åÂÂæÂÂè³é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂä½Â模张ï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂå½±é¿æÂ¬æ©Âç ç®åÂÂ輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂï¼ ã 3 î SOURCE å°ÂæÂÂ鏿ÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ黿ºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ï¼Â第 22 é Âï¼ ã 4 輸堥鏿ÂÂæÂÂéµ è®ÂæÂ´æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂ輸堥ã 使ç¨æÂŽÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂÂä½Âå¦ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è¨Âå æÂÂï¼Âå¿ é ÂæÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂäºÂæÂÂéµçÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¹Âä¸Âã HDMI 1 è³ HDMI 3 å°Â輸堥徠HDMI 1 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ HDMI 3 ã TV Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂè³å¨é»è¦Âæ©Â輸堥è¨Âå®Â鏿ÂÂçÂÂ輸堥 ï¼Â第 39 é Âï¼ ã FM/AM ï¼Â第 28 é Âï¼ åÂÂæÂ FM å AM 波段ã LINE ï¼Â第 34 é Âï¼ åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨çÂÂé³訠輸堥 ï¼ Digital 1 ã Digital 2 ã Analog ã iPod æÂ Front Audio In ï¼Âã 5 æ¶²æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ 顯示ç¨æÂ¼æÂ§å¶æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ãÂÂé»漿é»è¦Âã DVD æÂÂæÂ¾ å¨ã Blu-ray Disc æÂÂæÂ¾æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂ硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂçÂÂå¤Âé¨è¨Âå çÂÂæÂÂéµã ç®åÂÂçÂÂæÂÂä½Â模å¼Â顯示å¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨è¢å¹ÂçÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂæÂ¹ã éÂÂç¶液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢å¨ä¸Â段æÂÂéÂÂæÂªå·è¡Âä»»ä½ÂæÂÂä½Âå¾ÂæÂÂ涠失ï¼Âä½Âåªè¦Â碰觸è¢å¹ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂ鵿ÂÂï¼Âå®Âå°±æÂ åºç¾ã 6 å ¶ä»Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéµ ç¨æÂ¼æÂÂä½Â硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»Âé£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 7 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Â游æ¨ÂæÂÂéÂ括Âå ENTER ç¨æÂ¼æÂ§å¶æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨åÂÂè½ã 8 SETUP ç¨æÂ¼åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå®ÂãÂÂ調諧å¨è¨Âå®ÂçÂÂçÂÂé¸å®系統 ï¼Â第 28 ã 30 ã 38 ã 40 é Âï¼ ã 9 RETURN ç¨æÂ¼åÂÂæ¶Âè¨Âå®Âã 10 RCV ç¨æÂ¼ç¶æÂ¬æ©Âå¨堶ä»ÂæÂÂä½Â模å¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè² å¨ã åÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次å¯è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂä½Â模å¼Âã 11 VOL /â ç¨æÂ¼èª¿æÂ´æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨çÂÂé³éÂÂã 12 MUTE éÂÂ鳿ÂÂæÂ¢å¾©æÂÂæÂ¾å·²éÂÂé³çÂÂè²é³ ï¼Â調æÂ´é³éÂÂä¹Â使è²é³æÂ¢å¾© æÂÂæÂ¾ï¼ ã RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 123 CTRL TV LINE FM/AM TV TOP MENU DISC NAVIGATOR HOME MENU MENU PAGE RETURN RECEIVER RCV VOL M UT E SETUP î î î 1 5 8 10 11 7 4 2 3 9 12 6 6 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 15 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 16 ChH æ¶²æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ 13 SURR ç¨æÂ¼é¸æÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模张ï¼Â第 24 é Âï¼ ã ADV.SURR ç¨æÂ¼å°Âé³è¨Âè¨Âå®Âè®ÂæÂ´çºå ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå§ÂçÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²模张ï¼Â第 25 é Âï¼ ã F.S.SURR ç¨æÂ¼é¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå ´åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模张ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã 14 GENRE ç¨æÂ¼å¨ ãÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂãÂÂ模å¼Âä¸ÂèÂÂè½é³æÂ ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã ï¼ÂæÂ¤æÂÂéµå å¨æÂÂä½Â硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂæÂÂéÂÂåºç¾ RECEIVER ç«é¢æÂÂ顯示ãÂÂï¼ 15 SOUND RTRV æÂÂä¸Âå¯尠CD Ã¥ÂÂ質鳿ÂÂæÂ¢å¾©æÂÂå£Â縮çÂÂ鳿ÂÂä¾Â溠ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã 16 DIRECT ç¨æÂ¼éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²é³模张ï¼Â第 24 é Âï¼ ã 17 MCACC éÂÂå§Âèªå MCACC è¨Âå® ï¼Â第 23 é Âï¼ ã 18 TEST TONE ç¨æÂ¼è¼¸åº測試é³ ï¼Â以便é²è¡ÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®Âï¼ ï¼Â第 32 é Âï¼ ã 19 SOUND æÂÂä¸Âå¯é²堥鳿ÂÂé¸å®ï¼Âé²èÂÂ調æÂ´ä½Âé³èÂÂé«Âé³çÂÂã 20 SLEEP æÂÂä¸Âå¯è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ ï¼Â第 40 é Âï¼ ã 21 EXIT Ã¥ÂÂæ¶Âè¨Âå®Â並éÂÂåº RECEIVER ç«é¢ã æÂÂä½Â堧建ç FM/AM 調諧å¨ 1 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Â游æ¨ÂæÂÂéÂ括Âå ENTER ç¨æÂ¼æÂ§å¶ FM/AM 調諧å¨åÂÂè½ã 2 SETUP ç¨æÂ¼åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸å®系統æÂÂ調諧å¨è¨Âå®Âã 3 RETURN ç¨æÂ¼åÂÂæ¶Âè¨Âå®Âã 液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ 4 æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµ ç¨æÂ¼ç´æÂ¥é¸æÂÂé Âè¨Â廣æÂÂéÂȌ°ã CLEAR æÂÂä¸Âå¯渠é¤任ä½Â輸堥çÂÂ堧容並éÂÂæÂ°è¼¸å ¥ã 5 TUNE /â ç¨æÂ¼æÂÂå°ÂéÂȌ°頻çÂÂã 6 ST /â ç¨æÂ¼é¸æÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ã RECEIVER SURR GENRE SLEEP EXIT MC ACC SOUND DIRECT ADV . SURR TEST TONE SOUND RTRV F .S. SURR 16 19 21 18 15 13 14 17 20 TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN 2 3 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP 1 FM/AM - TUNE - ST CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 4 5 6 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 16 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 17 ChH æÂÂä½Âå ÂéÂÂé»漿é»è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â莻è¦Âæ© è«Âå ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 40 é Âä¸Âç è¨Âå®ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨以æÂ§å¶é»è¦Âæ© ä¸ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¨Âå®Âé»è¦Âæ©Âé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°çÂÂè³Âè¨Âã è«Â注æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂäºÂæÂÂéµç¡æ³ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂ äºÂé»è¦Âæ©Â使ç¨ã 1 î TV å°Âé»è¦Âæ©Â黿ºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ã TV CTRL å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨åÂÂæÂÂè³é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂä½Â模张ï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂå½±é¿æÂ¬æ©Âç ç®åÂÂ輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂï¼ ã 2 î SOURCE å°Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂ黿ºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ã 3 PAGE </> Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂæ¶²æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ä¸ÂçÂÂé Âé¢ã 4 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Â游æ¨ÂæÂÂéÂ括Âå ENTER ç¨æÂ¼å°Â覽æÂÂæÂÂè¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½é¸å®ã æÂÂ丠ENTER 鏿ÂÂç®åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½ çÂÂé¸頠ã 5 HOME MENU 顯示 HOME MENU ç«é¢ã 6 RETURN Ã¥ÂÂå°åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸å®ç«é¢ã 7 彩è² ï¼Âç´ î¿綠î¿é»Âî¿èÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂéµ é¸æÂÂé Âé¢ã 液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ 8 æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµ é¸æÂÂé »éÂÂã 9 CH RTN Ã¥ÂÂå°åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ鏿ÂÂçÂÂé »éÂÂã 10 CH ENTER æÂÂæÂ¾æÂÂ鏿ÂÂçÂÂé »éÂÂèÂÂ碼ã 11 P /â é¸æÂÂé »éÂÂã 12 INPUT 鏿ÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂ輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂã 13 MUTE éÂÂé³ã 14 TV VOL /â è¨Âå®Âé³éÂÂã SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 5 7 2 6 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP CTRL TV î RECEIVER î PAGE 4 1 3 PDP MUTE INPUT 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 P - TV V O L - 12 10 9 14 11 13 TV 12 3 8 æÂªè¨Âå®Âçºå Âé é»漿é»è¦ÂæÂÂ顯示ã CH ENTER CH RTN HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 17 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 18 ChH æÂÂä½Âå Âé Blu-ray Disc æÂÂæÂ¾æ© 1 î SOURCE å° Blu-ray Disc æÂÂæÂ¾æ©ÂçÂÂ黿ºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ã 2 PAGE </> æ¶²æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢顯示å¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂé Â颿ÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂé Âé¢ã 3 TOP MENU / DISC NAVIGATOR æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示 BD-ROM æÂ DVD-Video ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂæÂÂä¸Â層é¸å®ã æÂÂæÂ¾ DVD-R/-RW æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示î¿éÂÂåº ãÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂã ã 4 MENU BD-ROM ï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示î¿é±èÂÂå½Âåºå¼Âé¸å®ã DVD-Video ï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å® ï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂï¼ ã 5 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Â游æ¨ÂæÂÂéÂ括Âå ENTER ç¨æÂ¼å°Â覽è¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½åÂÂé¸å®ã æÂÂ丠ENTER 鏿ÂÂé¸頠æÂÂå·衠æÂÂ令ã 6 HOME MENU æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ç Home Menu ï¼Âé²堥 Home Menu å¯ 使ç¨大é¨åÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾å¨åÂÂè½ã 7 RETURN æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂå°åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç«é¢ã 8 彩è² ï¼Âç´ î¿綠î¿é»Âî¿èÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂéµ ç¨æÂ¼å°Â覽 BD-ROM é¸å®ã 液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ 9 ( AUDIO ) æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂè²éÂÂæÂÂèªÂè¨Âã ( SUBTITLE ) æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂçÂÂ顯示ã ( ANGLE ) æÂÂæÂ¾ BD-ROM æÂ DVD-Video å½±çÂÂçÂÂå¤Âè§Â度場æÂ¯æÂÂï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯è®ÂæÂ´æÂÂæÂÂè§Â度ã 10 æÂÂæÂ¾æÂ§å¶æÂÂéµ î æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂç¹¼çºÂæÂÂæÂ¾ã î æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂ¢æÂÂæÂ¾ ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以æÂ î 繼çºÂæÂÂæÂ¾ï¼ ã î æÂÂä¸Âå¯æÂ«åÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次å³å¯éÂÂæÂ°éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ã î @î æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂî¿快è½ÂæÂÂæÂÂã î @î æÂÂä¸Âå¯跳å°ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç« ç¯Âî¿æÂ²ç®ã î / î @î / î ç¨æÂ¼æ ¢åÂÂä½Âæ ¼éÂÂ梯å¼Âæ ¼æÂ¾ã 11 ZOOM æÂÂä¸Âå¯å¨æÂÂæÂ¾éÂÂæ Âå½±åÂÂæÂÂ縮æÂ¾ç«é¢ã 12 DISP æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示è³Âè¨Âã 13 æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµ ç¨æÂ¼è¼¸å ¥æ¨Âé¡ÂãÂÂç« ç¯ÂæÂÂæÂ²ç®編èÂÂçÂÂã ENTER æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂé¸頠æÂÂå·è¡ÂæÂÂ令ã CLEAR æÂÂä¸Âå¯渠é¤輸堥çÂÂæÂ¸åÂÂçÂÂã 14 PLAY MODE æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾æ¨¡å¼ ï¼Âä¾Âå¦ÂéÂÂæÂÂï¼ ã 15 VIDEO ADJ æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示 ãÂÂ調æÂ´è¦Âè¨ÂãÂÂç«é¢ã SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 3 6 8 4 1 7 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP RECEIVER CTRL TV î î PAGE 5 2 BD 1/2 BD 2/2 ENTER CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 PLAY MODE VIDEO ADJ DISP DISP ZOOM î î î î îÂÂî îÂÂ/î îÂÂ/î î 9 10 13 11 12 14 15 12 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 18 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 19 ChH æÂÂä½Âå Âé DVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ 1 î SOURCE å° DVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨çÂÂ黿ºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ã 2 PAGE </> æ¶²æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢顯示å¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂé Â颿ÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂé Âé¢ã 3 TOP MENU æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示 DVD-Video ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂæÂÂä¸Â層é¸å®ã 4 MENU 顯示 DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ï¼ÂæÂŒÂÂè½è¦Âç¢ÂçÂÂèÂÂç°ï¼ÂèÂÂä¸Âå¯è½顯示 ç¸åÂÂç ãÂÂæÂÂä¸Â層é¸å®ã ã 5 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Â游æ¨ÂæÂÂéÂ括Âå ENTER å¨è¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨移åÂÂ游æ¨Âã æÂÂ丠ENTER 鏿ÂÂç®åÂÂçÂÂé¸å®é¸ é  ã 6 HOME MENU 顯示î¿éÂÂåºè¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½é¸å®ã 7 RETURN Ã¥ÂÂå°åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示çÂÂé¸å®ç«é¢ã 液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ 8 ( AUDIO ) æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂè²éÂÂæÂÂèªÂè¨Âã ( SUBTITLE ) æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂçÂÂ顯示ã ( ANGLE ) æÂÂæÂ¾ DVD-Video å½±çÂÂçÂÂå¤Âè§Â度場æÂ¯æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯è®ÂæÂ´ æÂÂæÂÂè§Â度ã 9 æÂÂæÂ¾æÂ§å¶æÂÂéµ î æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂç¹¼çºÂæÂÂæÂ¾ã î æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂ¢æÂÂæÂ¾ ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以æÂ î 繼çºÂæÂÂæÂ¾ï¼ ã î æÂÂä¸Âå¯æÂ«åÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次å³å¯éÂÂæÂ°éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ã î / î î @î / î î æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂÂå¿«è½ÂæÂÂæÂÂã åÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次å¯è®ÂæÂ´éÂÂ度ã æÂ«åÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä½Âå¯éÂÂå§Âæ ¢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ã åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂå¯以è®ÂæÂ´ æÂÂæÂ¾éÂÂ度ã æÂ«åÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¾Âå¾Âç§»åÂÂä¸Âæ ¼ã î / î æÂÂä¸Âå¯跳å°ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âî¿章ç¯Âî¿æÂ²ç®î¿ è³ÂæÂÂ夾ï¼ÂæÂÂ顯示ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸å®é Âé¢ã 10 ZOOM æÂÂä¸Âå¯å¨æÂÂæÂ¾éÂÂæ Âå½±åÂÂæÂÂ縮æÂ¾ç«é¢ã 11 DISP æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示è³Âè¨Âã 12 æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµ ç¨æÂ¼è¼¸å ¥æ¨Âé¡ÂãÂÂç« ç¯ÂæÂÂæÂ²ç®編èÂÂçÂÂã ENTER æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂé¸頠æÂÂå·è¡ÂæÂÂ令ã CLEAR æÂÂä¸Âå¯渠é¤輸堥çÂÂæÂ¸åÂÂçÂÂã 13 PLAY MODE æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾æ¨¡å¼ ï¼Âä¾Âå¦ÂéÂÂæÂÂï¼ ã SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 3 6 4 1 7 DISC NAV IGATOR SETUP RECEIVER CTRL TV î î PAGE 5 2 DVD 1/2 DVD 2/2 ENTER CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 PLAY MODE DISP DISP ZOOM î î îÂÂî î î / îÂÂî î / îÂÂî 8 10 11 13 11 9 12 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 19 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 20 ChH æÂÂä½Âå ÂéÂÂ硬碠/DVD éÂÂ影橠1 î SOURCE å°Â硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂçÂÂ黿ºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿徠æ©Âã ã 2 PAGE </> æ¶²æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢顯示å¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂé Â颿ÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂé Âé¢ã 3 TOP MENU / DISC NAVIGATOR å¦ÂæÂÂå·²è¼Âå ¥ DVD-Video æÂÂæÂÂçµÂÃ¥ÂÂç DVD-R/-RW ï¼Âè¦Âè¨Âï¼ ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示æÂÂä¸Â層é¸å®æÂ ãÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂç«é¢ã 4 MENU å¦ÂæÂÂå·²è¼Âå ¥ DVD-Video ãÂÂæÂÂçµÂÃ¥ÂÂç DVD-R/-RW æÂÂæÂÂçµÂå ç DVD R/ RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示æÂÂä¸Â層é¸å®ã 5 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Â游æ¨ÂæÂÂéÂ括Âå ENTER ç¨æÂ¼å°Â覽æÂÂæÂÂè¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½é¸å®ã æÂÂ丠ENTER 鏿ÂÂç®åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½ çÂÂé¸頠ã 6 HOME MENU æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示 Home Menu ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以å¨堶ä¸Âå°Â覽éÂÂå½±æ©Âç æÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã 7 RETURN æÂÂä¸Âå¯è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âä¸Â層çÂÂè¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½é¸å®æÂÂ顯示ç«é¢ã 液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ 8 HDD æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂç¨æÂ¼éÂÂ製åÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾çÂÂ硬ç¢Âã DVD æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂç¨æÂ¼éÂÂ製åÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾ç DVD ã 9 æÂÂæÂ¾æÂ§å¶æÂÂéµ î æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ã î æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂ¢æÂÂæÂ¾ã î æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂ¢æÂÂæÂ¾æÂÂéÂÂ製ã î / î æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂÂå¿«è½ÂæÂÂæÂÂã åÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次å¯è®ÂæÂ´éÂÂ度ã î / î æÂÂä¸Âå¯跳å°ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âî¿章ç¯Âî¿æÂ²ç®î¿ è³ÂæÂÂ夾ï¼ÂæÂÂ顯示ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸å®é Âé¢ã î / î @î / î æÂ«åÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä½Âå¯éÂÂå§Âæ ¢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ã åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂå¯以è®ÂæÂ´ æÂÂæÂ¾éÂÂ度ã æÂ«åÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¾Âå¾Âç§»åÂÂä¸Âæ ¼ã 10 CM BACK ï¼Âè¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂ廣åÂÂï¼ åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂ漸å¾Âå¾Âè·³ç¶Âè¦Âè¨ÂæÂÂæÂ¾éÂÂç¨Âã CM SKIP ï¼ÂçÂ¥éÂÂ廣åÂÂï¼ åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂ漸å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂè·³ç¶Âè¦Âè¨ÂæÂÂæÂ¾éÂÂç¨Âã SOURCE TOP MENU HOME MENU MENU RETURN î 3 6 4 1 7 DISC NAVIGATOR SETUP RECEIVER CTRL TV î î PAGE 2 5 HDD/DVR 1/2 HDD/DVR 2/2 REC î îÂÂ/î î îÂÂ/î î î î îÂÂî î STOP REC INPUT DISP CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 CH - 13 14 11 16 17 9 10 12 8 HDD DVD CM BACK CM SKIP JUKE BO X 15 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 20 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 21 ChH 11 JUKEBOX æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂçÂÂé»Â屿©Âç«é¢ï¼Âå¨æÂ¤ç«é¢ ä¸Âå¯以å°Âè¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¾çÂÂ鳿¨Âè¤Â製å°硬ç¢Âä¸Âã 12 ( AUDIO ) æÂÂä¸Âå¯è®ÂæÂ´è²é³èªÂè¨ÂæÂÂè²éÂÂã ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¢éÂÂå½±æ©ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ ä¸Âå¯è®ÂæÂ´èª¿è«§å¨é³æÂÂãÂÂï¼ ( SUBTITLE ) æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示î¿è®ÂæÂ´å¤Â誠DVD-Video ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Â堧建çÂÂå å¹Âã ( ANGLE ) æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå¤Âè§Â度場æÂ¯çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¹ÂæÂÂæÂÂè§Â度ã 13 æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµ 使ç¨æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµé¸æÂÂæÂ²ç®î¿章ç¯Âî¿æ¨Âé¡ÂæÂÂ鏿ÂÂé »éÂÂç ã CLEAR æÂÂä¸Âå¯渠é¤任ä½Â輸堥çÂÂ堧容並éÂÂæÂ°è¼¸å ¥ã 14 CH /â æÂÂä¸Âå¯è®ÂæÂ´å §å»ºé»è¦Â調諧å¨çÂÂé »éÂÂã 15 INPUT æÂÂä¸Âå¯è®ÂæÂ´ç¨æÂ¼éÂÂ製çÂÂ硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©Â輸堥ã 16 DISP 顯示î¿è®ÂæÂ´é¡¯ç¤ºçÂÂè¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½è³Âè¨Âã 17 éÂÂ製æÂ§å¶æÂÂéµ î REC æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂå§ÂéÂÂ製ã åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂå¯以 30 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂçºåÂÂ段ä¾Âè¨Âå® éÂÂ製æÂÂéÂÂã STOP REC æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂ¢éÂÂ製ã è£Âå ¥éÂÂæÂ§å¨é»池1 æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨èÂÂé¢çÂÂé»池槽èÂÂã 2 è«Âä¾Âç §é»池槽堧çÂÂ極æÂ§æÂÂ示 ï¼ î @î @ï¼Âå°Âå ©é¡ AA/LR6 é¹¼æÂ§é»池æÂ¾å ¥é»池槽ä¸Âã 3 éÂÂä¸Âé»池èÂÂã 注æÂ ä½¿ç¨é¯誤çÂÂé»池å¯è½å¼Âèµ·å±éªï¼Âå¦Âæ¼Âæ¶²åÂÂçÂÂç¸ã 諠éµå®Â以ä¸ÂäºÂ頠@⢠è«Âå¿混åÂÂæÂ°èÂÂé»池使ç¨ã â¢ è«Âå¿混åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé»池使ç¨ â éÂÂç¶å¤Âè§Âé¡Âä¼¼ï¼Âä½Âä¸Âå çÂÂé»池å¯è½å«ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé»å£Âã â¢ è«Â確å®Âé»池çÂÂæÂ£è² å ©ç«¯èÂÂé»池槽ä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂ示ç¸符ã â¢ èÂ¥è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â使ç¨çÂÂæÂÂéÂÂè¶ éÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºé»池ã â¢ èÂÂçÂÂ廢èÂÂé»池æÂÂï¼Âè«Âéµå®ÂæÂ¿åºÂæ¢Âä¾ÂæÂÂé©ç¨æÂ¼è²´åÂÂæÂ å°åÂÂçÂÂç°å¢Â堬報æÂÂ令è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂã è¦å â¢ è«Âå¿å¨é½å Âç´å°ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»ÂéÂÂç±çÂÂå°æÂ¹ä½¿ç¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¾é»池@å¦Âè»Âå §æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂæÂÂã å¦åÂÂé»池å¯è½æ¼Âæ¶² ãÂÂçÂÂç¸æÂÂèµ·ç«ã åÂÂæÂÂä¹ÂæÂÂ縮çÂÂé»池çÂÂ壽彿ÂÂæÂÂè½ã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 21 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 22 ChH 使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨ 使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ è¨Âä½Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂäºÂ頠@⢠è«Â確å®ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨èÂÂè£Âç½®ä¸ÂçÂÂéÂÂæÂ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨éÂÂç¡é»ç¤Âç©ã â¢ èÂ¥æÂÂå¼·å ÂæÂÂè¢å ÂçÂÂç §å°Âå¨è£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæÂ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨ä¸Âï¼Âå å¯è½ç¡æ³Â使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§æÂÂä½Âã â¢ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨å¯è½æÂÂäºÂç¸干æÂ¾ã è«Âé¿å Âå¨æÂ¤è£ ç½®éÂÂè¿Â使ç¨堶ä»Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ã â¢ èÂ¥ç¼ç¾éÂÂæÂ§å¨å¨æÂÂä½Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂå §ç¡æ³ÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂæÂ´æÂÂé» æ± ã â¢ è«Âå¦Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示ï¼Âå¨顯示è£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæÂ§æÂÂæÂÂ卿ÂÂä½Âç¯Âå åÂÂæÂ¹ä½¿ç¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨ã æÂÂä½ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ é¨éÂÂçÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨é¤äºÂè½æÂ§å¶æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨å¤Âï¼ÂéÂÂå¯以 æÂ§å¶å ÂéÂÂçÂÂé»漿é»è¦Âã DVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ã Blu-ray Disc æÂÂæÂ¾æ© åÂÂ硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Âç¢åÂÂã èÂ¥è¦ÂæÂÂä½ÂéÂÂäºÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示è£Âç½®ã æÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ ⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯顯示 RECEIVER ç«é¢ã RECEIVER ç«é¢顯示å¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨çÂÂæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Âä¸Âï¼ÂèÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæÂ§ å¨åÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶ãÂÂ模å¼Âã é¸æÂÂèÂÂæÂÂä½Âä¾ÂæºÂè¨Âå 1 æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã æÂÂ鏿ÂÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¹è®Âï¼ÂèÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨çÂÂæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Âè®ÂæÂÂ該é©ç¨ è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂ§å¶ç«é¢ã â¢ èÂ¥è¦Â鏿ÂÂç¨æÂ¼ Digital 1 ã Digital 2 ã Analog ã Front Audio In æÂ iPod çÂÂ輸堥ï¼Âè«ÂæÂ LINE æÂÂéµ@ç´å°æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½顯示å¨顯示è£Âç½®ä¸ÂçºæÂ¢ã 2 é¸æÂ HDMI 1 è³ HDMI 3 æÂ LINE æÂÂï¼Âé¸åÂÂæÂ¨æÂ£å¨使 ç¨çÂÂ輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂã 液æÂ¶è¢å¹Âè®ÂæÂÂæÂÂ鏿ÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂ§å¶ç«é¢ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ¨å¯以æÂÂä½ æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ æÂ¾ä¸Âå°æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂ鳿ºÂï¼ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ¯å ÂéÂÂ製é çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼ æÂÂ丠RCV è®ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨é²堥 ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶ãÂÂ模å¼Âã æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂ輸堥 ä¿ÂæÂÂä¸Âè®Âã åÂÂ註 èÂ¥è¦Âå¨éÂÂéÂÂæÂ¬æ©ÂèÂÂè½ä¾Âèªé£æÂ¥è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂæÂÂæÂ«æÂÂæÂ§ å¶æÂ¥æÂ¶ï¼Âè«ÂæÂ RCV ã æÂÂ鏿ÂÂçÂÂ輸堥ä¸ÂæÂÂæÂ¹è®Âï¼Âä½Âé æÂ§å¨è®ÂæÂ´çº ãÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶ãÂÂ模å¼Âã èÂ¥è¦Âè¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä½Â模 å¼Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次 RCV ã 使ç¨液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢ æ¶²æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢æÂ¯å¦æÂÂå¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂè³Âè¨Âé Âé¢è¦ÂæÂ¨æÂÂä½ÂçÂÂé£æÂ¥è¨Âå é¡Âå ï¼Âä¾Â妠DVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ï¼ÂèÂÂå®Âã æÂ¨è¦ÂæÂ§å¶çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂªé¡¯ 示æÂÂï¼ÂæÂ PAGE æÂ²åÂÂè³æÂ¨è¦ÂæÂ§å¶çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¨çÂÂé Âé¢ã â¢ è¶ é 10 ç§Âæ²ÂæÂÂå·è¡Âä»»ä½ÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂï¼Â顯示å¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨ä¸Âç 液æÂ¶è§¸æÂ§ç«é¢æÂÂèªåÂÂéÂÂéÂÂã èÂ¥è¦Â使æÂ¤ç«é¢åÂÂ次顯示@è«Â觸碰éÂÂæÂ§å¨çÂÂæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹ÂæÂÂæÂÂä»»ä½ÂæÂÂéµã 7 m 30 30 RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR HDMI 12 3 TV FM /AM LINE EXIT BD DVD HDD/ DVR EXIT BD DVD HDD/ DVR TV HDMI 輸堥 LINE 輸堥 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 22 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂä½ 04 23 ChH 第 4 ç« éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂä½ éÂÂ覠⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨è¨Âå®ÂçºæÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ çÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æÂ§å¶模张ï¼Â確å®Âæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Â顯示以ä¸ÂæÂÂ示ç RECEIVER ç«é¢@ã 使ç¨ ãÂÂèªå MCACC ãÂÂè¨Âå®Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ç° ç¹Âé³æÂ å¤Âè²éÂÂé³場èªåÂÂè£ÂæÂ£ ï¼ MCACC ï¼Â系統å¯測éÂÂèÂÂè½åÂÂå 堧çÂÂé³場ç¹æÂ§ï¼Âå°Âé±éÂÂç°å¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂé³ç´Âå ¥èÂÂéÂÂï¼Â並測試è² éÂÂå»¶é²èÂÂè²éÂÂé³éÂÂã å®ÂæÂÂ系統éÂÂè´ÂçÂÂ麥å Â風è¨Âå®Âå¾Âï¼Âç³» çµ±å°ÂæÂÂå©ç¨ä¸Âç³»åÂÂçÂÂ測試é³è³Âè¨Â測éÂÂé§Âæ³¢èÂÂè¿´é¿ï¼Â使ç¹ å®ÂæÂ¿éÂÂå §çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®Âå¼èÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂ ï¼ MCACC æÂÂæÂÂï¼ éÂÂæÂÂä½³åÂÂã 1 éÂÂ覠â¢ ç¨æÂ¼èªå MCACC è¨Âå®ÂçÂÂ測試é³é³éÂÂ極大 ï¼ ä½Âè«Âå¿å¨ è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂå°Âé³éÂÂè½Âå°Âï¼Âå¦åÂÂå¯è½ç¡æ³ÂéÂÂå°æÂÂä½³è¨Âå® çÂÂæ Âã â¢ è«Âå¿å¨ MCACC è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂç§»åÂÂ麥å Â風èÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ã 1 å°Â麥å Â風é£æÂ¥è³顯示è£Âç½®èÂÂé¢ç MCACC SETUP MIC æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 è«Âå°Â麥å Â風置æÂ¼æÂ£å¸¸çÂÂèÂÂè½ä½Âç½®ã è«ÂæÂ¾å¨è³æÂ悮Â度ï¼Â並使ç¨æ¡Â椠確ä¿Â麥å Â風ä¿ÂæÂÂ水平你置ã è«Â確å®Â麥å Â風èÂÂæÂÂè²å¨éÂÂç¡éÂÂç¤Âç©ã 3 èÂ¥æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨éÂÂéÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂ丠î RECEIVER å°Â堶黿ºÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 4 æÂÂ丠MCACC ã æÂÂ丠MCACC å¾Âï¼Âè«Âç¡å¯è½ä¿ÂæÂÂå®ÂéÂÂã é³éÂÂå°ÂæÂÂèªåÂÂ讠大ï¼Â系統æÂÂ輸åºä¸Âé£串çÂÂ測試é³ã â¢ èÂ¥è¦Âå¨å®ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âèªå MCACC è¨Âå® ï¼ æÂÂ丠MCACC ã è£Âç½®å°ÂæÂÂç¹¼çºÂ使ç¨ä¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ã â¢ èÂ¥é±éÂÂçÂÂéÂÂé³éÂÂå¤Âï¼ Noisy! ï¼ÂéÂÂé³太大@å°ÂæÂÂå¨顯 示å¹Âä¸ÂæÂÂçºÂéÂÂçÂÂäºÂç§Âã èÂ¥è¦ÂçµÂæÂÂ並檢æÂ¥éÂÂé³çÂÂç´ 2 ï¼ æÂÂ丠MCACC æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ試ä¸Â次ï¼Â顯示å¹Âä¸Â顯示 Retry æÂÂï¼ æÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ è¥顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ Error MIC! ï¼Â麥å Â風ç¼çÂÂé¯誤ï¼Âï¼ æÂ Error Speaker! ï¼ÂæÂÂè²å¨ç¼çÂÂé¯誤ï¼Âï¼ è¨ÂæÂ¯ï¼Âå 表示麥å Â風æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂé£æÂ¥å¯è½åºç¾åÂÂé¡Âã èÂ¥è¦Âé 試ï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 3 ã MCACC è¨Âå®Âå®ÂæÂÂå¾Âï¼Âé³éÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæÂ¢å¾©çºæÂ£å¸¸é³éÂÂï¼Â顯示 å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ Complete 4 並åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé³場èªåÂÂè£ÂæÂ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã 5 ⢠å®ÂæÂ ãÂÂèªå MCACC ãÂÂè¨Âå®ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ å°Â麥å Â風å¾ÂæÂ¬æ© ä¸ÂæÂÂä¸Âã éÂÂ註 1 æÂ¨åªéÂÂé²è¡Âä¸Â次èªå MCACC è¨Âå® ï¼Âé¤éÂÂæÂ¨è®ÂæÂ´æÂÂè²å¨æÂºè¨ÂæÂÂæÂ¿éÂÂä½Â置@ã RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR 2 ⢠èÂ¥æÂ¿éÂÂçÂÂç°å¢Âä¸Âé©åÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂèªå MCACC è¨Âå® ï¼Âé±éÂÂéÂÂé³éÂÂå¤ÂãÂÂçÂÂå£Âè¿´é³ãÂÂå«é»ç¤ÂæÂÂè²å¨èÂÂ麥å Â風çÂÂç©é«Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¾ÂçÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼å¯è½æÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯ 誤ã è«Â檢æÂ¥å¯è½影é¿室堧ç°å¢ÂçÂÂå®¶éÂȍ¨å ï¼Âå·氣æ©ÂãÂÂå°箱ãÂÂéÂȾÂÂçÂÂï¼Âï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂå¿ è¦Âï¼Âè«ÂéÂÂéÂÂ堶黿ºÂã â¢ é¨åÂÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âå¯è½æÂÂèÂÂ麥å Â風äºÂç¸ç¢çÂÂå¹²æÂ¾ã èÂ¥ç¼çÂÂæÂ¤æÂ å½¢ï¼Âè«Âå¨èªå MCACC è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã 3 èÂ¥ä»Âç¡æ³Â解決åÂÂé¡Âï¼ÂæÂÂ丠MCACC ãÂÂéÂÂéÂÂ黿ºÂï¼Â並根æÂ Error è¨ÂæÂ¯æª¢æÂ¥åÂÂé¡Âï¼Âç¶å¾ÂéÂÂ試èªå MCACC è¨Âå®Âã 4 èÂ¥æÂªé¡¯ç¤º Complete ï¼Âå¾Âå¯è½å¨è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯誤ã è«Â檢æÂ¥æÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·Â並åÂÂ試ä¸Â次ã 5 è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 27 é Âä¸ÂçÂʊȴ MCACC æÂÂæÂÂèÂÂè½ 以éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿éÂÂé MCACC æÂÂæÂÂã RECEIVER î MCACC HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 23 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
èÂÂè½æÂ¨çÂÂ系統輸åºçÂÂé³æÂ 05 24 ChH 第 5 ç« èÂÂè½æÂ¨çÂÂ系統輸åºçÂÂé³æÂ éÂÂ覠⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨è¨Âå®ÂçºæÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ çÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æÂ§å¶模张ï¼Â確å®Âæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Â顯示以ä¸ÂæÂÂ示ç RECEIVER ç«é¢@ã æÂÂæÂÂè²é³ ï¼Âé©ç¨æÂ¼æÂÂä½³è²é³@æÂÂæÂÂè²é³模å¼ÂèÂÂç±æÂ¬æ©ÂæÂÂä¾ÂçÂÂç¹æ®Âå½¢çÂÂé«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ質æÂÂè²å¨@帶ä¾Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå°Â極è´çÂÂå½±çÂÂèÂÂ鳿¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé³é«Âé©ÂèÂÂè¨Âè¨ÂçÂÂå Âé ç¨家å°ÂæÂÂ鳿ÂÂæÂÂè¡Âã å¨ä¸Âè¾ æ³Âä¸ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²é³模å¼Âï¼Â使æÂ¬æ©Âç¼æÂ®æÂÂ大çÂÂå è½ã â¢ å°Â話å¢Âå¼· å½±çÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂ渠æÂ°å°Â話ï¼ÂèÂÂèÂÂæÂ¯è²é³ç¸è¼Âä¹Âä¸ÂæÂ´é¡¯çªÂåºã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂå£Â縮 éÂÂç¾æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨éÂÂéÂÂé³影é¿çÂÂç´°é¨è²é³ï¼Â建ç«Âè®ÂæÂ¨æÂÂ覺 身æÂ·å ¶å¢ÂçÂÂè²é³ç°å¢Âã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè²éÂÂ平衡èÂÂè²éÂÂæ··å ç±æÂ¼é¨éÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂæÂ¹åÂÂç¶ÂéÂÂç¹åÂ¥è¨Âè¨Âï¼Âå æÂ¤ä»¥ç¹殠æÂ¹å¼Â縮混åÂÂ平衡è²éÂÂã æÂ¤å¤Âï¼ÂæÂ¬æ©Âä¹Âæ ¹æÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾çÂÂå § 容éÂÂå°æÂÂ佳平衡ã â¢ é »çÂÂç¹æÂ§ä¿®æÂ£ é¤äºÂé¨éÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂæÂ°å¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½å¤Âï¼Â實ç¾çºäºÂé·æÂÂéÂÂè è½èÂÂæÂÂä½³åÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾ç¹æÂ§ã â¢ 以ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæÂ¾çÂÂç«Âé«Âè² ç±åÂÂè²éÂÂ輸åº人è²æÂÂï¼Âå¾Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨輸åºé³æÂÂã æÂ¨å¯以æÂÂæÂ¾ä¾Â妠CD çÂÂç¡縫ãÂÂèÂÂé©çÂÂç°ç¹Âç«Âé«Âè²é³ æºÂãÂÂå¨èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ç«Âé«Âè²ç«ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼Âå¯使ç¨ æÂ¤æÂÂæÂ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ說æÂÂï¼ ã ä¾Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä½Âå¯以éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²é³模张ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç´æÂ¥æ¨¡å¼Â@@⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂè³ ãÂÂç´æÂ¥è²é³ã ã æÂÂä¸ÂæÂ¤æÂÂéµåÂÂæÂ ãÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²é³ãÂÂå ãÂÂç´æÂ¥è²é³ã ã â¢ é¸æÂ ãÂÂç´æÂ¥è²é³ãÂÂæÂÂï¼ DIRECT æÂÂ示çÂÂ亮起ã èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模张èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼ÂæÂ¯èÂÂè½系統æÂ§å¶任ä½Âä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂæÂÂç°¡å®æÂ¹å¼Âï¼ æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂ輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ åºä¾ÂæºÂè³ÂæÂÂçÂÂè²éÂÂã èÂ¥æÂ¨å°Â系統è¨Âå®ÂçºåÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ï¼Â第 6 é Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå ´åÂÂç°繠è²模å¼Âå°ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂ輸åºçµÂæÂ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 26 é Âï¼ ã â¢ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂ Auto èÂÂè½模å¼Âã 以ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂèÂÂè½ æÂ¨å¯以å¨ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂä¸Âï¼ÂèÂÂè½ç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂã ç°繠鳿ÂÂæÂ¯ä»¥åÂÂèª使ç¨堶ä¸Âä¸Â種 Dolby Pro Logic æÂ DTS Neo:6 解碼模å¼ÂçÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é³æºÂæÂÂç¢çÂÂã 1 èÂ¥æÂ¨å°Â系統è¨Âå®ÂçºåÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ï¼Â第 6 é Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå ´åÂÂç°繠è²模å¼Âå°ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂ輸åºçµÂæÂ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 26 é Âï¼ ã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂä»»ä¸ÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âã 顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾çÂÂé¸頠è¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¾çÂÂä¾ÂæºÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR éÂÂ註 1 å¨é©ç¶解碼ç± DTS-ES Ã¥ÂÂç¾ç 6.1/7.1 è²éÂÂ鳿ÂÂå¾Âç°ç¹Âè²è¨ÂèÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå§ÂèÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°ç¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½輸åºçµÂÃ¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè²è¨ÂèÂÂçÂÂå¾Âç°ç¹Âè²è¨ÂèÂÂã 2 æÂÂæÂ¾ DTS-HD ã DTS-Express æÂ Dolby TrueHD ï¼ 176.4 kHz/192 kHz ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âç¡æ³Â鏿ÂÂèªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç«Âé«Âè²以å¤ÂçÂÂ模å¼Âã æÂ¤å¤Âï¼ÂæÂ¨ç¡æ³Â鏿ÂÂ使ç¨æÂ¼ Dolby Digital Plus æÂ Dolby TrueHD ï¼Âä½ÂæÂ¼ 96 kHz ï¼Âç DTS Neo:6 ã DIRECT SURR SURR HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 24 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
èÂÂè½æÂ¨çÂÂ系統輸åºçÂÂé³æÂ 05 25 ChH æÂÂé ÂéÂÂè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼ æÂ¨å¯以鏿ÂÂ@⢠Auto ï¼ÂèªåÂÂèÂÂè½模张ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 24 é Â@⢠2 PL II Movie ï¼ Dolby Pro Logic II Movie ï¼Âï¼ 5.1 è²é ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂï¼Âç¹åÂ¥é©åÂÂå½±çÂÂä¾Â溠⢠2 PL II Music ï¼ Dolby Pro Logic II Music ï¼Âï¼ 5.1 è²é ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂï¼Âç¹åÂ¥é©åÂÂ鳿¨Âä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± ä¸ÂæÂÂç Dolby Pro Logic II Music è¨Âå®Âå¼ â¢ 2 PL II Game ï¼ Dolby Pro Logic II Game ï¼Âï¼ 5.1 è²é ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂï¼Âç¹åÂ¥é©åÂÂé»è¦ÂéÂÂæÂ² ⢠2 Pro Logic ï¼ Dolby Pro Logic ï¼Âï¼ 4.1 è²éÂÂç°ç¹Âé³ æÂÂï¼Âé©ç¨æÂ¼éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾Â溠⢠Neo:6 Cinema ï¼ 6.1 è²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âç¹åÂ¥é©åÂÂå½±çÂÂä¾Â溠⢠Neo:6 Music ï¼ 6.1 è²éÂÂé³æÂ ï¼ ç¹åÂ¥é©åÂÂ鳿¨ÂçÂÂä¾Â溠@è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± ä¸ÂæÂÂç ä¸Â央影åÂÂè¨Â宠⢠Stereo ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 26 é Âä¸Âç 以ç«Âé«Âè²èÂÂè½ æÂÂé Âå¤Âè²éÂÂ鳿ºÂæÂ ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以é¸æÂ ï¼Âä¾Âæ ¼å¼Â@@⢠Auto ï¼ÂèªåÂÂèÂÂè½模张ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 24 é Â@⢠StandardDecode ï¼Â以 Dolby Digital æÂ DTS ç°ç¹Âè²解 碼èÂÂè½ã æÂÂæÂ¾æÂÂæÂÂæ¨ÂæºÂ解碼å¨ç Dolby Digital ã DTS å¤Âè²é PCM çÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂ鳿ºÂã â¢ Stereo ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 26 é Âä¸Âç 以ç«Âé«Âè²èÂÂè½ Dolby Pro Logic II Music è¨Âå®Âå¼ 以 Dolby Pro Logic II Music 模张ï¼Âå¦Âä¸Âè¿°ï¼ÂèÂÂè½æÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨ å¯調æÂ´ä¸Â種è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âä¸Â置寬度ãÂÂ尺寸åÂÂå ¨æÂ¯ã 1 å¨åÂÂç¨ Dolby Pro Logic II Music 模å¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸Âã 2 é¸æÂ ã Center Width ã ã ã Dimension ãÂÂæÂ ã Panorama ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ Center Width 1 ï¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂæ··é³æÂÂæÂÂï¼Âå° å³åÂÂèÂÂå·¦åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂä¸Â央è²éÂÂæÂ´æÂ£åºä¾Âï¼Âé³åÂÂè½起 ä¾ÂæÂ´å»£ ï¼Âè¼Âé«Âè¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂ´çª ï¼Âè¼Âä½Âè¨Âå®Âå¼@ã â¢ Dimension ï¼Âç±åÂÂèÂÂå¾Â調æÂ´ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂ平衡çÂÂ深度@使è²é³è½起ä¾ÂæÂ´é ï¼Âè² è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂ´è¿ ï¼ÂæÂ£è¨Âå® å¼@ã â¢ Panorama ï¼Âå¯å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®ç«Âé«Âè²é³åÂÂ延伸 ï¼Â使ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè² å¨ç¢çÂÂæÂ´ ãÂÂå ¨é¢ãÂÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂã 3 調æÂ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã ä¸Â央影åÂÂè¨Âå® å¨ Neo:6 Music 模å¼Âä¸ÂèÂÂè½éÂÂè²éÂÂ鳿ºÂæÂ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 24 é Âï¼ ï¼ÂæÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以調æÂ´ä¸Â央影åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂã 調æÂ´ä¸Â央影åÂÂï¼Â以人è²建ç«ÂæÂ´å¯¬å»£çÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂæÂÂã 2 1 å¨åÂÂç¨ Neo:6 Music 模å¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸Âã 2 é¸æÂ ã Center Image ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 調æÂ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ 調æÂ´å¾ 0 ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂå³éÂÂå°å³åÂÂç½®èÂÂå·¦åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂä¸Â央 è²éÂÂï¼Âå° 10 ï¼Âå å³éÂÂå°ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂä¸Â央è²éÂÂï¼Âç æÂÂæÂÂã 使ç¨ ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé©ç¨æÂ¼ä»»ä½Âå¤Âè²éÂÂæÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é³æºÂï¼ æÂÂä¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂ種å¤Â樣çÂÂç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã éÂÂäºÂ模å¼ÂæÂ¯ä»¥ä½¿ç¨第 6 é Â丠æÂÂè¿°çÂÂæ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âå®ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³èÂÂè½æÂÂæÂÂèÂÂè¨Âè¨Âã â¢ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂ ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂ模å¼Âã é¸æÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ模å¼ÂæÂÂï¼ ADV.SURR. æÂÂ示çÂÂ亮起ã æÂ¨ç¡泠åÂÂæÂÂé©ç¨æÂ¼æÂÂäºÂé³è¨ÂæµÂçÂÂ模å¼Âã 3 Ã¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂ@⢠Action ï¼ÂéÂÂå°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ Âé³è»ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä½ÂçÂÂèÂÂè¨Â訠⢠Drama ï¼ÂéÂÂå°ÂæÂÂå¾Âå¤Âå°Â話çÂÂå½±çÂÂèÂÂè¨Â訠⢠Sci-Fi ï¼ÂéÂÂå°ÂæÂÂå¾Âå¤Âç¹æÂÂçÂÂç§Âå¹»çÂÂèÂÂè¨Â訠⢠Mono Film ï¼Â建ç«Âä¾Âèªå®è²éÂÂé³è»ÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè² éÂÂ註 1 ç±æÂ¼æÂÂ¢åÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂéÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨系統ï¼Âå æÂ¤æÂ£å¸¸ä¾Â說æÂ¨æÂÂ該使ç¨ C.Width 3 è¨Âå®Âã SOUND ENTER 2 ç±æÂ¼æÂÂ¢åÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂéÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨系統ï¼Âå æÂ¤æÂ£å¸¸ä¾Â說æÂ¨æÂÂ該使ç¨ C.Image 3 è¨Âå®Âã 3 æÂ¨ç¡æ³Âå°ÂæÂ¤åÂÂè½使ç¨æÂ¼ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé³è¨ÂæµÂ@⢠Dolby TrueHD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz ⢠DTS-HD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz æÂÂæÂÂæÂ 2/0 çÂÂè²éÂÂ格张⢠DTS-Express ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂ 2/0 çÂÂè²éÂÂ格张ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER ADV SURR HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 25 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
èÂÂè½æÂ¨çÂÂ系統輸åºçÂÂé³æÂ 05 26 ChH ⢠Ent.Show ï¼Âé©ç¨æÂ¼é³æ¨Âé³溠⢠Expanded ï¼Âåµé ç¹寬çÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é³場 ⢠TV Surround ï¼Âçºå®é³åÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é»è¦Âä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂä¾Âç°ç¹Âè² â¢ Advanced Game ï¼Âé©ç¨æÂ¼é»è¦ÂéÂÂæÂ² ⢠Sports ï¼Âé©åÂÂç¨æÂ¼è§Âè³Âé«Âè²ç¯Âç® â¢ Classical ï¼ÂæÂÂä¾Â大åÂÂ鳿¨Â廳çÂÂé³æÂ â¢ Rock/Pop ï¼Âåµé é©åÂÂæÂÂ滾æ¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿æÂÂæµÂè¡Âæ¨ÂçÂÂç¾場漠å¥Âé³æÂ â¢ Unplugged ï¼Âé©ç¨æÂ¼è²æ¨Âé³溠⢠Ext.Stereo ï¼Â使ç¨æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çºç«Âé«Âè²é³æºÂæÂÂä¾Âå¤Âè² éÂÂè²é³ 使ç¨åÂÂå ´åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模张å¦Â第 6 é  æÂÂ述使ç¨åÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂï¼Âå¯以使ç¨ ãÂÂå 場åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂ模å¼Âã â¢ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå ´åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âã F.S.SURR æÂÂ示çÂÂ亮起ã åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂ Focus 5.1ch ã Wide 5.1ch æÂ Extra Power ã æÂ¨ç¡æ³ÂçºæÂÂäºÂé³è¨ÂæµÂé¸æÂ ãÂÂé¡Âå¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂãÂÂ以å¤Âç 模å¼Âã 1 ⢠Focus 5.1ch ï¼Âç¨æÂ¼æÂÂä¾Âå¼Âå°Âå°左å´èÂÂå³å´æÂÂè²å¨ç è²é³æÂÂå°ÂèÂÂéÂÂä¸Â央åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè±Âå¯Âç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã â¢ Wide 5.1ch ï¼Âç¨æÂ¼æÂÂä¾Â毠Focus 5.1ch 模å¼Âé³åÂÂæÂ´å¯¬ 廣çÂÂç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã â¢ Extra Power ï¼Âå¾Âç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨輸åºç«Âé«Âè² ï¼Âå¤Âè²é é³æºÂãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âæ··åÂÂç«Âé«Âè²ï¼Â以æÂÂä¾Â強大çÂÂç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã 以ç«Âé«Âè²èÂÂè½ æÂ¨å¯以使ç¨ç«Âé«Âè²è½åÂÂä»»ä½Âä¾Â溠â ç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂã æÂ æÂ¾å¤Âè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²éÂÂç¶ÂéÂÂ縮混å¾Âå³éÂÂå°左åÂÂç½®î¿ å³åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨åÂÂéÂÂä½Âé³ä¸Âã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âï¼Âç´å°顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ STEREO ã é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂ模张åªæÂÂå¨æÂ¬æ©Âé£æÂ¥è³ HDMI Control ç¸容å ÂéÂÂ硬碠/DVD é 影æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂ使ç¨ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½æÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨æÂÂè½éÂÂç¨é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ¥ Ã¥ÂÂ模å¼Âå°ÂèÂÂè½模å¼ÂèªåÂÂè®ÂæÂ´çºæÂÂ符åÂÂéÂÂå½±æ©ÂæÂÂæÂ¾å §å®¹ä¹ é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âã â¢ å° HDMI Mode è¨Âå®Âçº AMP Mode ï¼Â第 36 é Âï¼ ã â¢ å¨èÂÂè½ä¾ÂèªéÂÂé³å¨çÂÂåªÂé«Â堧容æÂÂæÂÂä¸Âã é¸æÂÂæÂÂé©ç¶çÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼Â並顯示å¨顯示ç«é¢ä¸Âã ç¡æ³Âå¤æÂ· ç¸éÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âå¯è½顯示 No Genre æÂ CanâÂÂt use ï¼ÂèÂÂä¸Âè è½模å¼Âç¶ÂæÂÂä¸Âè®Âã æÂÂ示 ⢠主è¦ÂæÂÂé Âé»Â屿©Âå MP3 ä¾ÂæºÂ使ç¨ã â¢ èÂ¥è¦Â使ç¨æÂ¤åÂÂè½ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¿ é ÂæÂÂéÂÂé HDMI é£æÂ¥ç HDMI Control ç¸容å ÂéÂÂ硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©Âï¼Â並ä¸Âå° HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½è¨Âå®Âçº ãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã ã 使ç¨ ãÂÂè²é³修æÂ£å¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ èÂ¥å¨ MP3 æÂ WMA å£Â縮éÂÂç¨Âä¸Âç§»é¤é³æÂÂè³ÂæÂÂï¼Âè²é³åÂÂ質 éÂÂ常æÂÂåºç¾ä¸Âå¹³åÂÂçÂÂé³åÂÂã ãÂÂè²é³修æÂ£å¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½æÂ¡ç¨æÂ° ç DSP æÂÂè¡Âï¼Âå¯èÂÂç±éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè²å£ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¿®æÂ´å£Â縮å¾ÂçÂÂ人工缺 é·ï¼Âå° CD çÂÂ鳿ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質æÂ¢å¾©è³å£Â縮çÂÂéÂÂè²éÂÂ鳿ÂÂã â¢ å¨èÂÂè½ç«Âé«Âè²é³æºÂæÂÂæÂÂ丠2 ã åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯å¨以ä¸Âå ©é  åÂÂè½éÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ@⢠Retriever On â éÂÂå ãÂÂè²é³修æÂ£å¨ã ã â¢ Retriever Off â éÂÂé ãÂÂè²é³修æÂ£å¨ã ã éÂÂ註 1 æÂ¨ç¡æ³Âå°ÂæÂ¤åÂÂè½使ç¨æÂ¼ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé³è¨ÂæµÂ@⢠Dolby TrueHD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz ⢠DTS-HD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz æÂÂæÂÂæÂ 2/0 çÂÂè²éÂÂ格张⢠DTS-Express ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂ 2/0 çÂÂè²éÂÂ格张F.S. SURR SURR 2 æÂ¤è¨Âå®Âç¡æ³ÂæÂÂé Âå¤Âè²éÂÂ鳿ºÂ使ç¨ã æÂ¤å¤Âï¼ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¯æÂÂé  SACD ã DTS-HD ã DTS-Express ã Dolby TrueHD ã Dolby Digital Plus å PCM ï¼ 192 kHz/176.4 kHz ï¼ ï¼ çÂÂè³ç¡æ³Â使ç¨ç«Âé«Âè²é³æºÂã GENRE SOUND RTRV HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 26 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
èÂÂè½æÂ¨çÂÂ系統輸åºçÂÂé³æÂ 05 27 ChH 以 MCACC æÂÂæÂÂèÂÂè½ 使ç¨以 MCACC Ã¥ÂÂå¾ÂçÂÂä¿®æÂ£é³場è¨Âå®ÂèÂÂè½è²é³ã 1 æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ鳿ÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã MCACC Effect ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã MCACC On ãÂÂæÂ ã MCACC Off ãÂÂï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ ç¶ MCACC Effect éÂÂéÂÂæÂ ï¼ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂè²éÂÂå»¶é²ãÂÂè²éÂÂä½ æºÂÃ¥ÂÂé§Âæ³¢ä¹ÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂã â¢ MCACC Effect éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ§å¶è²éÂÂå»¶é²å è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂï¼ MCACC Effect éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ å²åÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ã â¢ ã MCACC æÂÂæÂÂãÂÂå¨使ç¨ ãÂÂèªå MCACC è¨Âå®ÂãÂÂå¾Âèª Ã¥ÂÂè¨Âå®ÂçºéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 使ç¨ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âã ã ãÂÂé¿度ãÂÂå ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂè è½模张ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤ÂãÂÂèÂÂè½åÂÂè½å¯è®ÂæÂ¨ä»¥ä½Âé³éÂÂæÂ¶è½實éÂÂçÂÂç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã 使ç¨ ãÂÂé¿度èÂÂè½ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½å¯以å¨ä½Âé³éÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âä¾Âèªé³樠鳿ºÂçÂÂè¯好ä½Âé³èÂÂé«Âé³ã ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂèÂÂè½åÂÂè½å¯éÂÂä½Â鳿ºÂä¸ÂéÂÂéÂÂçÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂé«Âé³ã 1 æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ鳿ÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã Tone ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 1 3 é¸æÂ ã Midnight ã ãÂÂã Loudness ãÂÂæÂ ã Quiet ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ ENTER 以確èªÂã 2 ⢠èÂ¥è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âã ã ãÂÂé¿度ãÂÂå ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âï¼ è«Âé¸æÂ Bass/Treble ã 調æÂ´ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³ 使ç¨ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³æÂ§å¶調æÂ´æÂ´é«Âé³調ã 1 æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ鳿ÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã Tone ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 1 3 é¸æÂ ã Bass/Treble ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ ENTER ã â¢ é¸æÂ Bass/Treble 以åÂÂæ¶ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âã ã ãÂÂé¿度ãÂÂå ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âã æÂ¨ç¡æ³ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂäºÂ模å¼Âã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î æÂÂéµ ï¼ é¸æÂ ã Bass ãÂÂæÂÂã Treble ã ã 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î æÂÂéµ調æÂ´é³æÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³çÂÂ調æÂ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨ -6dB è³ 6dB ä¹ÂéÂÂã â¢ ä½Â鳿ÂÂé«Âé³è¨Âå®Âå¨ 0dB 以å¤ÂæÂÂï¼ TONE æÂÂ示çÂÂ亮起 ã 調æÂ´è²é³延é² æÂÂäºÂ顯示å¨å¨æÂÂæÂ¾è¦Âè¨ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂç¨Âå¾®çÂÂå»¶é²ï¼Âå æÂ¤é³è»ÂæÂ èÂÂç«é¢ç¨Âå¾®æ²ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥ã æÂ°å¢Âä¸Âé»Âå»¶é²å¯以調æÂ´è²é³ï¼Â使 è²é³çÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾ç¬¦åÂÂç«é¢çÂÂ顯示ã æÂ¨å¯以調æÂ´çÂÂéÂÂé ï¼Âä½ÂæºÂï¼Âå ±æÂ 60 Ã¥ÂÂï¼Â總ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¯ 200 msec ã 1 æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ鳿ÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã Sound Delay ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 鏿ÂÂè²é³çÂÂå»¶é²é·度ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂå¨ HDMI è¨Âå®Âä¸Âå° ãÂÂèªåÂÂå»¶é²ãÂÂè¨Âå®Âçº On ï¼ÂæÂ¤ é¸頠æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂä¸Âä¸Â顯示 ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 39 é Âä¸Âç è¨Âå®Âèª Ã¥ÂÂå»¶é² ï¼Âã éÂÂ註 1 æÂÂæÂ¾ DTS-HD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz ï¼ÂæÂ Dolby TrueHD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz ï¼Âé³è¨ÂæµÂæÂÂï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂå·²é¸æÂ Bass/Treble 以å¤ÂçÂÂ模å¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¨ç¡æ³Âé¸æÂ Tone ã 2 æÂÂæÂ¾ DTS-HD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz ï¼ÂæÂ Dolby TrueHD ï¼Âè¶ é 88.2 kHz ï¼Âé³è¨ÂæµÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨ç¡æ³Âé¸æÂ Bass/Treble 以å¤ÂçÂÂ模å¼Âã SOUND ENTER ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER ENTER SOUND ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 27 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ¶è½廣æÂ 06 28 ChH 第 6 ç« æÂ¶è½廣æÂ éÂÂ覠⢠èÂ¥è¦ÂæÂ¶è½廣æÂ ï¼ æÂÂ丠FM/AM æÂÂéµå°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨訠å®Âçº FM/AM æÂ§å¶模å¼Âã éÂÂæÂ§å¨ä¸ÂçÂÂæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ FM/AM ç«é¢ã æÂ¶è½廣æÂ èª¿è«§å¨å¯æÂ¥æÂ¶ FM è AM 廣æÂÂï¼Â並è®ÂæÂ¨è½å°ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¶è½ç éÂȌ°è¨ÂæÂ¶ä¸Âä¾Âï¼Âå¦ÂæÂ¤ä¾¿ä¸ÂéÂÂ卿¯Â次æÂ¶è½æÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調 é¸ã 1 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂè³調諧å¨ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂå¯é¸æÂ FM æÂ AM 波段ã 顯示å¹ÂæÂÂ顯示波段åÂÂé »çÂÂã 2 調é¸éÂÂè¦ÂçÂÂé »çÂÂã 報æÂÂä¸Â種調諧模å¼Âå¯ä¾Âé¸æÂ ï¼ æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂèªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé«ÂéÂÂ@⢠æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調諧 ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂ TUNE /â å¯è®ÂæÂ´é¡¯ç¤ºçÂÂé »çÂÂã â¢ èªåÂÂ調諧 ï¼ÂæÂÂä½ TUNE /â ç´å°頻çÂÂ顯示éÂÂå§Âç§»åÂÂå¾ æÂ¾éÂÂã 調諧卿ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå°Âå°çÂÂéÂȌ°ã æÂÂçºÂæÂ¤ Ã¥ÂÂä½Â便å¯繼çºÂæÂÂå°Âã â¢ é«ÂéÂÂ調諧 ï¼ÂæÂÂä½ TUNE /â ç´å°頻çÂÂ顯示éÂÂå§Âå¿«éÂÂç§» Ã¥ÂÂã 繼çºÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂéÂ括Âç´å°æÂ¾å°è¦ÂæÂ¶è½çÂÂé »çÂÂçºæÂ¢ã 忠è¦ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Â使ç¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調諧微調頻çÂÂã æÂ¹å FM æÂ¥æÂ¶ä¸Âè¯ èÂ¥æÂ¨æÂ£ä»¥ç«Âé«Âè²æÂ¶è½ FM éÂȌ°ï¼Âä½ÂæÂ¶è¨Âä¸Âä½³ï¼Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂè³ å®è²éÂÂ以便æÂ¹åÂÂ鳿ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質ã 1 調å° FM 廣æÂÂéÂȌ°å¾ÂæÂÂä¸Âã 2 é¸æÂ ã Tuner Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 鏿ÂÂã FM Auto/Mono ã @ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 é¸æÂ ã FM Mono ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 調諧å¨èÂÂæÂ¼å®è²éÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æ¨¡å¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âå®è²éÂÂæÂÂ示ç @@æÂÂ亮起ã é¸åÂÂä¸Âè¿°ç FM Auto ï¼Â便å¯åÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模张ï¼ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶ç«Âé«Âè²廣æÂÂæÂÂï¼Âç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂ示ç @ï¼ÂæÂÂ亮起@ã æÂ¹å AM 鳿ÂÂä¸Âä½³ æÂ¹å AM æÂ¶é³æ©Â鳿ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質æÂÂç°¡å®çÂÂæÂ¹å¼Âå°±æÂ¯ç¢ºå®ÂæÂ¿éÂÂå § çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂ¯å¦éÂÂæ©Âã æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以試èÂÂæÂ¹è® AM 迴路天ç·Âç ä½Âç½®èÂÂæÂ¹åÂÂã æÂ¹è®ÂéÂÂ鳿ÂÂå¶模张é²è¡Âä¸Âè¿°åÂÂä½Âå¾Âï¼ÂèÂ¥ä»Âç¡æ³ÂæÂ¹å AM é³質ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯使ç¨丠åÂÂçÂÂéÂÂ鳿ÂÂå¶模å¼Âç²å¾ÂæÂ¹åÂÂã åªè¦Â鏿ÂÂè½起ä¾ÂæÂÂ好çÂÂé³ æÂÂå³å¯ã 1 調å° AM 廣æÂÂéÂȌ°å¾ÂæÂÂä¸Âã 2 é¸æÂ ã Tuner Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã Noise Cut ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 鏿ÂÂéÂÂè¨ÂæÂÂå¶模张@1 ã 2 æÂ 3 ï¼ ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã FM /AM FM/AM 12 3 FM /AM - TUNE SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 28 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
æÂ¶è½廣æÂ 06 29 ChH è¨ÂæÂ¶éÂȌ° æÂ¨å¯以å²åÂÂé«Âé 30 Ã¥ÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ï¼Âå¦ÂæÂ¤ä¾¿å¯è¼Âé¬ÂæÂ¶è½å æÂÂçÂÂéÂȌ°ï¼Âä¸Âå¿ æ¯Â次é²è¡ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調é¸ã 1 調諧è³ FM æÂ AM 廣æÂÂéÂȌ°ã è¦ÂéÂÂè¦Â鏿ÂÂå®è²éÂÂæÂÂèªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æÂ¥æÂ¶ ï¼ FM ï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¨ÂæÂ å¶模张@AM ï¼Âã éÂÂäºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼èÂÂé Âè¨Âè¨Âå®Âä¸Âä½µå²åÂÂã 2 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 3 é¸æÂ ã Tuner Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 é¸æÂ ã ST.Memory ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 5 鏿ÂÂæÂ¨è¦ÂæÂ¶è½çÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã æÂ¶è½é Âè¨ÂéÂȌ° 1 è«Â確å®Âå·²é¸åÂÂ調諧åÂÂè½ã 2 鏿ÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ã â¢ æÂÂè 使ç¨æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµç´æÂ¥é¸åÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ã æÂ¹è®Âé »çÂÂéÂÂé èÂ¥ç¼ç¾ç¡æ³Â調諧éÂȌ°ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±çÂÂé »çÂÂéÂÂéÂÂå¯è½ä¸Âé©ç¨ æÂ¼æÂ¨æÂÂå¨çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå®¶î¿å°åÂÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 é¸æÂ ã System Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã AM9K/10K ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 鏿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 以確èªÂã â¢ AM 9K ï¼ AM çº 9 kHz éÂÂéÂÂï¼ FM çº 50 kHz éÂÂé â¢ AM 10K ï¼ AM çº 10 kHz éÂÂéÂÂï¼ FM çº 100 kHz éÂÂé SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER - ST SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 29 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 07 30 ChH 第 7 ç« ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ éÂÂ覠⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨è¨Âå®ÂçºæÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ çÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æÂ§å¶模张ï¼Â確å®Âæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Â顯示以ä¸ÂæÂÂ示ç RECEIVER ç«é¢@ã 使ç¨ ãÂÂè²é³è¨Âå®ÂãÂÂé¸å® å¾ ãÂÂè²é³è¨Âå®ÂãÂÂé¸å®ä¸Âï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以使ç¨系統堨é¨çÂÂç°ç¹Âè² è¨Âå®Âã è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂï¼Â以ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂèª代表çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çº@⢠L ï¼ å·¦åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠C ï¼ ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠R ï¼ å³åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠SR ï¼ å³ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ ⢠SL ï¼ å·¦ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ ⢠SW ï¼ éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 1 èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 23 é Âï¼ÂæÂÂè½æÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³ç ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âã ç¶èÂÂæÂ¨å¯è½æÂÂç¼ç¾ï¼ÂæÂ´é²ä¸ÂæÂ¥èª¿æÂ´è²é ä½ÂæºÂ坿ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¿éÂÂå §çÂÂç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã éÂÂ種è¨Âå®Âè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂçÂÂæÂ¹å¼Âå¯è®ÂæÂ¨æÂ¶è½ä¾ÂæºÂ並調æÂ´æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ æÂ¾è²éÂÂçÂÂä½ÂæºÂã æÂ´é²éÂÂçÂÂè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®ÂæÂ¹å¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¯ä½¿ç¨測試é³ã 詳æÂ è«Âå éÂ񇪪 32 é Âä¸Âç 使ç¨測試é³調æÂ´è²éÂÂä½Â溠ã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 é¸æÂ ã Sound Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã ChannelLevel ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î æÂÂéµé¸æÂÂè²éÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂ使ç¨ îÂÂ/î æÂ éµ調æÂ´è©²è²éÂÂçÂÂä½ÂæºÂã â¢ æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂä½ÂæºÂ調æÂ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçºñ 10 dB ã 2 5 å¨å®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸Âã â¢ èÂ¥åÂÂ次使ç¨èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ å°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ代æÂ¤èÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç è¨Âå®Âã æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢è¨Âå® 1 èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 23 é  ï¼ÂæÂÂè½æÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³ç ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âã ç¶èÂÂæÂ¨å¯è½æÂÂç¼ç¾ï¼Âé²ä¸ÂæÂ¥èª¿æÂ´æÂÂè²å¨ è·Âé¢è¨Âå®Âå¼å¯æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¿éÂÂå §çÂÂç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂã å¾ÂæÂ£å¸¸çÂÂèÂÂè½ä½Âç½®è¨Âå®Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢ã 1 éÂÂå ã Sound Setup ãÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã Distance ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î æÂÂéµé¸æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ï¼ÂæÂÂ使ç¨ îÂÂ/î æÂÂéµ調æÂ´è·Âé¢ã æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢調æÂ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçº 0.1m è³ 9.0m ã 4 å®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ èÂ¥åÂÂ次使ç¨èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ å°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ代æÂ¤èÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç è¨Âå®Âã éÂÂ註 1 å¨éÂÂå MCACC Effect å¾Âè¨Âå®ÂæÂ¤åÂÂè½æÂÂï¼Â以èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½調æÂ´ä¹Âç¸åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½çÂÂ弿ÂÂéÂÂå°åÂÂ代ã éÂÂé MCACC Effect æÂÂï¼Âå¥Âç¨å¨éÂÂè£Âè¨Âå®ÂçÂÂå¼ï¼ÂèÂÂ使ç¨èªå MCACC 調æÂ´çÂÂå¼ç¡éÂÂã ï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ代èªå MCACC è¨Âå®ÂãÂÂï¼ RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR 2 é³éÂÂè¨Âå®Âè¶ é 51 æÂÂï¼Â調æÂ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå°éÂÂå¶ã SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 30 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 07 31 ChH Ã¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ§å¶ 以ä½Âé³éÂÂè§Âè³ Dolby Digital æÂ DTS è³ÂæÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯è½ç¡泠渠æ¥Âè½å°ä½Âä½ÂæºÂé³æÂ â å æÂŽÂ¨åÂÂå°Âç½ ã 使ç¨堶ä¸Âä¸Âé  å æ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ§å¶ ï¼ DRC ï¼Âè¨Âå®Âå¼便坿ÂÂé«Âä½Âä½ÂæºÂ鳿ÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ æÂ§å¶é«Âä½ÂæºÂé«Âé³ã åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ§å¶å é©ç¨æÂ¼ Dolby Digital é³è»ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¨å DTS é³ è»Âã 1 éÂÂå ã Sound Setup ãÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã D.R.C. ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 鏿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âã è«Â鏿ÂÂ以ä¸Âå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âå®Â@⢠D.R.C. Auto ï¼Âå é©ç¨æÂ¼ Dolby TrueHD è¨ÂæÂ¯ã é¸æÂ D.R.C. High æÂ D.R.C. Mid ç¨æÂ¼ Dolby TrueHD 以夠çÂÂè¨ÂèÂÂã â¢ D.R.C. High ï¼Âæ¸Âå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ Âç¯Âå ï¼ÂéÂÂä½Â大è²é³éÂÂ並æÂÂé« è¼Âå°Âè²çÂÂ鳿ÂÂ@⢠D.R.C. Mid ï¼Âä¸ÂçÂÂè¨Â宠⢠D.R.C. Off ï¼Âç¡åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂ調æÂ´ ï¼Â以è¼Âé«Âé³éÂÂèÂÂè½æÂÂ諠使ç¨æÂ¤è¨Âå®Âï¼ 4 æÂÂä¸Âå¯çµÂæÂÂã éÂÂå®è²éÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ æÂÂå®ÂéÂÂå®è²é Dolby Digital é³è»ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾æÂ¹å¼Âã æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以 使ç¨æÂ¤è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂèªÂ鳿ÂÂéÂÂ製ç DVD-RW ç¢Âç è²éÂÂã 1 éÂÂå ã Sound Setup ãÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã Dual Mono ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 鏿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âã è«Â鏿ÂÂ以ä¸Âå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âå®Â@⢠CH1 Mono ï¼Âå æÂÂæÂ¾è²é 1 ⢠CH2 Mono ï¼Âå æÂÂæÂ¾è²é 2 ⢠CH1/CH2 ï¼Âå ©åÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂç±åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂæÂ¾ 4 æÂÂä¸Âå¯çµÂæÂÂã SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 31 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 07 32 ChH 使ç¨èÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°ç¹Â模张æÂ¬æ¨¡å¼Âå¯è®ÂæÂ¨éÂÂéÂÂæÂ¨çÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨è½å°èÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°ç¹Âè² éÂÂã æÂ¨å¯以鏿ÂÂèÂÂè½æ²ÂæÂÂå¾Âç°ç¹Âè²éÂÂè³Âè¨ÂçÂÂ鳿ºÂï¼ÂæÂÂ妠æÂÂè²é³以åÂÂå§Â編碼格张ï¼Âä¾Â妠5.1 ï¼Âè½起ä¾Âè¼Âä½³ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯ 以è®ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨å°ÂæÂ¤æÂÂæÂÂå¥Âç¨å° Dolby Digital EX æÂ DTS-ES ç 6.1 編碼鳿ºÂä¸Âã 1 1 éÂÂå ã Sound Setup ãÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã Virtual SB ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 鏿ÂÂè¨Âå®Âã è«Â鏿ÂÂ以ä¸Âå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âå®Â@⢠Vir.SB On ï¼Âä¸Âå®Â使ç¨èÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°繠ï¼Âä¾Â妠5.1 編碼賠æÂÂ@⢠Vir.SB Auto ï¼ÂèÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°ç¹ÂèªåÂÂå¥Âç¨å° 6.1 編碼鳿ºÂ丠ï¼Âä¾Â妠Dolby Digital EX æÂ DTS-ES ã DTS Neo:6 æÂÂå  é²ç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Â@⢠Vir.SB Off ï¼ÂèÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°ç¹Â模å¼ÂéÂÂé 4 æÂÂä¸Âå¯çµÂæÂÂã LFE 衰渠æÂÂ亠Dolby Digital å DTS 鳿ºÂå æÂ¬æ¥µä½ÂçÂÂä½Âé³ã è¦ÂéÂÂè¦Âè¨Âå® LFE è¡°æ¸Âå¨ï¼Â以é¿å ÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂ極ä½Âé³失çÂÂã LFE è¨Âå®Âçº建è°å¼ 0dB æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå¶ã è¨Âå®Âçº -5dB ã -10dB ã -15dB æÂ -20dB æÂÂï¼ LFE Ã¥ÂÂå°åÂÂçÂÂç´ÂçÂÂéÂÂå¶ã é¸æÂ Off æÂÂï¼ LFE è²éÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂ輸åº任ä½Âè²é³ã 1 éÂÂå ã Sound Setup ãÂÂé¸å®ã 2 é¸æÂ ã LFE ATT ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 調æÂ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã 使ç¨測試é³調æÂ´è²éÂÂä½Â溠æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨測試é³ä½ÂçºåÂÂèÂÂè¨Âå®Âè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂï¼ÂèÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæÂ æÂ¾ä¾Â溠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 30 é Âä¸Âç è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ ï¼Âã æ¯Âå æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂ輪æµÂæÂÂæÂ¾æ¸¬è©¦é³ï¼Â以ä¾ÂæÂ¨å¨æÂÂæÂ¾æÂÂ調æÂ´ä½ÂæºÂã æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨測試é³ä¾Â調æÂ´ç°ç¹Âè²çÂÂè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂã 1 å·è¡Âé³調測試ã æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂÂ輪æµÂæÂÂæÂ¾æ¸¬è©¦é³ã å°Âé³éÂÂ調å° 50 以ä¸Âã 2 æÂÂæÂ¾æÂÂï¼Â調æÂ´è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂã æÂ¤ç®çÂÂå¨æÂ¼èª¿æÂ´ä½ÂæºÂï¼Â確ä¿ÂæÂ¨å¾Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è½å°çÂÂ測試 é³é³éÂÂçÂÂç¸åÂÂã æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂä½ÂæºÂ調æÂ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçºñ 10 dB ã â¢ æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨ VOL /â æÂÂéµ調æÂ´æ¸¬è©¦é³輸åºçÂÂæÂ´é«Âé³ éÂÂï¼ ä¸ÂæÂÂå½±é¿è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼@ã â¢ ç±æÂ¼éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂç¢çÂÂè¶ ä½Âé »çÂÂï¼Â堶實éÂÂ鳿ÂÂå¯è½æÂ´å¤§ è²ã æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è°èÂÂè½ä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼Â調æÂ´éÂÂä½Âé³ä½ÂæºÂã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 30 é Âä¸Âç è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ ã 3 å®ÂæÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯çµÂæÂÂ測試é³è¨Âå®Âã â¢ èÂ¥åÂÂ次使ç¨èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ å°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ代æÂ¤èÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç è¨Âå®Âã éÂÂ註 1 èÂÂæÂ¬å¾Âç°ç¹Âè²模å¼ÂæÂ¯å¦æÂÂæÂÂè¦Â輸堥è¨ÂæÂ¯åÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼ÂèÂÂå®Âã SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER TEST TONE ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 32 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»ÂæÂ¥ç· 08 33 ChH 第 8 ç« å ¶ä»ÂæÂ¥ç· éÂÂ覠â¢ å¨æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂå´é¢æÂ¿ä¸Âé²è¡ÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂè®ÂæÂ´æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ éÂÂéÂÂ黿ºÂï¼Â並å°Â黿ºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂèªçÂÂä¸Â黿ºÂæÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂé¤ã å®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·Âå¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°Â黿ºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂ¥ä¸Â黿ºÂæÂÂ座ã é£æÂ¥è¼Âå©è¨Âå æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以å°Âé¡Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¸ä½ÂçÂÂå¤ÂæÂ¥é³è¨Âä¾ÂæºÂé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬ç³»çµ±ã æÂ¸ä½Âé³è¨Âä¾ÂæºÂå æÂ¾Â¸ä½Âè¡ÂæÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶å¨ã CD éÂÂé³å¨çÂÂã 建è°æÂ¨ä½¿ç¨ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âä¾Âé£æÂ¥æÂ HDMI 端åÂÂçÂÂé³è¨Âä¾ æºÂã å¦ÂéÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 35 é Âä¸Âç 使ç¨ HDMI é£ æÂÂ¥ ã èÂ¥è¦ÂèÂÂè½ä¾Âèªé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂé³è¨Âé£æÂ¥ç· é£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã æÂ¸ä½Âé³è¨ÂçÂÂ飿ÂÂ¥ æÂ¬ç³»çµ±æÂÂå Âå¸æÂ¸ä½Â輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 使ç¨éÂÂäºÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ飿ÂÂ¥ MD å CD éÂÂé³å¨çÂÂå¤ÂæÂ¥è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ å°Âå´é¢æÂ¿ç OPTICAL IN 2 æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³å¤ÂæÂ¥æÂÂæÂ¾è¨Âå çÂÂå Âå¸輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã éÂÂäºÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂå æÂ¬ MD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ãÂÂæÂ¸ä½Âè¡ÂæÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶å¨æÂÂéÂÂæÂ²æ©Âç æÂ¸ä½Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã ä¸Â使ç¨ OPTICAL IN 1 輸堥é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂè²é³æÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以使 ç¨å®Âé£æÂ¥å¤Âé¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã é£æÂ¥é¡Âæ¯Â鳿ÂÂè¨Âå æÂ¨å¯以使ç¨ ANALOG AUDIO IN æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂ鳿©ÂçÂÂé¡ æ¯Â鳿ÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 使ç¨顯示è£Âç½®ç F.AUDIO 輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯è¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾æÂ¸ä½Âé³訠æÂÂæÂ¾å¨æÂ PC çÂÂ鳿ÂÂã 使ç¨ç«Âé«Âè²迷你æÂÂé Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âå°Âé³ è¨Âä¾ÂæºÂé£æÂ¥è³顯示è£Âç½®ã â¢ å°Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂ¥ä¸ F.AUDIO æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂ輸堥èªåÂÂå æÂÂè³ Front Audio In ã MD ãÂÂCD éÂÂé³å¨ç å¾ÂæÂ¸ä½Âé³訠輸åºï¼Âå Âå¸@OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 DIGIT AL å´é¢æÂ¿ æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ å¾Âé³è¨Â輸åº R L ANALOG A UDIO IN å´é¢æÂ¿ æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ æÂ¶éÂÂ鳿©Âã MD ãÂÂDA T ç F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM F.AUDIO æÂ¸ä½Âé³è¨ÂæÂÂæÂ¾å¨ç 顯示è£Âç½® å¾Âé¡Âæ¯Âé³訠輸åº ç«Âé«Âè²迷你æÂÂé Âé£æÂ¥ç· HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 33 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»ÂæÂ¥ç· 08 34 ChH 飿ÂÂ¥ iPod æÂ¨å¯以使ç¨顯示è£Âç½®ä¸Âç iPod æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾ä¾Âèª iPod æÂ³é³ æ¨Âã æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂä½Âé½å¯以éÂÂé iPod å·è¡Âã 使ç¨é¨éÂÂç iPod é£æÂ¥ç·Âå° iPod é£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©Âã â¢ 飿ÂÂ¥ iPod æÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂ輸堥èªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå° iPod ã â¢ æÂÂ亠iPod æ©Â種çÂÂæÂ¥é Âè·ÂæÂ¬æ©Âä¸Âç¸容ã iPod î æÂ¯ Apple Inc. å¨ç¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå ¶ä»ÂÃ¥ÂÂå®¶å·²ç¶Â註åÂÂä¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã èÂÂè½å¤ÂæÂ¥é³è¨Âä¾Â溠èÂ¥è¦Â使ç¨æÂ¬æ©ÂèÂÂè½ä¾ÂèªæÂÂé£æÂ¥å¤Âé¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå¨é æÂ§å¨ä¸Â鏿ÂÂ該è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½ã 使ç¨æÂ¤éÂÂæÂ§å¨å¯以æÂ§å¶ æÂÂäºÂå ÂéÂÂç¢åÂÂã 1 è¥系統å°ÂæÂªéÂÂæ©Âï¼ÂæÂÂ丠î RECEIVER 便å¯éÂÂæ©Âã åÂÂæÂÂè«Â確å®Âå¤ÂæÂ¥ä¾Â溠ï¼Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂãÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶å¨çÂÂï¼ÂçÂÂé»溠已éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 鏿ÂÂé³è¨Â輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂã 輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂ顯示é ÂåºÂå¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂ示@液æÂ¶è¢å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³該鏿ÂÂ輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂç«é¢ã 3 æÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂéµã é£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂªé¡¯ç¤ºå¨ç«é¢ä¸Âï¼ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ¯å ÂéÂÂ製é çÂÂ訠åÂÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂ丠RCV æÂÂéµ使éÂÂæÂ§å¨顯示å¨æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ æÂÂä½Âç«é¢ä¸Âã 4 å¿ è¦ÂæÂÂï¼ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæÂ¾å¤ÂæÂ¥ä¾ÂæºÂã MENU F.AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT iPod MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM iPod iPod Music > Extras > Settings > Shuffle Songs Backlight iPod iPod é£æÂ¥ç· é¡¯ç¤ºè£Âç½® R LINE Digital 2 Front Audio In iPod Analog Digital 1 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 34 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»ÂæÂ¥ç· 08 35 ChH é£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥å¤©ç· èÂ¥çºå¤ÂæÂÂ¥ AM 天ç·Âï¼Âè«Â使ç¨ 5 m è³ 6 m çÂÂä¹Âç¯åºçµÂç·£é» ç·Âï¼Â並å®Âè£ÂæÂ¼å®¤å §æÂÂ室å¤Âã è«Âä¿ÂæÂÂ迴路天ç·ÂçÂÂæÂ¥ç·Âã èÂ¥çºå¤ÂæÂÂ¥ FM 天ç·Âï¼Âè«Â使ç¨ PAL æÂ¥é Âé£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥ç FM 天 ç·Âã éÂÂæÂ¼æÂ§å¶輸åºé£æÂÂ¥ æÂÂå¤Â種å ÂéÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¯æÂ´ CONTROL é£æÂ¥ï¼Âå°ÂéÂÂäºÂé£æÂ¥è¨Âå çÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨å°ÂæºÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå¨å³å¯使ç¨ã 使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂÂï¼ÂæÂ§å¶è¨ÂèÂÂæÂÂ沿èÂÂé»路å³éÂÂè³é©ç¶çÂÂ訠åÂÂã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨é¸æÂÂ使ç¨æÂ¤åÂÂè½ï¼Âè«Â確å®Âè³å°Âå°Âä¸Âçµ HDMI æÂÂé¡ æ¯Â鳿ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³堶ä»Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âï¼Âä½ÂçºæÂ¥å°ç¨éÂÂã â¢ å¨任ä¸Âå´使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂ§å¶é£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Âå°Âå¦ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå ÂéÂÂ訠åÂÂä¸Âç CONTROL IN æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ä¸Âç CONTROL OUT æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂ顯示è£Âç½®å¯æÂ§ å¶堶ä»Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 使ç¨ HDMI 飿ÂÂ¥ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨æÂÂé Âå HDMI æÂ DVI ï¼ÂæÂ HDCP ï¼ÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯ 以使ç¨å¸Âå®ç HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âå°Âå®Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Âé³æÂ è²å¨ã 1 HDMI é£æÂ¥å³éÂÂæÂªå£Â縮çÂÂæÂ¸ä½Âè¦Âè¨Âï¼Â以åÂÂå¹¾ä¹Âæ¯Âä¸Â種 èÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¸容çÂÂæÂ¸ä½Âé³è¨Âï¼Âå æÂ¬ DVD-Video ã DVD-Audio ã SACD ã Blu-ray Disc ã VCD ãÂÂè¶ ç´ VCD ã CD å MP3 çÂÂã AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 ⦠ANTENNA å´é¢æÂ¿ æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ å¤ÂæÂÂ¥ FM 天締室å¤Â天締å¤ÂæÂÂ¥ AM 天締AM 迴路天締PA L æÂ¥é  5 m è³6 m 室堧天締ï¼Âä¹Âç¯åºå¡ÂæÂÂéÂÂ屬ç·Âï¼ éÂÂ註 1 ⢠å éÂÂ使ç¨é Âå DVI 並å DVI èÂÂé«Â頻寬æÂ¸ä½Â堧容ä¿Âè· ï¼ HDCP ï¼Âç¸容çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²衠HDMI é£æÂ¥ã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨é¸æÂÂ飿ÂÂ¥ DVI æÂ¥é Âï¼ÂæÂ¨éÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¨ç«ÂçÂÂè½ÂæÂ¥å¨ ï¼ DVI î HDMI ï¼ÂæÂÂè½é²è¡Âé£æÂ¥ã 你DVD é£æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ¯æÂ´é³è¨Âè¨ÂèÂÂã å¦ÂéÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Â洽詢ç¶å°çÂÂé³è¨Âè£Âç½®ç¶Âé·åÂÂã â¢ æÂ¬æ©Âè¨Âè¨Â符å HDMI ï¼Âé«Âå³çÂÂå¤ÂåªÂé«Âä»Âé¢@1.3a çÂÂã 使ç¨ DVI é£æÂ¥æÂ¯å¦å°Âè´å³éÂÂä¸Âå¯é çÂÂè¨ÂæÂ¯è¦ÂæÂ¨é£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂå® ã 使ç¨é Âå HDMI 1.0 çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ç è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âç¡æ³Âå¾ HDMI é£æÂ¥è¼¸åºé²çÂÂæÂ·æÂ§å¶ DVD-Audio CPPM 鳿ºÂã â¢ æÂ¬æ©ÂæÂ¯æÂ´ SACD ã Dolby Digital Plus ã Dolby TrueHD å DTS-HD Master Audio ã èÂ¥è¦ÂéÂÂç¨éÂÂäºÂæ ¼å¼Âï¼Âè«Â確å®Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¹ÂæÂ¯æÂ´ç¸æÂÂçÂÂæ ¼å¼Âã 徠HDMI輸åº HDMI T IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 å¾Âé¢æÂ¿ é Âå HDMI/DVI çÂÂè¨Âå HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 35 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»ÂæÂ¥ç· 08 36 ChH 1 使ç¨ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Âå°ÂæÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ç HDMI IN 1 è³ 3 å §é¨æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥è³ HDMI è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂç HDMI 輸 åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã å°ÂæÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥è³æÂ¨ç HDMI è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âå¨æÂ¨ è§Âè³ HDMI 堧容æÂ ï¼ é¡¯ç¤ºè£Âç½®ä¸Âç HDMI æÂÂ示çÂÂï¼Âç´ è²@亮起ã 2 使ç¨ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Âå°ÂæÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ç HDMI OUT å §é¨æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥è³ HDMI ç¸容顯示è£Âç½®ç HDMI å §é¨æÂ¥ç·Âã â¢ é£æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂ¥é Âä¸ÂçÂÂç®Âé ÂæÂÂ該æÂÂå³ï¼ÂèÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾å¨çÂÂæÂ¥é Âå° é½Âã 3 使ç¨ HDMI 1 è³ 3 æÂÂéµé¸æÂÂæÂ¨è¦Âé£æÂ¥ç HDMI 輸堥 ï¼Âä¾Â妠HDMI 2 ï¼Âã æÂ¨å¯以使ç¨顯示è£Âç½®ç INPUT SELECTOR å·è¡ÂæÂ¤æÂÂä½Âã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ³è¦Âè½å°æÂ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂé»漿é»è¦Â輸åºç HDMI é³ æÂ ï¼ÂæÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨å°Âä¸ÂæÂÂ輸åº任ä½Âè²é³@@å¨ ä¸ÂæÂÂç HDMI 模å¼Âè¨Âå® ä¸Âå° HDMI 模å¼Âè¨Âå®Âçº Through Mode ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂè¦Âè¨ÂæÂªåºç¾å¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂé»漿é»è¦Âä¸Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ試調 æÂ´æÂ¨çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ顯示å¨ä¸ÂçÂÂè§£æÂÂ度è¨Âå®Âã HDMI 模å¼Âè¨Âå® æÂÂå® HDMI é³è¨ÂçÂÂå³éÂÂè·¯å¾ÂæÂ¯ä¾ÂèªæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ÂæÂ´å¤§å¨ï¼ÂæÂÂç¶Âç±é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂé»漿é»è¦Âã HDMI 模å¼Âè¨Âå®Âçº Through Mode æÂÂï¼Âç¡æ³Â使ç¨å¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂè²é³åÂÂè½ã éÂÂ覠⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨è¨Âå®Âçºå¯æÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè² å¨çÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æÂ§å¶模张ï¼Â確å®Âæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Â顯示 RECEIVER ç«é¢@ã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 é¸æÂ ã HDMI Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã HDMI Mode ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 調æÂ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ AMP Mode ï¼Â輸åºä¾ÂèªæÂ¬æ©Âç HDMI é³è¨Âè¨ÂèÂÂã â¢ Through Mode ï¼Â輸åºä¾Âèªä¸Â莻è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂé»漿é»覠ç HDMI é³è¨Âè¨ÂèÂÂã HDMI THROUGH æÂÂ示çÂÂ亮起ã éÂÂæÂ¼ HDMI HDMI ï¼Âé«Âå³çÂÂå¤ÂåªÂé«Âä»Âé¢ï¼Âè¦Âè¨ÂæÂ¯æÂ´å®ä¸ÂæÂ¸ä½Âé£æÂ¥ç è¦Âè¨ÂèÂÂé³è¨Âï¼Â坿ÂÂé  DVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ã DTV ãÂÂæ©Âä¸ÂçÂÂèÂÂå ¶ä» å½±é³è£Â置使ç¨ã HDMI çÂÂéÂÂç¼æÂ¯çºäºÂ以å®ä¸Âè¦Âæ ¼æÂÂä¾Â髠頻寬æÂ¸ä½Â堧容ä¿Âè· ï¼ HDCP ï¼ÂèÂÂæÂ¸ä½Âå½±åÂÂä»Âé¢ ï¼ DVI ï¼ÂæÂ è¡Âã HDCP ç¨æÂ¼ä¿Âè· DVI ç¸容顯示å¨å³éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶çÂÂæÂ¸ä½ å §å®¹ã HDMI æÂÂæÂ¯æÂ´æ¨ÂæºÂãÂÂå¢Âå¼·æÂÂé«Âå³çÂÂè¦Â訠æ¨ÂæºÂå°å¤Âè²é ç°ç¹Âè²é³æÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã HDMI Ã¥ÂÂè½å æÂ¬è§£å£Â縮è¦Âè¨ÂãÂÂé«Âé æ¯Âç§ 2.2 GB çÂÂ頻寬ãÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥é  ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ代å¤Âæ¢Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂ夠åÂÂæÂ¥é Âï¼ ãÂÂå¨影é³ä¾ÂæºÂè DTV çÂÂå½±é³è£Âç½®ä¹ÂéÂÂéÂÂè¨Âã HDMI ã HDMI æ¨ÂèªÂå High-Definition Multimedia Interface Ã¥ÂÂçº HDMI Licensing LLC çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨ÂæÂÂ註åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã RCV SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 36 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
HDMI Control 09 37 ChH 第 9 ç« HDMI Control 使ç¨ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âå°ÂæÂ¬æ©Âé£æÂ¥è³ HDMI Control ç¸容å Âé é»漿é»è¦ÂæÂÂ硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©Âå¾Âï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥é» 漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂ§å¶æÂ¬æ©Âï¼Â以åÂÂè®ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂé»漿é»è¦Âèª Ã¥ÂÂè®ÂæÂ´è¼¸å ¥ä»¥åÂÂæÂÂå¨æÂ¬æ©Âä¸Âå·è¡ÂçÂÂæÂÂä½Âã å¦ÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥å¯å·è¡ÂåªäºÂæÂÂä½ÂçÂÂ詳細 è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±é»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ æÂ¨ç¡æ³Â使ç¨æÂ¤åÂÂè½æÂÂé Âä¸ÂæÂ¯æÂ´ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ç è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âä¿ÂèÂÂæÂ¬æ©Âå¯以æÂÂé ÂéÂÂå ÂéÂÂå ¬å¸製é ç HDMI Control ç¸容è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂ使ç¨ã éÂÂ覠⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨è¨Âå®ÂçºæÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ çÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æÂ§å¶模张ï¼Â確å®Âæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Â顯示以ä¸ÂæÂÂ示ç RECEIVER ç«é¢@ã é²衠HDMI Control 飿ÂÂ¥ æÂ¨å¯以å°Âé£æÂ¥çÂÂé»漿é»è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¤Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå ¶ä»Âè¨Âå ï¼Âå æÂ¾Â å¤Âå ©å°éÂÂå½±æ©ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾å¨@ã 確å®Âå°Âé»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂé³è¨Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂé³è¨Â輸堥æÂ åÂÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨ä½¿ç¨å¸Âå®ç HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Âè«Â檢æÂ¥è©²é£æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂ¯ å¦æÂ¯æÂ´ HDMI 1.3 æ¨ÂæºÂã å¦åÂÂï¼ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½å¯ è½ç¡æ³ÂæÂ£å¸¸ä½Âç¨ã RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR HDMI OUT IN 3 SYSTEM IN 2 IN 1 R L AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 ⦠OPTICAL IN 1 IN 2 ANALOG AUD I O IN ANTENNA DIGIT AL å¾Âé³è¨Â輸åº æÂ å¾ÂæÂ¸ä½Âé³訠輸åºï¼Âå Âå¸@è³ HDMI 輸堥 å¾ HDMI輸åº æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ å¾Âé¢æÂ¿ å´é¢æÂ¿ è HDMI Controlç¸容ç å ÂéÂÂ硬碠/DVDéÂÂå½±æ©Âï¼ Blu-ray disc æÂÂæÂ¾æ©ÂæÂÂDVD æÂÂæÂ¾å¨ è HDMI Control ç¸容ç å ÂéÂÂé»漿é»覠HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 37 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
HDMI Control 09 38 ChH ⢠å°Âé»漿é»è¦Âç´æÂ¥é£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©Âã ä¸ÂæÂ·èÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂ´å¤§å¨æÂ å½±é³è½ÂæÂÂå¨ ï¼Âä¾Â妠HDMI éÂÂéÂÂï¼ÂçÂÂç´æÂ¥é£æÂ¥å¯è½尠è´æÂÂä½Âä¸ÂçÂÂé¯誤ã â¢ å éÂÂé£æÂ¥æÂ¨æÂÂç®ÂÃ¥ÂÂçºæÂ¬æ© HDMI 輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂè¨Âå ã 丠æÂ·èÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂ´å¤§å¨æÂÂå½±é³è½ÂæÂÂå¨ ï¼Âä¾Â妠HDMI éÂÂéÂÂï¼ çÂÂç´æÂ¥é£æÂ¥å¯è½å°Âè´æÂÂä½Âä¸ÂçÂÂé¯誤ã éÂÂ覠⢠å°ÂæÂ¤ç³»çµ±é²è¡ÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂè®ÂæÂ´æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ éÂÂéÂÂ黿ºÂ@並å°Â黿ºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂèªçÂÂä¸Â黿ºÂæÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂé¤ãÂÂå®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ æÂ¥ç·Âå¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°Â黿ºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂ¥ä¸Â黿ºÂæÂÂ座ã â¢ å°ÂæÂ¬æ©Âé£æÂ¥è³ AC 黿ºÂæÂÂ座徠ï¼Âé 姠15 ç§ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂ稠åºÂã åÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂä¸Âå¯以å·è¡Âä»»ä½ÂæÂÂä½Âã 顯示è£Â置丠ç HDMI æÂÂ示çÂÂå¨åÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂçÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以å¨æÂ¤æÂ ç¤ºçÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¢éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂå³éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¬æ©Â黿ºÂã â¢ èÂ¥è¦Â使æÂŒÂÂè½ç¼æÂ®æÂÂ大æÂÂç¨ ï¼Â建è°æÂ¨ä¸Âè¦Âå° HDMI 訠åÂÂé£æÂ¥è³é»漿é»è¦Âï¼ÂèÂÂæÂ¯ç´æÂ¥é£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©Âç HDMI 端åÂÂã è¨Âå® HDMI é¸頠èÂ¥è¦Âå  åÂÂéÂÂå HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¿ é Â調æÂ´æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂ訠å®Âè HDMI Control ç¸容é£æÂ¥è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã å¦ÂéÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Âå é±æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã è¨Âå® HDMI Control 模张鏿ÂÂæÂ¯å¦å°ÂæÂ¬æ©Âç HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½è¨Âå®Âçº On æÂ Off ã èÂ¥è¦Â使ç¨ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ï¼Âå¿ é Âå°Âå®Âè¨Âå®Âçº Control On ã â¢ 使ç¨éÂÂå ÂéÂÂ製é çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âå°ÂæÂ¤è¨Âå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ Control Off ã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 é¸æÂ ã HDMI Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã HDMI Ctrl ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 調æÂ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ Control On ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¨ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ã å¨æÂ¬æ©Âé»溠éÂÂéÂÂï¼Âä¸Âå¨使ç¨ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæÂ¾æÂ¯ æÂ´çÂÂä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼Âå¾Âé»漿é»è¦Â輸åºä¾Âèª HDMI é£æÂ¥çÂÂé³ è¨ÂèÂÂè¦Âè¨Âã â¢ Control Off ï¼Âå·²åÂÂç¨ HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ ã ç¡æ³Â使ç¨ Ã¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂÂä½Âã æÂ¬æ©Â黿ºÂéÂÂéÂÂå¾Âï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂ輸åºéÂÂé HDMI é£æÂ¥çÂÂé³è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âè¨Âä¾ÂæºÂã HDMI é£æÂ¥ç· HDMI é£æÂ¥ç· HDMI 輸堥 HDMI 輸åº HDMI 輸堥 HDMI OUT å ¶ä»ÂæÂ´å¤§å¨ æÂÂå½±é³è½ÂæÂÂå¨ æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ è HDMI Control ç¸容ç å ÂéÂÂé»漿é»覠HDMI é£æÂ¥ç· HDMI é£æÂ¥ç· HDMI 輸堥 HDMI 輸åº HDMI IN HDMI OUT å ¶ä»ÂæÂ´å¤§å¨æÂÂå½±é³è½ÂæÂÂå¨ æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ æÂÂè²å¨ è HDMI Control ç¸容ç å ÂéÂÂé»漿é»覠SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 38 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
HDMI Control 09 39 ChH è¨Âå®ÂèªåÂÂå»¶é² æÂŒÂÂè½èªåÂÂä¿®æÂ£ä»¥ HDMI é£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¹ÂéÂÂçÂÂé³è¨Âè³è¦Â訠延é²ã é³è¨Â延鲿ÂÂéÂÂçÂÂè¨Âå®ÂæÂ¯ä»¥ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥çÂÂ顯 示卿ÂÂä½ÂçÂÂæ ÂèÂÂå®Âã æÂ¬æ©Âæ ¹æÂÂè¦Âè¨Â延鲿ÂÂéÂÂèªåÂÂ調æÂ´é³ è¨Â延鲿ÂÂéÂÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 é¸æÂ ã HDMI Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã Auto Delay ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 é¸æÂ ã A.Delay On ãÂÂæÂ ã A.Delay Off ã @ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 以確èªÂã æÂÂ示 ⢠æÂŒÂÂè½å å¨é£æÂ¥çÂÂ顯示å¨æÂ¯æÂ´é©ç¨æÂ¼ HDMI æÂ HDMI Control çÂÂèªåÂÂé³è¨Âî¿è¦Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå½¢åÂÂæÂ¥ï¼ æÂÂæÂÂè½使ç¨ã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨æÂ¾å°ä¸Âé©ç¶çÂÂèªåÂÂè¨Âå®Âå»¶é²æÂ éÂÂï¼Âå° A.Delay è¨Âå®Âçº Off ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調æÂ´è²é³延 é²è¨Âå® ï¼Â第 27 é Âï¼ ã é»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂé³è¨Â輸堥è¨Âå® ï¼ TV 輸堥@èÂ¥è¦Â使ç¨æÂ¬è£Âç½®æÂ¶è½ä¾Âèªé»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¿ é ÂæÂ¥ä¸ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Â以å¤ÂçÂÂé³è¨Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âã å¨æÂ¤é¸å®ä¸Âï¼Âå°Âé³訠輸堥è¨Âå®ÂçºæÂ¨æÂ³è¦Âé£æÂ¥çÂÂé³è¨Â輸堥ã æÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ä¸Âç TV å°ÂæÂ¬æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³å¨æÂ¤é¸æÂÂçÂÂ輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂã æÂ¤è¨Âå®Âå¼è®ÂæÂÂæÂÂé¸ æÂÂçÂÂ輸堥ï¼Â並ä¸Âå¾ÂæÂ¬è£Â置輸åºä¾Âèªé»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂã é¸æÂÂä¾Âèª Digital 1 ã Digital 2 å Analog çÂÂ輸堥ã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 é¸æÂ ã System Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã TV Input ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 調æÂ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã éÂÂ覠⢠æÂ¨å¿ é Âè¨Âå®ÂæÂ¤è¨Âå®Â弿ÂÂè½åÂÂå HDMI Control Ã¥ÂÂè½ã 使ç¨åÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂä¹Âå å®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥èÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¾Âï¼ÂæÂ¨å¿ é Âï¼ 1 使æÂÂæÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²堥徠æ©Â模å¼Âã 2 éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ黿ºÂï¼Âä½Â卿ÂÂå¾ÂæÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»漿é»è¦Âç é»æºÂã 3 鏿ÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂèÂÂæÂ¬æ©Âé£æÂ¥ç HDMI 輸堥ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ¥çÂÂä¾ èªé£æÂ¥è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè¦Âè¨Â輸åºæÂ¯å¦æÂ£å¸¸é¡¯ç¤ºå¨è¢å¹Âä¸Âã åÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模张åÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模å¼Âå¨æÂ¨å·è¡Âé»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂéÂÂå§Âã 妠éÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±é»漿é»è¦ÂçÂÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã åÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模å¼ÂæÂÂ你使ç¨ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·Âå°Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¬æ©Âå¾Âï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯以使ç¨å æÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模å¼Âä¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä½Â@⢠使æÂ¬æ©ÂéÂÂ鳿ÂÂ調æÂ´æÂ¬æ©Âé³éÂÂæÂÂï¼Â顯示å¨é»漿é»è¦Âä¸Âã â¢ é£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæÂ¾æÂÂï¼ÂèªåÂÂè®ÂæÂ´æÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂ輸堥ã â¢ å³使æÂ¨å°ÂæÂ¬æ©ÂçÂÂçÂÂ輸堥è®ÂæÂ´çºä¸ÂæÂ¯ä»¥ HDMI é£æÂ¥çÂÂ裠置ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模å¼Âä»Âç¶æÂÂæÂÂã â¢ å¨èÂÂè½ä¾Âèª硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂçÂÂ鳿ºÂæÂÂï¼ æÂÂ丠GENRE å¯èªåÂÂ鏿ÂÂæÂÂé©åÂÂçÂÂèÂÂè½模张ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã åÂÂæ¶ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模张å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨å¨éÂÂé HDMI é£æÂ¥è³é»漿é»è¦ÂæÂÂè§Âè³Âé»è¦Âç¯Âç®æÂ åÂÂæ¶ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂæÂ´å¤§å¨模å¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¬æ©Â黿ºÂéÂÂéÂÂã SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 39 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 40 ChH 第 10 ç« å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠éÂÂ覠⢠æÂÂä¸Âå¯å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨è¨Âå®ÂçºæÂÂä½ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ çÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶æÂ§å¶模张ï¼Â確å®Âæ¶²æÂ¶è¢å¹Â顯示以ä¸ÂæÂÂ示ç RECEIVER ç«é¢@ã 調æÂÂ顯示å¹Â亮度 èÂ¥æÂ¨è¦ºå¾Â太亮ï¼Âå¯調æÂÂ顯示è£Âç½®çÂÂ顯示亮度ã 1 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 é¸æÂ ã System Setup ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂ ã Dimmer ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 é¸æÂ ã Dimmer Light ãÂÂæÂ ã Dimmer Dark ã @ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 以確èªÂã è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ ç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ç¶ÂéÂÂç¹å®ÂæÂÂéÂÂå¾Âå°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ·æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂé» æºÂï¼ÂæÂ¨å¯æÂ¾å¿Âå ¥ç¡ã â¢ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂé¸頠ã æÂÂ以ä¸Âé¸頠å¯ä¾Â鏿ÂÂ@⢠Sleep On ï¼Âç´Âä¸Âå°ÂæÂÂå¾ÂéÂÂéÂÂé»溠⢠Sleep Off ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ é¸æÂ Sleep On å¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次 SLEEP å¯檢æÂ¥å©é¤ÂçÂÂæÂ éÂÂã æ¯Âæ¢Âç·Â代表素12 Ã¥ÂÂé ï¼Âå©é¤ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ ï¼ è¨Âå®ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨以æÂ§å¶é»è¦Âæ© æÂ¨å¯以使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂÂæÂ§é»è¦Âæ©Âã èÂ¥è¦Â使ç¨æÂ¤å è½ï¼ÂæÂ¨å¿ é Âå Â使ç¨ä¸Âé Â表ä¸ÂçÂÂæ¨Âè¨Â碼è¨Âå®ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ã 1 å°Â輸堥è¨Âå®Âçºé»è¦Âæ©Âã 2 æÂÂä½ TV æÂÂéÂ括Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠SETUP ã é»è¦Âæ©Âé Âè¨Âç«é¢顯示å¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨ä¸Âï¼ÂèÂÂç®åÂÂ製é åÂÂ代碼顯 示å¨液æÂ¶è¢å¹Âä¸Âã 3 使ç¨æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµ輸堥é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂ製é åÂÂ代碼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂ ENTER ã éÂÂæÂ¼è£½é åÂÂ代碼渠å®ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±ä¸Âä¸Âé ÂçÂÂ表格ã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¾ æÂ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ以ä¸ÂçÂÂ製é åÂÂ代碼ï¼Âè«Â輸堥渠å®ä¸ÂçÂÂ第 ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ è¥表ä¸Âæ²ÂæÂÂæÂ¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂ製é åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ稱ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¡æ³Â使ç¨æÂ¤ éÂÂæÂ§å¨æÂÂæÂ§é»è¦Âæ©Âã 4 å°ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨å°ÂæºÂé»è¦Âæ©Âï¼ÂæÂÂ丠î SOURCE ï¼Â確èªÂéÂÂæÂ§ å¨æÂ¯å¦å¯ç¨ã èÂ¥éÂÂæÂ§å¨çÂÂè¨Âå®ÂæÂ£ç¢ºï¼Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæ©Âã èÂ¥æÂªéÂÂæ©Âï¼Â丠åºç¾堶ä»Âæ¨Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Â使ç¨æÂ°ä»£ç¢¼ä¸¦éÂÂè¤ÂæÂ¥é© 1 ã éÂÂ註 1 è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂ卿ÂÂï¼Âä¸Âè«ÂæÂ¤è¨Âå®Âå¼çºä½Âï¼Â顯示è£Âç½®çÂÂ顯示å¹Â齿ÂÂè®ÂæÂÂã RCV RECEIVER SURR ADV SURR F.S. SURR SETUP ENTER ENTER ENTER SLEEP S l e e p --- -- TV TV PRESET 3 5 1 EXIT ENTER CLEAR 12 3 45 6 78 0 9 æÂ¸åÂÂæÂÂéµ ENTER 製é åÂÂ代碼 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 40 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 41 ChH é»è¦Âæ©Âé Âè¨Â代碼表 è«Â注æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂå®ÂæÂ£ç¢ºé Âè¨Â代碼å¾Âï¼Âå¯è½åªæÂÂç¹å®ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½å¯ä¾ÂæÂ§å¶ï¼ÂæÂÂè 表ä¸ÂçÂÂ製é åÂÂ代碼ç¡æ³Âç¨æÂ¼æÂ¨ç®åÂÂçÂÂæ©Â種ã 製é å 代碼 製é å 代碼 Admiral 003, 004, 005 Aiwa 006, 007, 008 Akai 009, 010 Alba 011 AOC 012 Bell&Howell 013, 014 Bestar 015 Blaupunkt 016, 017 Blue sky 018 Brandt 019 Brocsonic 020, 021 Bush 022 Clatronic 023 Craig 024, 025, 026, 027 Croslex 028 Curtis Mathis 029, 030, 031 Daewoo 032, 033, 034, 035, 036, 037 Daytron 038 Dual 039, 040 Emerson 041, 042, 043, 044, 045, 046, 047 Ferguson 048, 049, 050 First line 051 Fisher 052, 053 Fraba 054 Fujitsu General 055 Funai 056, 057, 058, 059, 060 GE 061, 062, 063, 064, 065 Goldstar 066, 067, 068, 069, 070 Goodmans 071, 072, 073 Grundig 074, 075, 076 Hitachi 077, 078, 079, 080, 081, 082 HYUNDAI 083 ICE 084 Irradio 085 Itt 086, 087 JC Penny 088, 089, 090, 091 JVC 092, 093, 094, 095, 096, 097 Kendo 098 KTV 099, 100, 101 LG 102 Loewe 103, 104, 105 LXI 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111 Magnavox 112, 113, 114, 115 Mark 116 Matsui 117, 118 Medion 119 Mitsubishi 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126 Mivar 127 NEC 128, 129, 130, 131 Nokia 086, 087, 132, 133, 134 Nokia Oceanic 135, 136 Nordmende 137, 138, 139 Okano 140 Onwa 141 Orion 142 Panasonic 143, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150 Philco 151, 152, 153 Philips 154, 155, 156 Phonola 157 Portland 158, 159 Proscan 160 Quasar 161, 162 Radio 163 Radio Shack 164, 165, 166, 167 Radiola 168 RCA 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175 SABA 176, 177, 178, 179, 180 Samsung 181, 182, 183, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188 Sanyo 189, 190, 191, 192, 193, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198 Schneider 199, 200, 201, 202 Scott 203, 204 Sharp 205, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211 Siemens 212 Signature 213, 214 Sony 215, 216 Sylvania 217, 218, 219 Symphonic 220 Tatung 221 Telefunken 222, 223, 224, 225 Thomson 226, 227 Thorn 228 Toshiba 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234 Universum 235 Videch 236, 237, 238 W.Whouse 239 Wards 240, 241, 242, 243 Watson 244 Yamaha 245, 246, 247, 248, 249 Zenith 250, 251 PIONEER 001, 002 HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 41 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 42 ChH éÂÂè¨Â系統 使ç¨æÂ¤ç¨ÂåºÂå¯å°ÂæÂÂæÂÂ系統è¨Âå®Âå¼æÂ¢å¾©è³åº廠è¨Âå®Âã 1 éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ系統黿ºÂã 2 æÂÂä½ INPUT SELECTOR ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂä¸Â顯示è£Âç½®ä¸Âç î STANDBY/ON æÂÂéµã ä¸Â次éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ黿ºÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂ系統çÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼é½æÂÂéÂÂæÂ°è¨Âå®Âã å®Âè£ÂèÂÂç¶Âè· å®Âè£ÂæÂÂ示 æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¸ÂæÂÂæÂ¨è½夠å¨æÂ¥å¾Â享åÂÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±æÂÂ帶ä¾ÂçÂÂæ¨Âè¶£ï¼Âå æÂ¤ 鏿ÂÂå®Âè£Âå°é»ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Âè¨Âä½Â以ä¸Âè¦Âé»Âï¼ è«Â⦠î å¨éÂÂ風è¯好çÂÂæÂ¿éÂÂ堧使ç¨æÂ¬ç³»çµ±ã î å°ÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±æÂ¾å¨穩åºãÂÂå¹³å¦çÂÂæ°´å¹³é¢ï¼Âå¦Âæ¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂç½®ç©æ«ÂæÂÂé³ é¿æÂ¶ä¸ ã è«Âå¿â¦ î æÂ¼é«Â溫æÂÂæ¿Âæ°£éÂÂçÂÂå°æÂ¹ä½¿ç¨æÂ¬ç³»çµ±ï¼Âå æÂ¾Â¾å°Âç©åÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂ ç¢çÂÂç±æºÂçÂÂéÂȌ¨ç¢åÂÂã î å°ÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±æÂ¾å¨çªÂå°æÂÂå ¶ä»Âå¯è½åÂÂé½å Âç´å°Âä¹ÂèÂÂã î å¨ç°塵éÂÂå¤ÂæÂÂéÂÂæÂ¼æ½®æ¿ÂçÂÂç°å¢Âä¸Â使ç¨æÂ¬ç³»çµ±ã î å°ÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±ç´æÂ¥æÂ¾å¨æÂ´å¤§å¨ä¸ÂæÂ¹ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂ¾å¨堶ä»Â使ç¨æÂÂæÂÂè®Âç± çÂÂç«Âé«Âè²系統è£Âç½®ä¸Âã î å¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂ顯示å¨éÂÂè¿Â使ç¨æÂ¬ç³»çµ±ï¼Âå¦åÂÂå¯è½æÂÂç¢çÂÂå¹²æÂ¾ ï¼Â尤堶æÂ¯ä½¿ç¨室堧天ç·ÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã î å¨å»ÂæÂ¿æÂÂå ¶ä»Âå¯è½使系統æÂ´é²æÂ¼æ²¹ç ÂæÂÂè¸氣çÂÂå°æÂ¹ä½¿ç¨æÂ¬ 系統ã î å°ÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±æÂ¾å¨åÂÂéÂÂçÂÂå°毯ä¸ÂæÂÂç¨å¸ÂèÂÂä½Âï¼Â以å Âé»ç¤Â系統ç æÂ£ç±ã î å°Â系統æÂ¾å¨ä¸Â平穩çÂÂ表é¢ï¼ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»Âé¢ç©Âç¡æ³ÂæÂ¯æÂÂ系統åÂÂå 蠳æÂ¶çÂÂ表é¢ä¸Âã ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂ格张以ä¸ÂæÂ¯æÂ¨å¨ DVD ä¸Âå¯以æÂ¾å°çÂÂæÂÂé DVD ãÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶å¨ã é£æÂ¥ç·ÂãÂÂé¸å°廣æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂ影帶çÂÂ主è¦Âç°ç¹Âè²格å¼Âç°¡è¦Â說æÂ ã Dolby Dolby æÂÂè¡ÂçÂÂ說æÂÂå¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂ示ã å¦ÂéÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Âé 訪 www.dolby.com ã Dolby Digital Dolby Digital çºé»影é¢åÂÂå®¶ä¸ÂæÂÂæÂ¾ DVD èÂÂæÂ¸ä½Â廣æÂÂé³軠常ç¨çÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂæÂ¸ä½Âé³è¨Â編碼æÂÂè¡Âã å®ÂæÂÂä¾Âå ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¨ç«ÂçÂÂè² éÂÂï¼Âç±äºÂÃ¥ÂÂå ¨é³åÂÂè²éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ主è¦Âä¾Âæ·±æ²ÂãÂÂéÂÂéÂÂçÂÂé³æÂ ä½¿ç¨çÂÂç¹殠LFE ï¼Âä½Âé »çÂÂæÂÂæÂÂï¼Âè²éÂÂæÂÂçµÂæÂÂï¼Âå æÂ¤æÂÂçº Dolby Digital ã 5.1 è²éÂÂãÂÂä¸Âè©ÂçÂÂç±ä¾Âã é¤äºÂä¸Âè¿°çÂÂæ ¼å¼Âç¹é»Âä¹Âå¤Âï¼ Dolby Digital 解碼卿ÂÂä¾Âè å®é³ãÂÂç«Âé«Âè²åÂÂä¾Âèªå¤Â種ä½Âå ÂçÂÂèÂÂè²éÂÂç Dolby Pro Logic é³è¨Âç¸容çÂÂ縮混åÂÂè½ã å¦ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¹é»Â稱çº Dialog Normalization ï¼Âå°Â話æÂ£å¸¸åÂÂï¼ ï¼ÂæÂÂ¹é»Âæ ¹æÂÂç¸å°ÂæÂ¼å ¶å³° å¼ä½ÂæºÂçÂÂç¯Âç®ä¸Âä¹Âå¹³åÂÂä½ÂæºÂä¾Âæ¸Âå°Âç¯Âç®çÂÂè²é³ï¼Â以便é å°ä¸Âè´çÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾ä½ÂæºÂã Dolby Pro Logic II å Dolby Surround Dolby Pro Logic IIx æÂ¯ Dolby Pro Logic II ï¼Âå Dolby Pro Logic @解碼 系統çÂÂæÂ¹è¯çÂÂã ç±æÂ¼æÂ¡ç¨åµæÂ°ç ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé 輯ãÂÂé»路ï¼ÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±å¯以å¾Â以ä¸ÂçÂÂä¾ÂæºÂä¸ÂæÂ·åÂÂåºç°ç¹Âé³ æÂÂ@⢠Dolby Pro Logic ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂèª任ä½Âç«Âé«Âè²ä¾ÂæºÂä¹ 4.1 è²éÂÂé³ æÂÂï¼ å®è²éÂÂ@⢠Dolby Pro Logic II ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂèª任ä½Âç«Âé«Âè²ä¾ÂæºÂä¹ 5.1 è²é é³æÂ ï¼Âç«Âé«Âç°ç¹Âè²@使ç¨éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼Âç±æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ä¸ÂçÂÂä½Âé³管ç ç¢ç ã .1 ãÂÂéÂÂä½Âé³è²é Dolby Surround æÂ¯å¨ç«Âé«Âè²é³è»Âå §åµÂå ¥ç°ç¹Âè²è³Âè¨Âç 編 碼 系統@Dolby Pro Logic 解碼å¨使ç¨æÂ¤ç³»çµ±æÂÂä¾ÂæÂ´ç´°ç·» çÂÂå¢Âå¼·ç°ç¹Âè²èÂÂè½æÂÂæÂÂã Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus æÂ¯ä½¿ç¨æÂ¼æÂÂæÂÂé«Âå³çÂÂç¯Âç®åÂÂåªÂé«ÂçÂÂ丠ä¸Â代é³è¨ÂæÂÂè¡Âã éÂÂ種æÂÂè¡ÂçµÂÃ¥ÂÂäºÂæÂÂçÂÂï¼Â以符åÂÂæÂªä¾ÂéÂÂ覠強大åÂÂè½èÂÂ使ç¨å½ÂæÂ§çÂÂ廣æÂÂéÂÂæ±Âï¼Âè½實äºÂæÂªä¾Âé«Âå³çÂÂ丠代ä¸ÂæÂÂæÂÂå¾ çÂÂå ¨æÂ¹ä½Â鳿ÂÂæ½ÂÃ¥ÂÂã Dolby Digital Plus 以堨ç ç DVD è HD 廣æÂÂçÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂæ¨Â溠Dolby Digital çº建ç«Âåº ç¤Âï¼Â並éÂÂå°Âä¸Âä¸Â代çÂÂå½±é³æÂ¥æÂ¶å¨èÂÂè¨Âè¨Âï¼Âä½Âä»Âç¶è½èÂÂç® Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂçÂÂå½±é³æÂ¥æÂ¶å¨ç¸容ã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 42 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 43 ChH Dolby Digital Plus æÂÂä¾Âå¤Âé 7.1 è²é @* ï¼ÂçÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂé³訠編åºÂè½åÂÂï¼Â並以æÂÂ大å¯è½ç 6 Mbps æ½Âå¨ä½Âå ÂçÂÂã HD DVD ä¸Âé«Âé 3 Mbps Ã¥ÂÂèÂÂå Âç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âé«Âé 1.7 Mbps BD 丠çÂÂæÂÂ大ä½Âå ÂçÂÂæÂÂè½æÂ¯æÂ´å®ä¸Â編碼ä½Âå ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂå¤Â種編åºÂ@並ä¸Âå¨ç¾æÂÂç Dolby Digital 系統ä¸Â輸åºç¨æÂ¼æÂÂæÂ¾ç Dolby Digital ä½Âå ÂæµÂã Dolby Digital Plus å¯以精æºÂå°éÂÂç¾ æÂÂæÂ®åÂÂ製ä½Â人æÂ³è¦ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé³ã å®Âä¹ÂæÂÂæÂÂå ·åÂÂç¨ç«Âè²éÂÂ輸åºçÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂ鳿ÂÂãÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂå¼Âæ··é³ èÂÂå Âé²系統ä¸ÂçÂÂ串æµÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã é«Âå³çÂÂå¤ÂåªÂé«Âä»Âé¢ ï¼ HDMI ï¼ æÂ¯æÂ´çÂÂå®ç·Âå¼ÂæÂ¸ä½Âé£æÂ¥å¯ç¨æÂ¼é«Âå³çÂÂé³è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âè¨Âã Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD æÂ¯éÂÂå°Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â代çÂÂé«Âå³çÂÂå Âç¢ÂçÂÂèÂÂéÂÂç¼ç æÂ°ä¸Â代ç¡æÂÂ失編碼æÂÂè¡Âã Dolby TrueHD 帶ä¾ÂéÂÂæÂ¼äººå¿Â丠ä½Âå ÂçÂÂç´Â媲ç¾ÂéÂÂé³室製ä½ÂçÂÂè²é³ï¼Â並以ä¸Âä¸Â代çÂÂé«Âå³ç å Âç¢ÂçÂÂå³éÂÂåºçÂÂ實çÂÂé«Âå³çÂÂå¨Âæ¨Âé«Âé©Âã çµÂÃ¥ÂÂé«Âå³çÂÂè¦Â訠æÂÂï¼ Dolby TrueHD 以令人é©Âè±ÂçÂÂ鳿ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé«Âå³çÂÂå½±åÂÂï¼ÂæÂ ä¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂªæÂÂçÂÂå®¶åºÂé»影é¢é«Âé©Âã å®ÂæÂ¯æÂ´é«Âé 18 Mbps çÂÂä½Âå ÂçÂÂï¼ÂèÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂ製é«ÂéÂÂå «åÂÂå ¨ é³åÂÂè²é @* ï¼ ï¼Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂé½æÂ¯ 24 ä½Âå  /96 kHz é³è¨Âã å®ÂæÂÂæÂÂ廣æ³ÂçÂÂä¸Âç¹¼è³ÂæÂÂï¼Âå æÂ¬å°Â話æÂ£å¸¸åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ§ å¶ã é«Âå³çÂÂå¤ÂåªÂé«Âä»Âé¢ ï¼ HDMI ï¼ÂæÂ¯æÂ´çÂÂå®ç·Âå¼ÂæÂ¸ä½Âé£ æÂ¥å¯ç¨æÂ¼é«Âå³çÂÂé³è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âè¨Âã * HD DVD Ã¥ÂÂèÂÂå Âç¢ÂçÂÂæ¨ÂæºÂç®åÂÂå°Âå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂ大è²éÂÂæÂ¸é å¶å¨堫åÂÂï¼Âè Dolby Digital Plus å Dolby TrueHD æÂ¯æÂ´ è¶ éÂÂå «åÂÂè²éÂÂã ç± Dolby Laboratories æÂÂæ¬Â製é ã ãÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âã ã ã Dolby ãÂÂã ã Pro Logic ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé D æ¨ÂèªÂæÂ¯ Dolby Laboratories çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã DTS Dolby æÂÂè¡ÂçÂÂ說æÂÂå¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂ示ã å¦ÂéÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Âé 訪網章www.dtstech.com ã DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround æÂ¯ä¾Âèª DTS Inc. ç 5.1 è²éÂÂé³è¨Âç·¨ 碼系統ï¼Âç®åÂÂ廣æ³Â使ç¨æÂ¼ DVD-Video ã DVD-Audio ã 5.1 è²éÂÂ鳿¨Âç¢ÂçÂÂãÂÂæÂ¸ä½Â廣æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»è¦ÂéÂÂæÂ²ã å®Âå¯以æÂÂä¾Âå Âå ç¨ç«ÂçÂÂè²éÂÂï¼Âç±äºÂÃ¥ÂÂå ¨é³åÂÂè²éÂÂå ä¸Âä¸Âå LFE è²éÂÂæÂÂçµ æÂÂã 使ç¨ä½Âå£Â縮çÂÂå¾Âå°è¼Â好çÂÂé³質ï¼Â並卿ÂÂæÂ¾æÂÂ以è¼Âé« çÂÂéÂÂçÂÂå³éÂÂè²é³ã DTS-ES DTS-ES ï¼ ES 代表æÂ´å±Âç°ç¹Âè²ï¼ÂæÂ¯ä¸Â種å¯以尠DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 å DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 編碼ä¾ÂæºÂ解碼çÂÂ解碼 å¨ã DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 以å®Âå ¨åÂÂé¢ ï¼Âç¨ç«Âï¼ÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè² å¾Âè²éÂÂæÂÂä¾ ãÂÂçÂÂ實çÂÂã 6.1 è²éÂÂè²é³ã DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 æÂÂæÂÂèÂÂç°ç¹Âè²左î¿å³è²éÂÂå½¢æÂÂç©é£çÂÂç°ç¹Âè²å¾Âè²éÂÂã é 堩種鳿ºÂé½èÂÂå³統ç DTS 5.1 è²éÂÂ解碼å¨ç¸容ã DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 å¯以ç¢çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèª任ä½Âç©é£å¼Âç«Âé«Âè²é³溠ï¼Âä¾Â妠è¦Âè¨ÂæÂÂé»è¦Âï¼Âè 5.1 è²éÂÂ鳿ºÂç 6.1 è²éÂÂç°ç¹Âè²ã èÂÂ丠å®Â使ç¨已編碼å¨é³æºÂä¸ÂçÂÂè²éÂÂè³Âè¨Âï¼Â並èªè¡ÂèÂÂçÂÂ以å¤æÂ· è²éÂÂçÂÂå®Âä½ ï¼Â使ç¨éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼Âç±æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ ä¸ÂçÂÂä½Âé³管çÂÂç¢ç ã .1 ãÂÂéÂÂä½Âé³è²éÂÂï¼ ã å¦ÂæÂÂ使ç¨堩å è²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂï¼Â使ç¨ DTS Neo:6 æÂÂæÂÂä¾Âå ©åÂÂ模张ï¼Âé»影é¢è é³æ¨Âï¼ ã DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 æÂ¯åÂÂå§ DTS Digital Surround çÂÂ延伸ï¼Â使ç¨ DTS 96/24 解碼卿ÂÂä¾Âé«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ質 96 kHz/24 ä½Âå Âé³訠ã æÂ¤æ ¼ å¼Âä¹Âå®Âå ¨åÂÂå¾Âç¸容æÂ¼æÂÂæÂÂç®åÂÂçÂÂ解碼å¨ã éÂÂ表示 DVD æÂ æÂ¾å¨å¯以使ç¨å³統ç DTS 5.1 è²éÂÂ解碼卿ÂÂæÂ¾æÂ¤è»Âé«Âã DTS-EXPRESS DTS-EXPRESS æÂ¯ä¸Â種ä½Âä½Âå ÂçÂÂ解碼æÂÂè¡Âï¼ÂæÂ¯æÂ´åºå®Âè³ÂæÂ å³輸çÂÂç 5.1 è²éÂÂã æÂ¤æ ¼æ ¼è HD DVD çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé³è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂå  ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂ次è¦Âé³è¨ÂæÂ´åÂÂï¼Âå°Âå°Âä¾ÂçÂÂ廣æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨ÂæÂ¶é³è¨Â堧容æÂ åÂÂæ½Âå¨çÂÂé©ç¨æÂ§ã DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio æÂÂè¡ÂçºèÂÂè½è 帶ä¾Âå¨å°Âæ¥ÂéÂÂé³室 ä¸ÂéÂÂ製çÂÂ主è¦Â鳿ºÂï¼Âä¸Âä½ÂæÂªæÂÂ失任ä½Âè³ÂæÂÂä¸Âä¿ÂçÂÂäºÂé³ 質ã DTS-HD Master Audio æÂ¡ç¨å¯è®Âè³ÂæÂÂå³輸çÂÂï¼Â以é 趠éÂÂæ¨Â溠DVD çÂÂèÂÂå Âç¢ÂçÂÂ格张ï¼ÂæÂÂ大å³輸ç 24.5 Mbps ï¼ å HD-DVD 格张ï¼ÂæÂÂ大å³輸ç 18.0 Mbps ï¼ÂçÂÂéÂÂçÂÂå³é è³ÂæÂÂã éÂÂäºÂé«Âè³ÂæÂÂå³輸éÂÂçÂÂ卿²ÂæÂÂä»»ä½Âè³ÂæÂÂæÂÂ失çÂÂæÂ æ³ ä¸Âå³é 96 kHz/24 ä½Âå Âç 7.1 è²éÂÂ鳿ºÂï¼ÂèÂÂä¸Âå®Âå ¨ç¡æÂ åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå§ÂçÂÂé³質 ã DTS-HD Master Audio æÂ¯ä¸Â種ç¡å¯åÂÂ代ç æÂÂè¡Âï¼Âå®Âå¯以ä¾Â鳿¨ÂæÂÂå½±çÂÂÃ¥Â愫Â人çÂÂéÂÂè¦Âå®ÂæÂ´éÂÂç¾åºç 實çÂÂè²é³ã â DTS âÂÂæÂ¯ DTS, Inc. çÂÂ註åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âï¼ â DTS-HD Master Audio â æÂ¯ DTS, Inc. çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 43 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 44 ChH æÂ éÂÂæÂÂé¤ 人åÂÂç¶Â常é¯å°Âä¸ÂæÂ£ç¢ºä¹ÂæÂÂä½Âç¶æÂÂ系統æÂ éÂÂæÂÂç°常ã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨èªÂçºæÂ¬æ©ÂæÂÂä»»ä½Âç°常ä¹ÂèÂÂï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂ以ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé»Âé²è¡Â檢æÂ¥ã æÂÂæÂ åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âå¯è½åºå¨堶ä»Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âã è«Âä»Â細檢æÂ¥å ¶ä»Â使ç¨ä¸ÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂȌ¨ã å¦ÂæÂÂå¨檢æÂ¥ä»¥ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé»Âå¾Âä»Âç¡æ³ÂæÂ¹åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«Âå°± è¿Â洽詢æÂ¨çÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¾Â代çºç¶Âä¿®ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¬ç³»çµ±æÂ¯å çºåÂÂå°éÂÂéÂȍÂÂå¤Âä¾ÂæÂÂæÂÂè´ç¡æ³ÂæÂ£å¸¸æÂÂä½Âï¼Âè«Âå°Â黿ºÂæÂÂé Âå¾Â輸åºæÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå»ï¼Â以åÂÂ復æÂ£å¸¸ çÂÂæÂÂä½ÂçÂÂæ Âã â¢ èÂ¥æÂ¯èÂÂ鳿ÂÂç¸éÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«Âä¹Âä¸Â併檢æÂ¥é³æÂÂæÂÂæÂ¾è£Âç½®çÂÂè¨Âå®Âã å¦ÂéÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±è£Âç½®çÂÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã ä¸Âè¬ Ã¥ÂÂ顠解決辦泠黿ºÂç¡æ³ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂçªÂç¶éÂÂæ© ï¼Âå åÂÂæÂÂå¯è½顯示ä¸Âé¯誤è¨ÂæÂ¯ï¼ ã æÂÂ顯示å¹ÂçªÂç¶çÂÂæ» ï¼ÂèÂÂä¸Âæ²ÂæÂ è¼¸åº任ä½Âè²é³ ï¼ POWER ON æÂÂ示çÂÂ亮起 ï¼ÂèÂÂè²ï¼Âå HDMI æÂÂ示çÂÂ亮起 ï¼Âç´ è²@ã â¢ æÂ¥éÂÂæÂ¬æ©Â黿ºÂï¼ÂçÂÂå¾ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾ÂéÂÂæÂ°éÂÂæ©Âã â¢ 確å®Â主æ©Âä¸ÂçÂÂç·ÂæÂÂç¡é¬Âè«çÂÂæÂ å½¢ã å¦ÂæÂÂé¬Âè«ï¼Âå¯è½æÂÂé æÂÂ系統èªåÂÂéÂÂæ©Âã â¢ 檢æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥æÂ¯å¦æÂ£ç¢ºã â¢ è«Â確å®ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Âé³å¨åÂÂæÂ¯å¦æÂÂ足夠çÂÂéÂÂ風空éÂÂã â¢ 確å®Â主黿ºÂçÂÂé»å£Â確實é©ç¨æÂ¼æÂ¬æ©Â種ã â¢ 試èÂÂéÂÂä½Âé³éÂÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂä»Âç¡æ³Â解決åÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«Âå°ÂæÂ¬æ©ÂæÂÂè³æÂÂè¿ÂçÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂæÂ¨çÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂèÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂç¶ ä¿®ã â¢ è«Âå¿堵ä½ÂåºÂé¨çÂÂé²氣å£åÂÂæÂ¬æ©ÂèÂÂé¢çÂÂæÂÂæ°£å£ã é¸æÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½å¾Âï¼Âæ²ÂæÂÂè²é³輸 åºã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¨æÂ£å¨使ç¨ç·Â路輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Â確å®Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂ¹å¼ÂæÂ£ç¢ºä¸¦èª¿æÂ´å¤Âé¨è¨Âå ï¼Âä¾Âå¦Âå¯ æÂÂå¼ÂæÂÂæÂ¾å¨ï¼ÂçÂÂé³é ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 33 é Âä¸Âç é£æÂ¥è¼Âå©è¨Âå ï¼Âã â¢ 調é«Âé³éÂÂã â¢ HDMI 模å¼Âè¨Âå®Âçº Through Mode ï¼Â第 36 é Âï¼ æÂ ï¼ èÂÂæÂ¬æ©Âé£æÂ¥çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æ²ÂæÂÂ輸åº任ä½Âè² é³ã â¢ 使ç¨ HDMI 飿ÂÂ¥ DVI è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âæ²ÂæÂÂ輸åº任ä½Âè²é³ã â¢ æÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæÂ§å¨ä¸Âç MUTE 以éÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé³åÂÂè½ã ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨æÂªè¼¸åº任ä½Âè² é³ã â¢ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 30 é Âä¸Âç è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 以檢æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨ä½ÂæºÂã â¢ 檢æÂ¥æÂ¨æÂ¯å¦é¸æÂ Stereo 模张ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 24 é Âä¸Âç 以ç°ç¹Â鳿ÂÂèÂÂè½ ï¼ ã â¢ æÂ£ç¢ºå°å°ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¥ä¸ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 8 é Âä¸Âç æÂ¥ç· ï¼ ã â¢ 使ç¨å Âå¸æÂ¸ä½Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥å¤Âé¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Â檢æÂ¥å¤Âé¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé³è¨Â輸åºè HDMI è¨Âå®Âã ç¡æ³Â使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§å¨é²è¡ÂæÂÂæÂ§ã â¢ æÂ´æÂÂé»池ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 21 é Âä¸Âç è£Âå ¥éÂÂæÂ§å¨é»池ï¼Âã â¢ è«Âå¨ 7 m å §çÂÂç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Â以 30 ð çÂÂè§Â度å°ÂæºÂéÂÂæÂ§æÂÂæÂÂ卿ÂÂä½ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 22 é Âä¸Âç 使ç¨éÂÂæÂ§ å¨ ï¼Âã â¢ ç§»é¤éÂÂç¤Âç©æÂÂå¾Âå ¶ä»Âä½Âç½®æÂÂä½Âã â¢ é¿å ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æÂ¿ä¸ÂçÂÂéÂÂæÂ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨åÂÂå°é½å Âç´å°Âã â¢ æÂÂä½Âé£æÂ¥è³ CONTROL OUT æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Âå ÂéÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Â確å®Âå·²æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ§å¶é£æÂ¥ç·Âå HDMI æÂÂé¡Âæ¯Âé³è¨Âé£æÂ¥ç· ï¼Â第 35 é Âï¼ ã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 44 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 45 ChH 調諧å¨ HDMI Ã¥ÂÂ顠解決辦泠æÂ¶è½éÂȌ°廣æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ顯çÂÂé é³ã â¢ è«ÂæÂ¥ä¸ AM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 8 é Âä¸Âç æÂ¥ç· ï¼ ä¸¦å 以調æÂ´æÂ¹åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä½Âç½® @以å¾Âå°æÂÂä½³çÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶ æÂÂæÂÂã æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以å¦å¤ÂæÂ¥ä¸Âæ¢Â堧鍿ÂÂå¤Âé¨ AM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 35 é Âä¸Âç é£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥å¤©ç· ï¼ ã â¢ å®Â堨伸å±Âé FM ç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天ç·Âï¼Â調æÂ´æÂÂä½³æÂ¥æÂ¶çÂÂä½Âç½®ï¼Âç¶å¾Âåºå®ÂæÂ¼çÂÂä¸Âã æÂ¨ä¹Âå¯以å¦å¤ÂæÂ¥ä¸ çµÂå¤ÂæÂÂ¥ FM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 35 é Âä¸Âç é£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥å¤©ç· ï¼ ã â¢ éÂÂéÂÂå ¶ä»Âå¯è½é æÂÂéÂÂè¨ÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå°Â堶移走ã â¢ 調諧éÂÂéÂÂä¸Âé©ç¨æÂ¼æÂ¨æÂÂå¨åÂÂå®¶æÂÂå°åÂÂã èÂ¥è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ調諧éÂÂéÂÂï¼ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 29 é Âä¸Âç æÂ¹è®Âé »ç éÂÂé ã èªåÂÂ調諧åÂÂè½ç¡æ³ÂæÂ¥æÂ¶å°æÂÂ亠éÂȌ°ã â¢ éÂȌ°è¨ÂèÂÂ微弱ã èªåÂÂ調諧åÂÂè½å è½åµ測å°è¨ÂèÂÂç¼å°Âè¯好çÂÂç¡ç·ÂéÂȌ°ã èÂ¥è¦Âç²å¾ÂæÂ´å éÂÂæÂ çÂÂ調諧æ¢Âä»¶ï¼Âå¯æÂ¥ä¸Âä¸ÂçµÂ室å¤Â天ç·Âã æÂ éÂÂç¾象 解決辦泠æ²ÂæÂÂå½±åÂÂæÂÂè²é³ã â¢ æÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯ HDCP ç¸容è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 檢æÂ¥æÂ¨æÂ£å¨é£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¯å¦çº HDCP ç¸容訠åÂÂã â¢ æÂ¯å¦å¯以æÂÂé ÂæÂ¾Â¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨使ç¨ ï¼Âå³使æÂ¯ HDCP ç¸容è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè¦Âé£æÂ¥çÂÂä¾ÂæºÂè¨Âå èÂÂå®Âã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂå° HDMI è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂç´æÂ¥é£æÂ¥è³顯示卿ÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âä»Âç¶åÂÂå¨ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ顯示å¨çÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂè¯絡製é åÂÂ以å°Âæ±ÂæÂ¯æÂ´ã æ²ÂæÂÂè²é³ï¼ÂæÂÂè²é³çªÂç¶æ¶Â失ã â¢ 檢æÂÂ¥ HDMI 模å¼ÂæÂ¯å¦è¨Âå®Âçº AMP Mode / Through Mode ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¯ DVI è£Âç½®ï¼Âè«Â使ç¨å¦å¤ÂçÂÂé£æÂ¥æÂ¹å¼Âé£æÂ¥é³è¨Âã â¢ 檢æÂ¥ä¾ÂæºÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé³è¨Â輸åºè¨Âå®Âã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 45 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 46 ChH 顯示çÂÂè¨ÂæÂ¯ è¨ÂæÂ¯ 說æÂ 192kHz PCM SACD DTS-HD DTS Express Dolby T rueHD Dolby D éÂÂäºÂè¨ÂæÂ¯å¨æÂ¨æÂÂä½ÂèÂÂæÂ£å¨æÂÂæÂ¾çÂÂé³è¨Âä¾ÂæºÂä¸Âç¸容çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½æÂÂ顯示ã No MIC æÂªæÂ¥ä¸ MCACC è¨Âå®Â麥å Â風æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂ丠MCACC æÂÂ顯示æÂ¬è¨ÂæÂ¯ã Muting æÂ¬æ©ÂéÂÂ鳿ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂ丠TEST TONE æÂ MCACC æÂÂ顯示æÂ¬è¨ÂæÂ¯ã 2ch Only æÂÂä½Âå é©ç¨æÂ¼éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âå ç®åÂÂä¾ÂæºÂçºå¤Âè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂèÂÂç¡æ³Âé²è¡Âã Exit æÂ¤è¨ÂæÂ¯æÂÂå¨é¸å®éÂÂç½®ä¸Â段æÂÂéÂÂå¾ÂèªåÂÂéÂÂåºæÂÂåºç¾ã HDMI Through ç¶ HDMI 模å¼Âè®Âçºç´éÂÂ模å¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âè®ÂæÂ´èÂÂè²模å¼ÂãÂÂé³éÂÂæÂÂæÂÂäºÂè²é³è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂ顯示æÂ¬è¨ÂæÂ¯ã Unknow ç¡æ³ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Â硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂæÂ£å¨æÂÂæÂ¾å §å®¹çÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂè³Âè¨Âã No Genre æÂªè¨Âå®Â硬碠/DVD éÂÂå½±æ©ÂæÂ£å¨æÂÂæÂ¾å §å®¹çÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂã HDMI C.ERR 2C* é£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂ模å¼Âä¸Âç¸容ã CanâÂÂt use ⢠æÂ¨åÂÂ試å°Âä¸ÂæÂ¯æÂ´çÂÂæÂ¤åÂÂè½çÂÂä¾ÂæºÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂ使ç¨é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂ模å¼Âã â¢ ä¾ÂæºÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ£èÂÂæÂ¼ç¡æ³Â使ç¨é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂ模å¼ÂçÂÂæÂ æ³Âã â¢ æÂ¨åÂÂ試å¨æÂ¬æ©Â輸堥ä¾ÂæºÂæÂ¯ HDMI 以å¤ÂçÂÂä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂ使ç¨é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂ模å¼Âã â¢ æÂÂä½Âå ç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå®ÂèÂÂéÂÂå°ç¦ÂæÂ¢ã â¢ é³éÂÂè¶ é 51 æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂè½æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå°éÂÂå¶ã HDMI C.ERR 1** 檢æÂ¥é£æÂÂ¥ HDMI é£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂæÂ¹å¼ÂæÂ¯å¦æÂ£ç¢º ã å¦ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂæÂ¹å¼ÂæÂ£ç¢ºï¼Â表示æÂ¬æ©Âå¯è½已æÂÂ壠ã 妠æÂÂç¼çÂÂéÂÂ種æÂ æ³Âï¼Âè«Â洽詢å ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂå°±è¿ÂçÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂã Noisy! å èÂÂæÂ¯éÂÂé³太大èÂÂç¡æ³Âé Âå©å®ÂæÂ MCACC è¨Âå®Âã Error MIC! å¨ MCACC è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼Âå æÂªå°Â麥å Â風æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ£ç¢ºèÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯誤ã Error Speaker! å¨ MCACC è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼Âå æÂªå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ£ç¢ºèÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯誤ã Over T emp è«ÂéÂÂä½Âé³éÂÂã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸Â黿ºÂç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂ°æÂÂå ¥å¾Âç¡æ³Â解決éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âï¼Â表示æÂ¬æ©Âå¯è½已æÂÂå£Âã å¦ÂæÂÂç¼çÂÂéÂÂ種æÂ æ³Âï¼Âè«Â洽詢å ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂå°±è¿ÂçÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂã OC Error1 OC Error2 檢æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂ¯å¦çÂÂè·¯ã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂŽÂ¯èª¤è¨ÂæÂ¯æÂÂçºÂ顯示ï¼Âç¸éÂÂç¶Âä¿®äºÂå®Âè«Â洽詢æÂ¨çÂÂå Âé æÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂã *** BackUpERR ç¸éÂÂç¶Âä¿®äºÂå®Âè«Â洽詢æÂ¨çÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 46 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠10 47 ChH è¦Âæ ¼ SX-LX70W 鳿ÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂæÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ â¢ æÂ´å¤§å¨é¨å RMS Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂ輸åº ï¼ 8 è²éÂÂ輸åº@@åÂÂç½® ï¼ L/R ï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W ï¼ 50 W 50 W ï¼ ï¼ 1 kHz ï¼ 10 % T.H.D. ï¼ 8 ⦠@éÂÂéÂÂä¸Âç½® ï¼ CL/CR ï¼ . . . . . . . . . 100 W ï¼ 50 W 50 W ï¼ ï¼ 1 kHz ï¼ 10 % T.H.D. ï¼ 8 ⦠@ç°ç¹Âè² ï¼ L/R ï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W ï¼ 50 W 50 W ï¼ ï¼ 1 kHz ï¼ 10 % T.H.D. ï¼ 8 ⦠@éÂÂéÂÂä½Âé³ ï¼ÂéÂÂè²éÂÂï¼ . . . . . . . . . 100 W ï¼ 50 W 50 W ï¼ ï¼ 100 Hz ï¼ 10 % T.H.D. ï¼ 8 ⦠@⢠FM 調諧å¨é¨å 頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz è³ 108 MHz 天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ⦠ï¼Âä¸Â平衡张⢠AM 調諧å¨é¨å 頻çÂÂç¯ÂÃ¥Âʊȴ 9 kHz éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz è³ 1602 kHz 以 10 kHz éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz è³ 1700 kHz 天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 迴路天締⢠éÂÂä½Âé³é¨å é³箱 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ä½Âé³åÂÂå°Âè½å°å ï¼Âé²ç£Â@系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cm ï¼Âå®åÂÂ系統 æÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cm Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå x2 éÂȾ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz è³ 500 Hz æÂÂ大輸堥åÂÂç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W x2 ⢠輸堥î¿輸åºé¨å HDMI 端å 輸堥 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 æÂ¥è ³ x3 輸åº . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 æÂ¥è ³ ï¼ 5 V ï¼ 100 mA ï¼ å ¶ä»ÂæÂ¥é  ç³»çµ±æÂ¥é  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 æÂ¥è ³ é³è¨Â輸堥 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . å Âå¸ x2 ï¼ÂæÂ¸ä½Âï¼ RCA ï¼ 2 æÂ¥è ³ï¼ ï¼Âé¡Âæ¯Âï¼ æÂ§å¶輸åº . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . è¿·ä½ æÂÂå x2 顯示è£Âç½® 系統æÂ¥é  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 æÂ¥è ³ Ã¥ÂÂé³è¨Â輸åº . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . è¿·ä½ æÂÂå MCACC 輸堥 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . è¿·ä½ æÂÂå iPod 輸堥 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 æÂ¥è ³ ï¼ 12 V ï¼ 420 mA ï¼ â¢ å ¶ä» é»æºÂéÂÂæ± . . . . . . . . . . AC 110 V è³ 240 V ï¼ 50 Hz/60 Hz æ¶ÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 W å¾ æ©ÂçÂÂæ ÂçÂÂæ¶ÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.39 W ï¼ HDMI Control éÂÂï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.29 W ï¼ HDMI Control éÂÂ@尺寸 . . . 245 mm ï¼Â寬@x409 mm ï¼Âé«Âï¼ x600 mm ï¼Â深@éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.8 kg SSP-LX70ST è¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ x2 ï¼Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ x2 @⢠åÂÂç½®î¿ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ é³箱 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . å°ÂéÂÂå¼ÂæÂ¸æÂ¶å ï¼Âé²ç£Â@系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm ï¼Âå®åÂÂ系統 æÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå x3 éÂȾ åÂÂè²é . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠ä¸Â央è²é . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Hz è³ 20 kHz æÂÂ大輸堥åÂÂç åÂÂè²é . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W ä¸Â央è²é . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W 尺寸 . . . .122.5 mm ï¼Â寬@x89.5 mm ï¼Âé«Âï¼ x104 mm ï¼Â深@éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 kg ⢠ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ é³箱 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . å°ÂéÂÂå¼ÂæÂ¸æÂ¶å ï¼Âé²ç£Â@系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm ï¼Âå®åÂÂ系統 æÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå x2 éÂȾ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Hz è³ 20 kHz æÂÂ大輸堥åÂÂç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W 尺寸 . . . .122.5 mm ï¼Â寬@x89.5 mm ï¼Âé«Âï¼ x104 mm ï¼Â深@éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.44 kg é Âä»¶ ⢠é Âä»¶ç @AS-LX70 ï¼Âï¼ éÂÂæÂ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 AA/LR6 é¹¼æÂ§é»池. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 黿ºÂç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 顯示è£Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 AM 迴路天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 FM ç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 麥å Â風 ï¼Âç¨æÂ¼èªå MCACC è¨Âå®Âï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 HDMI é£æÂ¥ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 æÂ§å¶é£æÂ¥ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 顯示é£æÂ¥ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 å Âå¸æÂ¸ä½Âé£æÂ¥ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 iPod é£æÂ¥ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 æÂ¾ÂÂä½ÂæÂÂå â¢ æÂ¥æÂ¶éÂÂä½Â鳿ÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ SX-LX70W ï¼Âå è£Â箱@渠æ½Â帠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 ⢠è¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ SSP-LX70ST ï¼Âå è£Â箱@æÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥ç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 æÂÂè²å¨æÂ¯åº§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 鲿»Â墠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 èº絲 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Ã¥ÂÂ註 ⢠å ç¢åÂÂæÂ¹è¯ï¼Âè¦Âæ ¼èÂÂè¨Âè¨Âå¦ÂæÂÂè®ÂæÂ´ï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¦è¡ÂéÂÂçÂ¥ã æÂ¥æÂ¬å ÂéÂÂå ¬å¸åºçÂÂã çÂÂ欠é 2007 æÂ¥æÂ¬å ÂéÂÂå ¬å¸ã çÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂæÂÂã HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 47 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM
Printed in <ARC7765-A> Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2007 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, T okyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway , Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-441 1 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.1 1 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY . L TD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V . Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En HTP-LX70_ChH.book Page 50 Friday, September 28, 2007 9:49 AM